Home

DXA120 DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator User's Manual

1. ccccccsscceseeeeeseeeeseees 3 5 4 5 creating NEW setup data sici a ciciniscieianiaasiciai Van Codinvaonentsaediubiadanns 2 4 creating setup datta cccccscesssseeseseeseeeeens 2 4 3 2 4 2 5 3 current value GISDIAY sccicovsccsscatcseteciecesrsevsaceyeiacedeveiens 3 23 4 20 customizing the display selection Menus 3 37 4 29 customizing the FUNC key Menus cccccsseeeees 3 37 4 29 CUS TON TINCT ass caiveenevesececetstccwerease tees seiectawerdeetaeeeseniaces 3 37 4 29 De DAQSTANDARD OVEPVICW cccceeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaseneeaeeas 1 1 data AGUS UWI scriniis aan 5 71 6 26 data KINO riordino niiina TOE O OKEn ESETONA RENANE 3 39 data lengt eccuni ieai Nn 3 36 3 72 4 52 date format annenennneenenonenenoenerrrerrrrerrrrrrrrrrrrrerrrre rne 3 40 4 30 dayvhont SA WIAG cotcstisnccesstncessdiasdenigscanipamestenacacteciseasinuatinata Sa 6 15 daylight saving time rains snidsataaceniasatinmiantasuns iad letnenashenswiaiccniuina 3 19 decimal PIA CC icissiicniccnivatnannsenddiansevadwasseasvatdexnsantecanbendestens 3 8 4 7 decimal POIMI irsana 5 54 6 5 decimal point TY DS ccescrsasescncecdsesneccmesaesassacdereneecisxecarnaccs 3 41 4 31 default gateway orn ssssertencndandurmennecas suetadendestnauehercandubaten 3 57 4 41 CS TANT Seting sasce 2s ats cersaceagestncanonsacesarsagesdaveatnacnssadeicecioaseees 5 35 detail setting isciccesaccs ecactentsnveeieciexehimacheacioecdenin
2. Co minja i Panera W Detau ikaja Pap Auto message Qorr Gon Program display porition de ia eeen alize Loorat InT 01 LOOPO2 FF nt 02 Looros E int 03 Loopod ff a AE Locros E H T os Looros E REE P Auto change to program run display Auto message If you select On initial setting a message is automatically written on the trend display when program control is started and when program control is stopped If you do not wish to write messages select Off The message when starting program operation is PROGRAM RUN the message when stopping the program operation is PROGRAM RESET Position On the program selection screen and program operation screen the specified patterns and PV waveforms can be displayed in the same display frame full display and data can be displayed by dividing the display position per loop split display When using split display select the display position number from 1 to 6 for each loop For Style 3 or later the position setting for loops turned ON in operating loop designation can be entered With style 2 or earlier only settings for loops turned ON in Program Control under Internal Loops in the Setup tab can be entered During cascade control even numbered loops within the same terminal block are not available Operation Display Automatic Switching Style Number S3 or Later When a program execution command is sent via the communi
3. Setup i Alarm Relay Remote Temperature i Scan IntervaltMemory Temperature Unit i E all F i Channel Key Lock Login a Time zone d Timer 2 Report a oj 00 d Temperature E IPera e Aux Pi BUX P Time zone Tag fChannel a Channel a Tag d MNetwork Memory Alarm ra Language English al Japanese m Germany French Partial Cal Not Use Batch Not Q Use Temperature Select the C or F for the temperature unit Tag Channel Select whether to use the tag see Tag on page 6 6 or channel number as the measurement computation channel label If you select tag you can select the label display from tag and channel see page 6 6 Memory alarm time Free space in the internal memory is monitored and the memory alarm relay option F1 can be programmed to activate some period of time before the memory is completely full This time period is called the memory alarm time Displayed language Select the language to be used on the display The types of displayed language vary depending on the style number of the DX or MV If the style number is S2 or later you can select German or French in addition to English and Japanese Partial expanded display lf the partial expanded display is set to Not the partial expanded display settings of the Meas Math tab are void Batch function option BT1 style number S2 or later You can set the batch function when the style number of the DX or MV is S2 or lat
4. Event Action File Menu Customize Web Report This appears when you click the Item column Slider to adjust the size of the top and bottom display areas Click a channel box to open the report channel selection dialog box The report channels you select are assigned These settings affect how report data in the internal memory is displayed on the operator and monitor pages You can create 10 report layouts You can register up to 10 items to display in each layout You can display reports on the operator or monitor page by specifying the report layout and report data Web Report e Use and Title Set Use to ON and enter a report layout name of 64 characters or less in the Title box e Item The number of registered items appears in this column Click an Item box to display the Item setting area under the slider Setting appears in the Web Report Item box whose Item setting area is displayed Item e Use Set Use to ON e Channel Type and Name Set the report channel number for example R01 in the Channel box Set the type of computation Max Min Ave Sum or Instant in the Type box Enter the item name in the Name box using up to 16 characters IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Environment IM 04L41B01 64EN Basic Environment Basic setting f Environment Basic Environment Basic Environment Data Kind amp Display Event T Det
5. Ei Hardy are C ontig jurat or Mew Ep Hardware Configur Open Cerrito bd The Open dialog box is displayed DY2000Fulloption pdl D000 Fulloption pdl DAQSTATION Configuration File pel prl Ra 2 Selecta setup data file with the PDL extension 3 2 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Settup Data Changing Checking the System Configuration You can create new hardware configuration files or open existing configuration files and then check the system configuration or change the configuration according to the specifications of the connected DX1000 DX2000 Normally a system is set up according to the specifications of the DX1000 DX2000 to be set up 1 Choose System System Configuration from the menu bar The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the DXAdvanced tab Dx cx FX DeAdvanced 4 gt System Configuration l X Type Channel Firm ersion Option Math NONE on J NONE RS 232 RS 422 485 PROFIBUS DP Serial Alarm Relay FAIL P Remote P Pulse C Calibration correction P utd Cu25 RTD input Est input P use P utteeteh E Security Option OK Cancel 2 Change the various settings according to the DX1000 DX2000 that you will connect to blue and brown items are selected gray items are cleared The settings in the Option group differ depending on the m
6. I Serial Certification Key e Host Principal The DX account name registered on the KDC server You can enter up to 20 alphanumeric characters e Realm Name The name of the domain that contains the KDC server and the DX You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Password Set the password to use to access the KDC server using up to 20 characters The password is displayed as e Encryption Select an encryption method that the server supports from AES128 AES256 and ARC4 ARC4 ARCFOUR is an encryption algorithm that is compatible with RC4 KDC Connection You can specify a primary and a secondary KDC server e KDC Server Name The KDC server name You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Port No You can specify a value from 1 to 65535 If you do not specify a port number the default port number which is 88 is used 3 71 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Serial Serial Basic setting 1 Environment Alarm 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 Scan Interval i Odd G Even None Measure Function 7 928 Report Q Normal MODBUS Master Barcode J Remote Ethernet Serial Q Offoff XON XON XOMRS CSRS Serial E Modbus master For RS 232 e Baud Rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps e Parity Set the parity check method to Odd Even or None e Data length Select 7 or 8 bits
7. Memory Stop Alarm The relay contact output is turned on when an item that is set to ON occurs Alarm is available in release numbers 3 and later 3 40 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Detail Setting Basic setting S Environment Basic Environment Tag Channel Detail Setting Tag No amp OFF ON x Option Language Engish Japanese Chinese German French Alarm 5 AEE E Remote controller ID P aar Decimal Point Type amp Poit Comma Report Menu display OFF ON J Remote Batch Ethernet Batch operation qty orF DIG GT Gh number 6 A Auta increment CJ GEE Ga ON R view Trend Type amp T Y Circular Partial amp OFF ON Trend Rate Switching GQ OFF ON Message gt irite Group amp Common Separate D Power Fail Message OFF ON S Change Message amp OFF ON D Input Output Scale over Free Over 5 Key Security amp Login 2 lt Comm Security OFF Login S Multi login Q OFF ON Password management amp OFF ON Auto Save OFF ON Media FIFO amp OFF ON e Tag Settings Description Tag Displays tags or tag numbers Channel numbers are displayed for channels that do not have tags or tag numbers assigned to them Channel Displays channel numbers e Tag No Release number 3 or later Select ON to use tag numbers e Language Select the display language e Remote controller ID Select the remote controller ID from 0 to 31 When not usi
8. Q Over Over Error G Skip Limit Q Over Skip File kind Combined G Split Q Separate Use Template amp OFF ON Set Calibration Signature Process Type Sign from recorder Memory stop at signature FTP transfer at signing Set Calibration OFF ON Notification Renotification Q Batch Continuous amp OFF ON amp OFF ON e Value on Error Specify whether to set the display for a computation error to Over or Over e Overflow Sum Ave Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the SUM or AVE computation of TLOG or CLOG This setting is also applied to report generation Settings Description Error Sets the computed result to computation error Skip Discards the overflow data and continues the computation Limit Uses a limit value in place of the overflow data and continues the computation e Overflow Min Max P P Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the MAX MIN or P P computation of TLOG or CLOG This setting is also applied to report generation Settings Description Over Uses the overflow data as is Skip Discards the overflow data and continues the computation e Report 1 to 4 Select the type of data to output as reports Settings Description OFF Does not output reports You cannot set Report 1 to OFF Ave Outputs the average value Max Outputs the maximum value Min Outputs the minimum value Sum Outputs the sum value
9. User Name Password Same as the supervisor settings Key Lock No Settings Description OFF No limitations on the operation 1 to 10 Registration number of the operation limitation Key lock Select whether to lock each item Settings Description Free Key lock not applied Lock Disables the operation IM 04L41B01 64EN Ethernet IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings TCP IP I Environment Host Information Alarm DHCP oF Gon Sddiess Subnet Mask oe WEE peel Se aa l EE E I Login E E E l E Ethernet DeETaut Gateway TCRAP DNS wh FTP DNS accession G OFF oN I Modbus client 5 E Mail 1 SNTP client Server functions Sddiess I Report Key Lock Domain Mame Server Primary Server Secondary Serial Domain Primary Domain Secondary Control Keep Alive OFF G amp ON Time out oF G on Timeout timermin eek Set the IP address to a fixed IP address or obtain it automatically DHCP Consult with your network administrator for the network parameters such as the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS When using a fixed IP address e DHCP Set DHCP to OFF IP Address Set the IP address to assign to the MV1000 MV2000 e Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask according to the system or network to which the MV1000 MV2000 belongs e Default Gateway Set the IP address of the gateway e Host Name Set the MV s h
10. ccccccccssseecceeeececcceeeeeeceeseeeceuseeecseusesesseaesesssages 6 4 Input Type Mode and Range Type ccccssscccccsssececcesseecceneececeseeeeesseseeessseeesseseees 6 5 Difference Computation and Reference ccccccccccsececceeceeceeeeeseeceseeesesseeesseeeesseeeees 6 5 Ba EN gS a aaa eee a ea ee a E A ae eee ee eee ee eee 6 5 A gage a cc Se ges see estates ee AEE te A esate en pace ncaa eo neeee ET 6 5 TS FR csc ca sae ass see ee ete nse sete 6 5 PMI exacted EE E E E E E E EE E E E E E A AT 6 6 Input Filter and Moving Average neennesnnnssensnrrssrrssrrrnsrrnsrreerrrserressrrrsrrenrrererrrerrenene 6 6 WAG EE E EE E ck EE NE AN E E OEE E E EE A E A E 6 6 DIE E LONG RRI EA E A I O AE E A E E E E EEE ATT 6 6 D ao O E a seen daesanees 6 7 Partial Expanded DISplay sont cczeccecuventdvines scavesscvansuSalstaciudesadentaeiedteucieessteadivtaesaadieaateoess 6 7 UPO COO esre E Ea 6 7 Copying and Pasting Setup Data serisiiisiiriisisseriiteiissuridiiraneiaianidib aa iiinis ciai 6 7 Setting One Channel at a Time cccccessececcesseeeceeeecececeececcceeeeecsusseesseuseeessesseeessaaes 6 8 6 3 Setting the Computation Channels iviccgesicce cece cecete te caentctetnesettesesmncecwexesouscaeecenesdeccietarsteecadecvends 6 9 UIP ON OFF ComputaliOi sessar ninne ERa EE ERE AE AEAEE 6 9 EDan TO eE E E EA A EE ee eee 6 9 DIEPR OI e E E S 6 10 Aari ana Tae E E E S 6 10 TEJ SCOM UO e a E 6 10 ROMO AVET AE ean EEE Eii
11. Channel settings cannot be entered on 0 measurement channel models The Channel command does not appear in the menu 5 47 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Buln uos o 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings Copying and Pasting Setup Data You can copy the setup data of one channel or more to other channels Use the following procedure to copy and paste 1 Click the source channel number that you want to copy To select many channels click the first source channel then drag over all the channels that you want to copy 2 Click the Copy button at the bottom left of the window 3 Click the destination channel number To select many channels click the first destination channel then drag over all the channels where you want to paste 4 Click the Paste button You can also copy and paste specific channel items After selecting the copy source in step 1 click the Copy Details button to display the Setup Channel Copy Details dialog box Select the items that you want to copy Key Lock Login Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting SlarmRelay Remote Key Lock Setting 1 Scan IntervalMemory Key Lock Not Use Password Channel l Kevock CortrolAcion Gortra Merutock Key Lock Login J Timer Start Key Lock Free Alarm ACK Llock Free Report Stop Key lock GFree MATH Block Free siaina Menu Key Lock GFree White Memory Block Free Aux User Key Lock GFre
12. OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF P OFF OFF OFF OFF CHIB OFF Burnout YUP UP UP UP UP UP IUP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP UP TOOLS Ls Copy 1 Paste i Copy Details i ME E E E E E E E E EE 3 Internal Internal d Internal J Internal Internal J Internal J Internal Internal Internal J Internal d Internal gt Internal Internal J Internal d Internal gt Internal Burnout z eaen om j JDE Cy External External External External External J External _ External i External External J External _ External External d External _ External External External CaS For thermocouple TC inputs select how the measurement results are to be handled when the thermocouple burns out RJC Volt uV When the reference junction compensation is set to External set the compensation value in the range from 20000 to 20000 Copying and pasting setup data The items checked in Copy Details can be copied and pasted Click the channel number to select the copy source or paste destination To select multiple channels to be copied drag the channel number to specify the range to be copied To select multiple copy destinations select the range in a similar fashion IM 04L41B01 64EN Key Lock Login IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Click here also selectable from Setting
13. REMOTES EN HA Select the controlled item Alarm Select the alarm format The selected items become blue Relay AND Set the range of relays from the first alarm relay to take the AND logic All other relays will be set to OR logic If NONE is selected all relays will operate using the OR logic Remote Option You can assign items to be controlled by the eight remote control terminals This is possible if the remote function is available For details related to the copy paste function see page 6 7 6 16 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Scan Interval Memory Click here also selectable from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting Check the channels you wish to sample Setup AlarmuRelay Remote Interval Scan IntervalMemory AJD Integrate G Auto soz Qeonz Wiooms oe af sini Scan Interval HE 2s Key LocksLogin 3 Timer Memory Sample _ Report Save fal Auto i Manual Sampling s ae Data osplay QeVENTSDISE Gi EVENT sual cc One Event Data Sampling Rate a F Network Event Data Sampling Made i Free i Trigger i Rotate Block Data Length Pre Trigger Length Manual Trigger External Trigger Alarm Trigger Memory timeup Timeup type OFF Hour G Day i Week i Month Timechour o Set these parameters when the data type is set to EVENT amp DISP or EVENT Scan interval The selectable scan intervals vary depending on the model as follows DX10
14. Timer Temperature File i Menu Customize 1 1 1 I Event Action Pressure 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4 7 4 7 4 4 7 4 il 4 4 4 J gt Y l Click a number to open a comment text details dialog box Change the values in the Comment txt field no boxes to display the registered character strings Set the Comment text field numbers for all lines and click OK 1 Area 1 No 1 Temperature 10 Location Comment text fields e Number and Text info You can register text strings to Text info boxes Text string You can enter up to 32 characters Model Number of comment text fields DX1000 100 DX2000 200 Comment text block e Number and Line You can register text strings to Comment text blocks Register comments to comment text blocks by combining up to 5 comment text fields Set the comment text fields that you want to register in the Line boxes Model Number of comment text blocks DX1000 50 DX2000 100 3 27 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu05 e 3 5 Entering General Settings Annunciator Release number 3 or later 3 28 These settings are activated when the annunciator mode is set to ON by accessing Basic Setting Alarm Alarm action Annunciator mode 1 Daylight Saving Time sI Group Display I View group Message I Comment S Annunciator Timer Event Action 5 File I Menu Customize I Web Report Click here to open the channel Clic
15. Turn OFF ON the relay output Select the number of the relay output terminal Relay output action settings cannot be entered here E oee Batten idp 1 B Default Defaut s ing Segmert setting PY Event Event output Event disp cory All segments a All events a PY Event Relay outp _ Time Event Relay output Program pattern end signal 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Bun uos o IM 04L41B01 64EN Fj OW ooon1 Fj OW Do00i Fj OW ooon1 Fj OW ooon1 T OFF C2001 m OFF C2001 H OFF C2001 H OFF C2001 H OFF C2001 H OFF C2001 H OFF C2001 B OFF C2001 H OFF C2001 B OFF C2001 m OFF C2001 T OFF C2001 B Energize B Energize B Energize Energize Energize Energize Energize Energize Energize Energize B Energize B Energize B Energize Energize Energize Energize Fj OW ooon1 Fj OW ooon01 Fj OW ooon1 Fj OW Coogi E OFF C001 E OFF Cono E OFF C2001 E OFF Cono E OFF C001 E OFF C2001 B OFF C001 E OFF C2001 B OFF C001 E OFF C2001 E OFF C001 Ej OFF C2001 a Energize B Energize B Energize B Energize Energize B Energize Energize B Energize Energize B Energize Energize B Energize Energize B Energize B Energize B Energize E iH Ipc 00 5 41 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations 9 42 PV Event Relay output Time Event Relay output Program pattern end signal Relay Output Turn OFF ON the relay output Number Select the number of the r
16. 200 00 0 0 00 MONE 200 00 5 0 00 NONE 2 wr 0 000 NONE Hor 0 000 HONE Set the value to the maximum value possible Set the value to the minimum value possible Enter the delay period m Enter the tag Alarm 4 Select sampling count Enter the display zone Select the graph setting Turn ON OFF the partial expanded display je Select the channel display color Zone Graph Partial 100 40 Normal 4 1 100 40 Normal d 100 40 Normal 4 1 100 40 Normal 4 1 Initialize Set the value to the maximum value possible Set the value to the minimum value possible Turn ON OFF at once 6 4 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channels Input Type Mode and Range Type Select from the list of choices from the pull down menu Mode Relevant Settings VOLT voltage Range span L and span U TC thermocouple Type span L and span U RTD resistance temperature detector Type span L and span U DI voltage level contact input Range span L and span U SKIP Measurement Display OFF None Note e When a value outside the range is entered or when the span L and span U values are set to the same value they are corrected when the data are checked e If SKIP is selected settings such as Delta Scale Sqrt and Range Type are discarded Difference Computation and Reference Display Span Scale Square Root IM 04L41B01 64EN Displays the difference between the input and the reference
17. 3 50 I Environment I Alarm Scan Interval I Measure Function I Report I Remote I Key Lock I Login I Ethernet Scan interval Select the scan interval You cannot select fast sampling mode 125 ms on the following models e Models equipped with external input channels MC1 option e Models with the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later A D integrate Select the A D integration time as necessary Only the selectable settings are displayed Settings Description Auto The DX automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the integration time to 16 7 ms and 20 ms for 60 Hz and 50 Hz respectively Fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply 50HZ Sets the integration time to 20 ms 60Hz Sets the integration time to 16 7 ms 100ms Sets the integration time to 100 ms when the scan interval is 2 s or 5 s 600Hz The A D integration time for fast sampling mode You cannot change this value You cannot use fast sampling mode on models with the external input channel MC1 option You cannot use fast sampling mode when the multi batch function BT2 option is being used IM 04L41B01 64EN Measure Function 3 6 Entering Basic Settings I Environment Fur i Alarm l 1 Scan Interval Saher Type W mis Measure ctio Measure Function Up fawn eee i Report Up Down Internal i Remote ree Up how em Key Lock Up Down in
18. Enter the display zone Turn ON OFF the partial Select the lids setting expanded display Zone Partial emor at cal on ham Scale display position tea onene he EENES ON 100 1 gt Center ON 0 0000 0 o 100 2 gt B center gt 11 ON 50 0 0000 0 100 3 gt B center 4 12 Ba rion 50 0 01 o 100 4 gt Normal 4 10 a rion 50 0 01 SiS SE 20S ee eee ES ee Sa 3 Select the channel display color Click here to set the calibratin correction Set the green band m g Select the mark o see page 4 8 Green Band Color Calibration Correction Inside v 0 0000 0 0100 Fixed Off Outside gt 0 0000 0 0100 Fixed Off Inside B 1 00 Fixed ON Off Outside M 1 00 Alarm OH Off 4 6 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Input Type Mode and Range Type Correspondence between difference computation scaling and square root computation DELTA SCALE and SQRT is as follows Mode OFF DELTA SCALE SQRT SKIP Yes No No No VOLT voltage Yes Yes Yes Yes TC thermocouple Yes Yes Yes No RTD resistance temperature detector Yes Yes Yes No DI voltage level contact input Yes Yes Yes No 1 5 V No No Yes No The list for range type changes depending on the above settings Span L Span U Input range The selectable range is displayed on the screen Note e You cannot set the same value to Span L and Span U e When the Mode is 1 5V or Sart Span L must be less
19. J File J Menu Customize J Web Report Enter the view group name Select the type of views to be displayed or drag and drop the view icons View Kind aan View Group i B Vew Kg Vew na vew cour REN vew crue T Select the group to be displayed Selectable view types Batch 1 Batch 2 and Other Similar Tabs Release number 3 or later When the multi batch function BT2 option is enabled select the appropriate batch tab Group Name Up to 16 characters can be entered for the group name View Kind The view group is made up of four screens Select the type of screen to display in each screen You can also select the COLUMN BAR Annunciator display and EVENT SWITCH screens release number 3 or later View Group Up to four view groups can be registered Specify the group to display If you select COLUMN BAR specify the COLUMN BAR group 3 25 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 5 Entering General Settings Message 1 Daylight Saving Time Group 7 Annunciator Timer Event Action 1 File I Menu Customize i Web Report Enter a message to be written to the group of up to 32 alphanumeric characters 3 26 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings Comment Release number 3 or later IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 Daylight Saving Time mment t fiel Comment text block ET Line j View group 1 4 P 10 j Message oo S Comment Annunciator
20. Month Set the time match condition of a month Year Set the yearly time match conditions release number 3 or later Set the items with check marks in the following table depending on the Kind setting Pe Kind S SO Setup tem Poy we o Year O Moth Ef l A SOS e Month Set the month release number 3 or later e Day Set the day e Week Set the day of the week e Hour Minute Set the time in the range of 00 00 to 23 59 e Timer action Settings Description Single Executes the action once when the condition is met Repeat Executes the action at every specified time IM 04L41B01 64EN Manual Sample 3 5 Entering General Settings On a DX2000 with the external input channel MC1 option specify the channel that will be manually sampled On all other models all channels will be manually sampled so this setting is not necessary Click to display a channel selection dialog box Channel selection dialog box J Daylight Saving Time Group Display View group Message Comment Annunciator Timer Manual Sample Event Action File Menu Customize Web Report Paste Fill and increment by 1 starting from the top of the selection Turn ON OFF all in the selection at once Drag to select a range manual sample number Manual sample number 001 to 120 The instantaneous values are output in this order Manual Sample e Use Select On when assigning a channel to t
21. Remote Select whether a remote option is installed Note that this option can only be selected when Alarm Relay is set to 4p With fail Mem End or 6p Batch Select whether a batch option is installed This option applies to style number S3 or later Program Select None Program Num 4 or Program Num 30 When you change the system configuration and click the OK button the System configuration has been changed The input configuration and data will be initialized Continue message appears Click the OK button to initialize the data Initializing the Setup Data 3 Click to complete ia 1 Select Initialize on the Setting menu the initialization Ee Hardware Configurator CX2000_pcl Initialize x File Comm Setting System View Help 2 The Initialize i cH j SET Regular Setting dialog box opens IN Initialize current setting SETUP Basic Setting a Meas Polit aoe On Initialize CH Mode DettaScaleSart 5 6 IM 04L41B01 64EN 9 3 Control Function Basic Settings Make the basic settings of control function To enter settings click the Setup tab then select the settings you wish to enter from the list that appears on the left of the screen Or you can select the items by choosing Control Settings Setup Mode Control Action Eie Hardware Configurator NewF ile E O x File Comm Setting Control Setting System View Help Ci ca ed Se Se He P U A
22. Select the loop from Loop1 or Loop2 This item appears when Connecting Model in Basic Setting is set to a model capable of two loop control UT520 UT550 UT750 or Other IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings Tag Specify a tag using a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters Tag Comment Specify a tag comment using a maximum of 8 alphanumeric characters PV SP OUT Set the decimal place 0 4 and units using up to 6 alphanumeric characters of PV SP and OUT Control Span Set the control span between the upper and lower limits Control Mode Select the control mode from the choices below The available modes differ depending on the connected instrument SingleLoopControl CascadePrimaryLoop CascadeSecondaryLoop CascadeControl ControlBackUp PVSwitching PVAutoSelector PVHoldFunction 2LoopControl GreenControl UniversalPVCascade UniversalPVSwitching or UniversalPVSelector Control Output Select the type of control output from the choices below This setting not available if the control mode is set to Cascade or UniversalPVCascade Relay Voltage pulse Current output and On Off control Alarm Select the type of alarm from the choices below The alarm types that can be selected differ depending on the connected model OFF PV High Energ PV Low Energ Deviation High Energ Deviation Low Energ Deviation High Deenerg Deviation Low Deenerg
23. Settings Description Auto The MV automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the integration time to 16 7 ms and 20 ms for 60 Hz and 50 Hz respectively Fixed to 20 ms on P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply 50Hz Sets the integration time to 20 ms 60Hz Sets the integration time to 16 7 ms 100ms Sets the integration time to 100 ms when the scan interval is 2 s or 5 s 600Hz The A D integration time for fast sampling mode You cannot change this value You cannot use fast sampling mode on models with the external input channel MC1 option 4 35 OOOZAW OOOLAW 24 Buln yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Measure Function 1 Environment MEacUreEUnGlon 3 Alarm 1 Scan Interval oe Down Internal AA Zan Gs Din Dow Internal J Login 2 Ethernet 4 Dow Internal 2 Serial 3 mere era Dow Internal Dow Internal Dow Internal Dow Internal Down Internal Teor Ti ii lt _ Burnout Settings Description OFF Sensor disconnections are not detected UP When the sensor burns out the measured result is set to tover range The measured value displays Burnout For 1 5V input the MV assumes that the sensor has burned out when the measured value exceeds the scale upper limit by 10 of the scale width Example When the measured value is greater than 110 when the scale is from 0 to 100 DOWN When the sensor burns out the measured result is set to over range The measured va
24. User s MANAI DXA120 DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator vigilantplant YOKOGAWA IM 04L41B01 64EN Yokogawa Electric Corporation 3rd Edition User Registration Thank you for purchasing YOKOGAWA products We invite you to register your products in order to receive the most up to date product information To register visit the following URL http www yokogawa com ns reg PRS 108 02E Notes Copyright Trademarks Revisions 3rd Edition November 2010 YK Thank you for purchasing the DAQSTANDARD model name DXA120 This manual explains how to use DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator Please read this manual carefully before operating the software to ensure its correct use After you have read this manual keep it in a safe place where it can be referred to anytime a question arises e The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice e Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy However if any questions arise or errors are found in this manual please inform the nearest Yokogawa sales representative office e Copying or reproduction by any means of all or any part of the contents of this manual without permission is strictly prohibited e Transfer or loan of the software to a third party is prohibited e Once the software is unpacked Yokogawa will not guarantee the designed operation of the software except when the original floppy disk is found
25. or 1 5V Mode Select a channel input mode of VOLT TC or RTD When SCALE 1 5V is set to 1 5V the mode is fixed to VOLT Range Type Select the voltage range thermocouple and resistive temperature detector type VOLT 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V or 50V TC TypeK TypeJ TypeT TypeB TypeS TypeR TypeN TypeE TypeL TypeU TypeW PLATINEL PR40 20 or WRe3 25 RTD JPt100 or Pt100 When SCALE 1 5V is set to 1 5V Range Type is fixed to 6V Span Specify the measurement span such that the upper limit is greater than the lower limit Scale Specify the scale for each loop between 30000 and 30000 such that upper limit gt lower limit and upper limit lower limit lt 30000 Only available when Scale is selected under SCALE 1 5V For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Unit Specify the units for each loop Use a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters Sart Select or clear the check box to turn the square root function ON or OFF When it is ON set Low Cut between 0 0 and 5 0 Bias PV1 Remote Select the check box to turn the bias ON OFF When it is ON enter the setting for EUS 100 to 100 of the measurement span IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Settings Filter PV1 Remote Select the check box to turn the filter ON OFF When it is ON set between 1s and 120s Linearizer tab o Display control
26. 0 30 50 70 and 100 marks Bar graph Select the bar graph reference point When the bar graph is displayed vertically Center is invalid even if selected During the data check it is changed back to Normal Scale When the scale is displayed in the trend display select the scale display position For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E 5 32 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 5 Control Channel Settings Internal External Partial Expand The boundary value is displayed as a percentage along the width of the display between 1 and 99 Boundary The setting conditions depend on the internal control channel and external control channel as follows e Internal control channel PV SP EU 0 lt boundary value lt EU 100 OUT EU 5 0 lt boundary value lt EU 105 0 However with OUT for analog retransmission minimum value of span lt boundary value lt maximum value of span e External control channel span L 1 digit lt boundary value lt span U 1 digit However when external loop is OFF the partial expansion reduction is also OFF Note e The partial expansion reduction settings are valid when Partial is set to Use in Aux of the Setup tab e For the external control channel set a boundary within the span determined by the internal span 50 1050 and the specified decimal point Normally there is one decimal place so it can be set
27. Channels General Setting Submenu Basic Setting Submenu nitialize Load Changed Settings See the explanation later in this Setting SET Regular Submenu This item appears for the DX100 Mode Setting SETUP Basic Submenu Setting nitialize DX200 MV100 MV200 and CX1000 CX2000 SET Regular Submenu Setting SETUP Basic Setting Program Pattern Setting This item appears for the CX1000 CX2000 Submenu Submenu System Set the setup data system configuration Data Adjustment Checks the setup data consistency View Shows or hides the toolbar tatus bar Shows or hides the status bar Data Adjustment Dialog Shows or hides the data adjustment dialog About Shows the version See section 1 6 User s Manual Shows the user s manual I D O Y Q V 5 a 2 D D 3 a O 5 S O h p Q og D z 3 fad O gt IM 04L41B01 64EN Toolbar IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 4 Menu and Tool Bars About File Restore Original Only on the DX1000 DX2000 and MV1000 MV2000 When you select File Restore Original the data from the last time one of the following operations was performed is restored File New e File Open e File Save e File Save As e Comm Receive Setting e Comm Send Setting e Comm Partial Transfer e System System Configuration About Setting Load Changed Settings Only on the DX1000 DX2000
28. DIOS gais DIOO4 gais DIOOS iais DIOS galis AUX Time Zone d Metwork 2 Control Action o Internal Loop SP Number set DIDOSW Regist Gi None ibt 2bit GH Shit Abit J Control Relay d External Loop Module Setting Select the terminal blocks where you want to register contact inputs Style 3 or later CTRL1 Dl 2 loops or more CTRL2 DI 4 loops or more CTRL3 DI 6 loops or more CTRL1 DO 2 loops or more CTRL2 DO 4 loops or more CTRL3 DO 6 loops or more EXT1 RI CX2000 with extension output terminal EXT1 RO CX2000 with extension output terminal INT SW1 INT SW2 INT SW3 Style 2 or earlier CTRL1 2 CTRL3 4 4 loops or more CTRL5 6 6 loops or more ETXDIO CX2000 with extension output terminal Contact For each contact input number select the type of contact input from the following Some items may not be available depending on the system settings and control mode For details about the contact input settings refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E e ControlStopAll e ControlStartAll e ControlStart Stop e Remote Local e Auto Man e Cascade 1 2 3 4 e Auto1 2 or 3 4 e Mant1 2 or 3 4 e SPNumber0 to 3 bit enter by selecting one of the options under SP Number set e PVSwitching e Program Start e ProgramStop e Hold e Advance e Memory Start Stop e Trigger e Alarm ACK e Time Adjust e Math Start Stop
29. Deviation H amp L Energ Dev within H amp L Energ PV High Deenerg PV Low Deenerg PV High Energ Standby PV Low Energ Standby Dev High Energ Standby Dev Low Energ Standby Dev High Deenerg Standby Dev Low Deenerg Standby Dev H amp L Energ Standby Dev w H amp L Energ Standby PV High Deenerg Standby PV Low Deenerg Standby Timer upward h m Timer downward h m Timer upward m s Timer downward m s Sensor grounding Problem diagnostic FAlL output SP High SP Low Output High Output Low Header burnout1 and Header burnout2 9 15 IM 04L41B01 64EN 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings 5 16 Parameter Address Setting Tab Alarm Relay Remote Scan IntervalMemory Channel rarancerAawessSatng lt gt Key Lock Lagin Timer Parameter Address Setting J Report K 03 J Temperature PY Input j Aux SP Setting 40004 Rane OUT Output 40005 J Network Control Action a Lu i A im J Internal Loop Remote Local Contact Input Operation STOPARUN ee Nees Alarm Value 40011 External Loop SP Number 40010 PO Naber Ato Tun Select the parameter address settings from the following ranges 30001 to 39999 300001 to 365535 40001 to 49999 400001 to 465535 Tuning Setting Tab AlarmRelay Remote Scan IntervalMemory J Channel Key Lock Login J Timer R
30. Displays marks indicating the values of the high and low limit alarms delay high and low limit alarms and difference high and low limit alarms This setting is common with the bar graph display Mark kind Settings Description Alarm Indicates green under normal conditions and red when an alarm is activated Fixed Displays a fixed color Scale display To display alarm point marks select ON Mark color If the Mark kind is set to Fixed specify the color of the alarm point marks Copying and Pasting Setup Data The items checked in Copy Details can be copied and pasted Click the channel number to select the copy source or paste destination To select multiple channels to be copied drag the channel number to specify the range to be copied To select multiple paste destinations select the range in a similar fashion Example of the selection screen of the setting item This screen is displayed when clicking the Copy Details button The setting item names of the channel setup screen appear Blue means selected gray means cleared f E Hardware Contigurator NewF ile T loj x File Comm Setting System View Help D SW alo 2 MeasCh i Delta Scale Sqrt Range Type CHOO1 Kaen i Lid Low Cut d Graph Ld Deta Scale Sqrt Ld Alarm I Partial d Range Type 4 Alarm Delay P color id Ref Ch Ld Moving Average i Green Band Ld Span d Tag Alarm Mark d Scale Ld Memory Sampling Bi Calibration Correction a
31. Drag to select a range Turn all channels ON OFF 5 x E Hardware Configurator NewFile Fila Comm Setting System View Help DO a gt ed 2 MeasCh Zs Deltta Scale Sart Range Type volt M DELTA SCALE sort p vot B DELTA SCALE SORT vot M DELTA SCALE SQRT vot M DELTA SCALE SQRT voat B DELTA SCALE SORT 2 0000 2 0000 voat B DELTA SCALE 2 0000 2 0000 vort B DELTA SCALE SORT j2v 2 0000 0000 voat B DELTA SCALE s RT 2v 2 0000 0000 VOLT a VOLT DELTA SCALE SQRT 2 a a a O 2 Q Q r D g x lt g gt L N Copy Details uM 4 Range select shortcut buttons Click the button to select the function The range select shortcut buttons are effective on the channel range selected If no channels are selected the range select shortcut buttons are effective on all channels For the function of each button see next page Double Click to display a dialog box to set one channel at a time 001 dialog box for example In the Math channel and Ext channel tabs dialog box for each channel is displayed Click to display the color settings screen Click to display the calibration correction setting screen IM 04L41B01 64EN Alarm Mark Mark chlor 2 Calibration Cori sction Mark chlor 3 olor 4 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Slarm 0 01
32. FOD ATA Q ZIP Alarm Relay Ze gt FAIL NONE H P Remote Option E cu10 cu25RTD input IM Batch Batch function option is selectable when the style number is S2 or later OK Cancel Loading Preexisting Setup Data IM 04L41B01 64EN File open E Hardware Configurator NewFile File Qormm Setting System View Help D amp 2o S beas E Hardware Configurator NewFile File Comm Setting System View Help New Ctrl S n 1 Click the file open icon or select File Open Save Chrl 5 Taea 2 The Open dialog box opens TED E e E n Ezrzxzx z Print Ctrl F Preview Open EES Look in E DAQSTANDARD al c lea Bl File name Files of type Dx MYS ettingFile pri Cancel 4 Select a file with pnl estension and click here You can specify the location where the setup data file is located and open the Configurator OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channels Select this tab Double click to set the channel Select the input mode Difference computation Select the range type Scale Select the reference for the difference Cy root a computation Set the selected range at once Initialize Turn OFF at once Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to all other channels Enter the scale Enter the scale unit Select the alarm type Enter the alarm value Select the relay number OFF
33. Fixed point P DUDCUSV Regist AUX Control input channel Remote Setting Ca Remote o Control Relay i Alarm Wode External Loop Output Process Control Output Cycle Time Analog output Type 4 20m Note You must first turn ON program control to carry out the program control related settings below 5 34 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations Initial Program Patterns You can set the initial program patterns You can set the initial default program patterns by clicking the Program pattern tab then selecting Default setting Settings cannot be entered when the number of segments is 0 Add segments using Segment setting Set the start code Available when segments have been inserted or added under Segment setting Set the start setpoint Available when segments have been inserted or added under Segment setting Copy the settings Default setting Segment setting Paste copied pattern settings Default setting Segment setting Select the pattern number Pattern Default setting Pattern name Setting method Start setpoint Start code Enter a pattern name setting Segment setting Program pattern PV Event Time Event Repeat PV event hysteresis settings Event output setting Event display group setting AUX setting Automatic message printout program display position AE Click this tab Segment and event totals cannot be set here e Faste ele Allsegments Fo Allevents 1
34. OOOZAW OOOLAW 24 Bulunbiyuog Ka 4 7 Sending the Setup Data to the MV1000 MV2000 Sending Setup Data Other Than the Address Setup Data 1 Click the Send Data button or select Comm Send Setting from the menu bar i Hardware Configurator DX Fle Comm Setting System View Help Fle Comm Setting Syst Cl cm el S te Tl oO Receive Setting Measure channel f Action b The Network dialog box appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button User Mame User ID Password The Store dialog box appears 3 Click OK Store x N Send Setting to Connecting Hardware Cancel Data transfer starts A message appears to indicate when data transfer has stopped Click OK to close the message The settings that you sent are applied 4 56 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 8 IM 04L41B01 64EN Saving the Setup Data For the operating procedure see section 3 8 The setup file name extension is PDL 4 57 OOOZAW OOOLAI 24 Bulunbiyuog ka 4 9 Printing the Setup Data For the operating procedure see section 1 5 4 58 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 10 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the MV1000 MV2000 Checking the MV1000 MV2000 Hardware Information From this software you can start and stop the MV1000 MV2000 and display MV1000 MV2000 hardware information For the operating procedure see section 3 10 IM 04L41B01 64EN OOOZAW OOOLAI 24 Bulunbiyuog ka 4 11 Ch
35. Properties Status Ready Type Snagit 6 Printer Whee SMAGITB Comment Print to file Copies Humber of copies f Print range Al Pages fomi tc Selection nee See IY Collate 2 Click the OK button The setup data is printed For an example of what the printed setup data looks like see Print Example Text on the previous page 1 10 IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 6 Displaying the Version Information Procedure IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 Select Help About from the menu bar The About dialog box appears ie DAQSTANDARD m Copyright 07 1999 9 Yokogawa Electric Corporation Sofware Japan This productis licensed to EE gt E HEE E 2 Click OK to close the About dialog box GYVGNVLSOVG buisn alojag E Chapter 2 Setup Data on DX1000 DX2000 Models with the AS1 Advanced Security Option 2 1 Explanation of Operations This chapter explains operations relating to the setup data PEL extension of DX1000 DX2000s with the AS1 advanced security option Displaying Setup Data You can display existing setup data using one of the following methods e Open the viewer and view the setup data within the measured data For the operating procedure see the DAQSTANDARD Viewer User s Manual IM04L41A01 63EN e Display the setup data within the measured data See section 2 2 e Display the data of a saved setup file See section 2 2 e Use communication to receive and
36. SETUP Basic Setting Setting Setup Alarm Relay Remote Key Lock Setting o Scan Interval Memory Key Lock Not al Use Password Unspecified channe 5 e Do Timer Start Key Lock Gi Free Alarm ACK Lock Gi Free _ Report Stop Key Wlock GiFree MATH Block Gi Free S Eae Menu Key Lock G Free Write Memory Lock i Free 5 ive E User Key Lock i Free Media Lock i Free Disp Enter Key Wlock GFree d Metwork Login Setting Auto Logout 7 H useri Unepecitied Enable uzer2 Unspecified Enable UEers PPP Unspecified Enable User ID uweers TTT specitied Enable Weer specitied Enable PEL PPP Unspecified Enable 1 1 iE 1 userd ete specified Enable 4 i i Turn ON when using user settings Check when using login auto logout and user ID Setting the key lock Key Lock When using the key lock function select whether or not to activate the key lock function lock or free Password Enter the password used to release the key lock using up to six characters is displayed after the password is entered Setting the login User name Up to 16 characters can be entered for the user name User ID Up to 4 characters can be entered for the User ID is displayed after the password is entered Password Up to 6 characters can be entered for the password is displayed after the password is entered Setup Select whether or not to allow setting changes in the setup mode Note
37. Use or Not don t use IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 51 OOOZAW OOOLAIW 24 Bun yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Serial 4 52 Basic setting I Environment s1 Alarm E i200 2400 4800 Gy s600 19200 38400 Scan Interval i Odd Gi Even None Measure Function 7 g6 J Report ee l G Normal MODBUS Master a 1EY OCE I Login Ethernet Goro XOMxON XOMRS CSRS m Serial Serial si Modbus master For RS 232 e Baud Rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps e Parity Set the parity check method to Odd Even or None e Data length Select 7 or 8 bits To output the data in binary format select 8 e Handshaking Select Off Off XON XON XON RS or CS RS e Address For Modbus protocol enter a value in the range of 1 to 99 For a general purpose communication protocol this value is not set e Protocol Select Normal for a general purpose communication protocol MODBUS for Modbus slave and Master for Modbus master If Modbus master is selected Modbus master settings must be entered For RS 422 485 e Baud rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps e Data length Select 7 or 8 bits To output the data in binary format select 8 e Parity Set the parity check method to Odd Even or None e Handshaking Not specified e Address Select a number from 1 to 99 e Protocol This is the same as with the RS 232 IM 04L41B01
38. age Rn ee ne 3 57 4 41 free event Gata 0 0 cccceccccsssssssseeeseeesseseeeesaneseseeeeees 3 36 4 28 cette ces ose ctacte E E eens eeu 6 23 FTP connection destination setting of 00 3 60 4 43 FTP SOIV GR sentence cetacean gacconcapen et ccineeeevenenebea dba kesaseseuncanan 3 40 4 31 FIP ranster at SI QU sicrie sinrin 3 46 FTP transfer file eee eee ee ee ee eee eee 3 59 G A UF E E A ETEA 3 11 4 10 5 32 5 56 5 59 6 7 green band ccs saaccatsapcueosonesineesarcasenaosaadsucemedeanapdactoasanecd 3 12 4 11 OUD neon eee nena nee ae eee 3 20 4 19 5 64 6 14 group trip TE as cceastcaccaneaceseaasectmasesectoasancenastecanecasereencascmneeeesse 5 64 group NANE sedinoan eein 5 64 5 65 6 14 6 15 n hardware configurator WINGOW cccccsssseeeeeceeesseeeeeseaneaees 5 1 handshaking scscccrtscacnenceasaaiccsarcenswecntmeriactareaiaaneueeeteece 3 72 4 52 HardWare see ene EE E E E E E NEE 1 2 Hardware Configurator cccccccsssseeeeeceeeesseeeeeeanesseeeeesaneees 1 1 hardware information c ceceeeeeeee eens 3 81 4 59 5 75 6 31 header acceca 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 4 48 4 49 EE AE ETSE E E P T E ETE 4 21 host name LeGIStEl cccsscccssscecsseeceeeeeceeeecseeeeeseeees 3 58 4 42 host NaMe 3 57 3 58 3 61 4 41 4 42 4 45 NOSEDINCIDA sorina NEEE EEEE EE 3 71 HTTP server cccccceceececcececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceteveeseeeeeaeeneness 3 40 4 31 Index 2 FN SR ee SS saeco ses
39. and 1 12 DIOs For the CX2000 you can select 1 6 internal loops 1 16 external loops and 1 36 DIOs On the CX1000 group1 consists of up to 4 types of control loops and measurement channels On the CX2000 it consists of up to 6 types IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Settings PV Event Hysteresis Style 2 or earlier This is available for style number S2 if you set Program Control to On in the Setup tab for Internal Loop W PY Event co po fom e fo pe From the Setting tab select PV Event IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 27 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Buln uos a 5 4 Control Function General Settings DIO Operation anne nh Function a idii Number S3 or Later 5 28 Setting Display J Message File TagComme J Group Trip Line View Group el User Key DOO0S W002 J Daylight Saving x DIQQ Control Group E DIO Monitor DIO Label J Logic math J Control Input DIO Operation Monitoring Number Enter an integer between 1 and 36 DIO Operation Monitoring Function Turns the specified DIO operation monitor number ON and OFF DIO Types Select the DIO operation monitoring method DI 1 Displays the input status of the specified DI The status of the internal switches are output DO 1 The status of the internal switches are output to one DO 1 ON is output when the internal switches are ON and 0 OFF is output when they are OFF DO 2 You can output the ON and OFF statuses of
40. and MV1000 MV2000 You can change the settings on the currently displayed setting screen to those of a specified setup file 1 Select Setting Load Changed Settings The Open dialog box appears 2 Specify a file and click Open The contents of the displayed setting screen are changed to those of the specified file Note e Only the settings on the displayed setting screen are changed e Settings that do not match those of the setup data that you are currently editing are not loaded e Settings that are not included in the setup data that you are currently editing are not loaded Displaying the Manual Select Help User s Manual A PDF of the manual appears The toolbar is the same for all recorders Only the icons of tools that can be used are available Version information Check the data consistency Send data Receive data Print Save Open New GYVGNVLSOVG buisn alojag 1 5 Printing Setup Data Print Format Settings Only on the DX1000 DX2000 and MV1000 MV2000 You can set the print format of the setup data to text or table format 1 Select File Print Format Settings from the menu The Print Settings dialog box appears Print Settings int format Wwe Protocolo ate and time fonmat 2 Configure the various settings Item Setting Description Defaut Print format Only text is printed Text Table The data is printed in a preset format The following settings
41. is 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button User Mame User ID Password The Receive Data dialog box appears 3 Click the OK button AN Receive Setting from Connecting Hardware i Cancel The software receives the setup data from the DX and displays it OOOZAW OOOLAI 24 Bulunbiyuog Ka IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 1 4 1 Starting the Harware Configurator Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System 1 Click the New button or choose File New from the menu bar Hardware C o nfig rator Newt E Hardware Configur _ Gal a Ctrl M The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the MVAdvanced tab _ Point NOME 2 Enter all settings on the MVAdvanced tab then click the OK button The MV1000 MV2000 setting screen in displayed Loading Existing Setup Data 1 Click the Open button or choose File Open from the menu bar Hardware C o nfigurato rH EIN B Hardware Configure Open Ctrl O N The Open dialog box is displayed 9 DAG_Configuration a SET data2 POL SET _data POL SET_dataz POL DAQSTATION Configuration File pel prl 2 Selecta setup data file with the PDL extension 4 2 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Settup Data Changing Checking the System Configuration IM 04L41B01 64EN You can create new hardware
42. 0000 o000 VOLT OFF DELTA SCALE SORT Copy Details Nm 2 Range select shortcut buttons Click the button to select the function The range select shortcut buttons are effective on the channel range selected If no channels are selected the range select shortcut buttons are effective on all channels For the function of each button see next page Click to display a dialog box to set one channel at a time 001 dialog box for example In the Math channel and Ext channel tabs dialog box for each channel is displayed Click to display the color settings screen Click to display the calibration correction setting screen Alarm Mark Mark chlor 2 Mark chlor 3 Mark olor 4 Calibration Cor o000 0 0100 Alarm noo 0 0100 Alarm 0000 0 0100 Alarm 0000 0 0100 Alarm JUUN 0 0100 Alarm JUUL 0 0100 Alarm JUUN 0 0100 Alarm 0000 0 0100 Alarm JOUL 0 0100 Alarm 0000 0 0100 Alar Copy Paste Copy Details Click to toggle ON and OFF Click to change the display IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 O e Q y Q er D lt gt lt N 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Enter external input channel settings in the same manner as those of the measurement channel items Also note that this measurement channel setting screen is only one example your actual screen may vary Select this tab Dou
43. 1 Key Lock Auto increment OFF G on Login view _ Ethernet Parti OFF G oN serial Trend Rate Switching OFF GQ oon Message Write Group Common Separate Power Fail Message i OFF ON Change Message i OFF ON InputiOutput Scale over fy Free Qe Over Alarm Mo Logging i OFF ON Key Security i OFF keylock Login Comm Security i OFF Login Auto Save OFF G ON Media FIFO G oF on e Tag Settings Description Tag Displays tags Channel numbers are displayed for channels that do not have tags assigned Channel Displays channel numbers e Language Select the display language e Decimal Point Type Settings Description Point Sets the decimal point to a dot Example 1234 56 Comma Sets the decimal point to a comma Example 1234 56 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 31 000ZAWN 000 LAIN 24 Bulunbiyyuog fa 4 6 Entering Basic Settings 4 32 Batch Select ON to use the batch function Digit of lot number Select the number of digits of the lot number from 4 6 or 8 Select OFF to disable the lot number Auto increment ON Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to the lot number of the current measurement 1 Partial Turn Partial ON partially expand or OFF do not partially expand Trend Rate Switching ON Enables the function that switches the trend interval while the memory sampling is in progress The Second interval div item is displayed in the setting mod
44. 3 eee 30001 JINT16 Control Relay 4 ee 30001 JINT16 E J External Loop 5 a ee L 30001 INT16 6 iae a 30001 INT16 7 sae 30001 INT16 fa 8 E OFF cot cot 30001 INT16 Memory Data Out Ethernet Serial FTP Settings Using the FTP function measurement calculation data can be automatically transferred from the CX to the specified server as files The FTP function can be used only with Ethernet communications When using the FTP function specify the destination server name port number and other settings in the dialog box below 2 Click the Primary or Secondary tab Set both if using two primary and secondary FTP servers 1 Click this tab J Alarm Relay Remote scan IntervaliMemary Measure channel Primary d Key LocksLogin a A 5 FTF Connection d Timer Report server Mame Temperature Port Number J AUX ane Login Mame Li Time zone Enter file transfer By Network Password MEE destination settings J Internal Loop z PASY Mat E DVD SY Regist o o a nicl TTT Control Relay External Loop Disp amp Event Data Gor on Report Gor Gon Memory Data Out Gi Ethernet Serial 5 68 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 11 Network Settings Web Server Settings When using Ethernet communications the CX can be set up as a web server Set Web Server to ON and then set the access certification and other settings for the operator page and monitor page Click
45. 32 scale UPPE ee oe he nee oe ene ee eee eee er ae 3 7 4 7 SCAN interval oo cee eee eeceeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeneneeees 3 50 4 35 6 17 scan interval Memory wicsicc ocdcancnnteinsectiniats avundtanieesienenleccmessanes 5 45 scheduled settings mail ccccccsseeeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 3 65 4 48 screen GIS OlAY castsds tecesnazcncenceansadtcasscaarsacecemndacs 3 20 4 18 6 12 SONECIE YDE esanen mene N AE ease eee 5 65 6 15 segment setting Method ccccseceesssseeeeeesseesseeseeesseeseess 5 35 segment shift AC WOM accsacestiedia atierintcuiselesivuitand a5 SarlseneluesnoeaiOueaeare 5 39 segment CN ticaccss han ndadantomentanshendianitad actcbiias denddenebolaniaietaad ets 5 38 segment time ramp grade Setting cccccssseecesseseeesseeeees 5 35 segment time setting method ccecccsssseececseseeesseneees 5 35 SING E EA 5 72 6 27 151 S S a ee ee oe ee eC ee cee a een eee ery 3 63 4 47 sending setup data cccccecccssseeceeeeceeeeeceeeeeseeeesees 3 76 4 55 sending setup data to the CX cccccceeeeeceseeesseeeeseensseeees 5 72 sending the setup data iva cccnstsdcscanatiesaiuasnessaneenaiierereatmmsaentanass 3 76 serial communication cccceceeceececeeeeeeeeeeseeees 2 2 3 72 6 24 server server NUMDEL csceceeeceeeeeseeeeseeeeseeeeees 3 62 4 46 server NUMDED 0 0 0 0 ccc eeceececeeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeueeeeeenaeseeeeens 3 61 4 45 server PMIMALY xc cccsc
46. 49 4 6 Entering Basic Settings 4 50 SNTP Client J Environment SMTP client s1 Alarm Use Not G use I Scan Interval Sear Wem I Measure Function Port No Report a Fef Time ail Key Lock J Login S Ethernet Access timeout 30s 2 TEPAP Time acjust start i OFF oN 2 FTF I Modbus client 2 E Mail SNTP client J Server functions 1 Serial e Use Select Use to use the SNTP client function Otherwise select Not If you select Use the SNTP client settings are displayed e Server Name Set the SNTP server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Port No Enter the port number of the file transfer destination SNTP server in the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 123 e Access Interval Set the time interval for synchronizing the time with the server to OFF 1 8 12 or 24h If you select OFF you can synchronize the time manually by operating soft keys The time is not synchronized if the difference in the time between the MV and the server is greater than or equal to 10 minutes Ref Time Set the reference time for making queries Access timeout Set the time to wait for the response from the SNTP server when querying the time to 10 30 90s Time adjust start Select On to synchronize the time using SNTP when memory st
47. 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Modbus master Basic setting j Environment Basic J Alarm Read Cycle Scan Interval Access timeout Measure Function Retry count J Report J Key Lock Login j Ethernet Command setting Inter block delay Auto recovery Slave Serial 1 1 eg T 2 Type Modbus master O INTI6 O INTI6 OJINTI6 0 JINT16 ON 6 Copy Details Click to display the channel selection screen Modbus master settings are enabled when you set Protocol to Master under Serial Serial in the Basic Setting tab Basic setting e Read cycle Set the read cycle to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s or 10s e Timeout Set the command timeout value to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s or 1min e Retrials Set the number of retrials when there is no response from the slave Select OFF 1 2 3 4 5 10 or 20 e Inter block delay Set the inter block delay to OFF 5ms 10ms 15ms 45ms or 100ms e Auto recovery Set the auto recovery time from communication halt Select OFF 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min or 1h Command setting e Master command No Select from 1 to 16 for the command numbers to be configured e Command Set the transmitted command type Settings Description Read Read to the external input channel 16 bit signed integer type from the slave R Math Read to the communication input channel 32 bit floati
48. 9999999 to 99999999 Set the number of decimals to four digits or less The settings are the same as those of the measurement channels For details see section 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings TLOG Computation Rolling Average Timer Select one of the timers 1 to 3 set in the setup mode The computation interval of TLOG computation is set to the time assigned to the selected timer Sum Scale Set the sum scale Rolling Average Computation ON OFF Select whether to compute the rolling average Interval Select the sampling interval when rolling average is activated Times Number of Samples Select the number of samples number of data points used to compute the rolling average Zone Graph Partial and Color Constants IM 04L41B01 64EN The setting method is the same as that of the measurement channels For details see section 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings You can set constants to be used in the expression Up to 12 constants CX1000 or up tp 30 constants CX2000 can be specified 5 59 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 9 Computation Channel Settings Setting One Computation Channel at a Time 2 Click the tab of the item to be set Click here to enter the operator lath O Dsi Math QNot use Ope ee ce Exp fy to set to open the Channel Point L E u Settings dialog box i J Rolling Average Interval Times Delay Time Efir Tag 31 or
49. Address 2 Enter the e mail address Multiple e mail addresses can be entered in the box of one recipient When entering multiple addresses delimit each address with a space Up to 150 characters can be entered Sender Enter the sender e mail address You can enter up to 64 characters POP3 settings Release number 3 or later POP3 Server name and Port number Enter the POP3 server host name or IP address Port number Use the default setting unless you need to change it The default value is 110 Login name Enter the POP3 server login name Password Enter the POP3 server login password using up to 32 characters An entered password is displayed as 3 63 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 Bulinbyu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings e Send delay second Set the delay between POP3 server authentication and transmission to a value from 0 to 10 seconds e POP3 Login To encrypt the password when logging into the POP3 server select APOP To send it in plain text select PLAIN Auth Settings Release number 4 or later To enable support for authenticated e mail transmission Authentication SMTP set a user name and password to use for authentication e User name Enter the user name You can enter up to 32 characters e Password Enter the password You can enter up to 32 characters The password is displayed as tkkkkkkkkkk 1 Alarm Specify the settings for sending e mail when alarms occur e Recipient and Recip
50. Auto Save Interval The auto save interval can be specified when the Save is set to Auto and the data type is set to DISPLAY or EVENT amp DISP in the Memory Sample setting of the Setup tab Auto Scroll Time This is the time period used to automatically switch the displayed group Select from 5s 10s 20s 30s or 1min For details about the other settings refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E 5 62 IM 04L41B01 64EN Message File IM 04L41B01 64EN Display Message File J Group Trip Line J View Group JUser Key Daylight Saving Control Group Message MSG 01 MSG 02 MSG 03 MSG 04 MSG 05 MSG 06 MSG 07 MSG 08 File File Header Directory Name Manual Save Message Ee A a r a e Copy Click here Or choose the Setting menu SET Regular Setting Copy the message Specify a message Paste unsave GAl 5 10 Display Settings Paste as another message number Specify a comment Specify a save destination folder Use up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the message File Header Add a comment to the header section of the measurement computation data file Directory Name Specify the name of the folder where measurement computation data files are saved Note Up to eight characters can be entered for the file header and director name AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK cannot be us
51. Computation CX Style Number S3 or Later ccceccccseccceeeeeeeseeeeseeeesseseeees 5 29 Control Input Channel CX Style Number S3 or Later cceceeccssseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 30 5 5 Control Channel Settings Internal External ccccccssccecceseeeeceesseeeceeseeeesseesecseeseeeeeas 5 32 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations cc cccccceeccceeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaueeeeseeeeseeseeseeeeeas 5 34 Turn ON OFF Program Control cr cccccdtnessccnnateseccsseecvasectsanmenussinatasaganaccbexsunnedsensteenesasee 5 34 Initial Program UCTS ssi av tere sata gunk sdeentseunerdeeay cudenteacaetadvemaeb sake euaasstavdcmiseceiencesiied 5 35 Program Pattern Setting Segment Setting cc cccccseeeceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeseeseaees 5 37 PV Event CX Style Number S3 or Latter ccccccccssseeeecceeeceecceeseeeseeeeeeseueneesssaees 5 41 Event Output Setting PV event relay output Time event relay output Program pattern end Sonal siri Se ea ss npc msi ee wedge ee oes vee see sn gain E 5 41 AUX Automatic Message Display Position Operation Display Automatic Switching 5 43 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings ccccccsssecccccsseeecceeseeecsesseeessseeeeseueesesseageeeeeas 5 44 Alarm Relay ReMote cccccssccccsseeecseeeececeeueeeeseuseeecseseeeceueeeessauesesssageesessgeeessaagss 5 44 Scan Interval Memory iesiwreree severe veseinntaiete aces sesies tess selseace yeh asvas S
52. Control Is OFF When performing measurements by remote select Remote It cannot be set in the following cases e For secondary measurement loop numbers when Control Mode is set to Cascade e With even numbered loops when PV SP computation function is OFF when the number of loops is 2 4 or 6 4Loop is selected under 6 4Loop and Control Mode is set to PV Switching e When the number of loops is 6 6 Loop is selected under 6 4 Loop and Control Mode is set to PV Switching when the PV SP computation function is OFF Alarm Mode Select from the following conditions for disabling the control alarm ALWAYS Alarm is always enabled STOP Alarm disabled when operation is stopped STOP MAN Alarm is disabled in manual operation mode or when operation is stopped Output Process When Control Mode is set to Cascade the output process settings are not available for the primary loop Control Output Select the type of control output from the following e Relay time proportional PID relay contact output e Voltage pulse time proportional PID voltage pulse output e Current output continuous PID control output e On Off control relay contact output not available for analog retransmission loops Cycle Time With a PID proportional to time set the cycle time control output cycle between 1 s and 1000 s Analog output Type For the current output select the output current range from the following e 4 20mA 0
53. Data length Select the size of a record data file The recorded data is divided by the file size specified here The available data lengths vary depending on the number of memory sampling channels and the lahat rate int Sample rate 1 Selectable range 25m min to sms min to 250 ms __ min to 300 ms __ min to 1s _ min to of data length 4 1 2 3 7 Sample rate Selectable range 2s min to 5s min to fos min to pos hour to imin hour to of data length 14 31 31 31 31 a Sample rate Sample rate of data length 31 31 31 31 _ 31 Sample rate 1 Sample rate a ore of data length 31 days 1 You cannot choose an interval that is faster than the scan interval 2 Selectable on the DX1002 DX1002N DX1004 DX1004N DX2004 and DX2008 3 Release number 3 or later Pre Trigger Specify the range when recording data before the trigger condition is met Select the range as a percentage of the data length from 0 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If you do not want to record the data existing before the trigger condition is met select 0 Trigger Signal Key Select ON if you want to activate the trigger using key operation IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings Custom Menu You can show or hide items on the menu that appears when you press the FUNC key and on the display selection menu which appe
54. MV208 style number S4 2 Can be specified on the DX and MV style number S4 Auto save interval The auto save interval can be specified when the Save is set to Auto see page 8 17 and the data type is set to DISPLAY or EVENT amp DISP in the memory sample section of the setup tab Auto scroll time This is the time period used to automatically switch the displayed group It can be specified when the style number of the DX or MV is S2 or later Scale Display Digits Select Normal or Fine Fine If the scale value is displayed with two digits it can be changed to three digits 6 12 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 4 Configuring the Settings Circular display setting DX200C Only Normal trend display Circular display Trend Display Setting Trend Type i Circular Display Update Interval Auto Save Interval n B m Display Setting Set the time corresponding Restore KEY Q KEY ALARM to one cycle on the circular Circular Trend Action On The Full Mew ia display one scale mark of the old waveform is cleared when the remaining amount of waveform reaches one scale mark clear the entire waveform when one cycle of the waveform has been recorded Message File Click here also selectable from Setting SET Regular Setting Enter the message coins Se ow H Copy the entered message ae Paste to another message number Batch File Header Enter the comment Directory Name Enter t
55. Menu The display selection menu appears when the DISP ENTER key is pressed Click to select Type of main menus being set TREND Daylight Saving Time Group Display Message GROUP 2 GROUP 3 3 Timer Manual Sample d Event Action File SEPARATE S Menu Customize d Menu J Function 7 GROUP 7 GROUP 9 GROUP 10 Changes the left right display area Delete selected items Click to display a sub menu on the right side of the screen Add an item beneath the selected item Function The FUNC key menu appears when the FUNC key is pressed General setting 1 Daylight Saving Time I Group I Timer I Manual Sample I Event Action 1 File Menu Customize I Men Function 4 29 O gt n Q c ai gt eQ or gt lt S lt N 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Environment 4 30 Environment Basic Environment S Basic Environment Data Kind Display E D Gi Event 1 Detail Setting eiren 1 Option i Alarm Basic Environment are channel Wath channel Ext channe eneral setting Basic setting wc MF Time zone Time deviation limit 1 Scan Interval I Measure Function i Report Service port all Key Lock I Login Ethernet I Serial Memory Media Information Measurement Error i OFF i ON Communication Error i OFF Gi ON Me
56. Number S2 or Later Click either one also selectable from Setting SET Regular Setting Select the function to be assigned to the USER key E A User Key Daylight Saving NONE aa SUmMmer E 3 External Trigger i Winter i 5 G Alarm Ack L 8 Davlight Saving Math Start Stop ea Select either one Batch QS Math Reset Application Mame 7 a l anager Name Enter usint up to 16 characters Message 2 Message 3 Message 4 Batch Mo Batch Name Manual Sample me eee W Message 5 Lot No Enter the value Message 6 in the range Lot Mo Auto Increment OFF Gon from 0 to 9999 Message 7 Message 8 oe Snapshot Data Display Infomation G TIME G BATCH IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 15 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXd 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Alarm Relay Remote 2 Click here also selectable from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting 1 Select this tab f H Alarm Relay Remote Alarm Relay 2 Scan IntervaliMemary Reflash OFF g ON o Channel Relay AND None B ee Relay Action De Energize al Energize F Aue Alarm Relay Behavior Gi Unhold Hold d Time zone Alarm Indicator a Unhold i Hola _ Network Rate of Change Increase Rate of Change Decrease xt Select from 1 to Alarm Hysteresis OFF on 15 times Remote tte REMOTE1 MORE B zE Copy Paste the REMOTE2 ENE w selected range REMOTE 3 eN REMOTE 4 HENE REMOTES MeN REMOTE 6 HEN REMOTE 7 HEN
57. OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXd 94 Bulinbyu0g 2 6 8 Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data Checking the System Configuration 1 Select System System Configuration E Hardware Configurator DX200 1_pnl File Comm Setting System View Help 2 The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the DX tab System Configuration DX Type amp Dx200 Dx100 mv200 mv100 Dx200c Channel Tena SYZE Chinese model Math Func OFF G ON Serial OFF RS 232 G RS 422 485 Fieldbus Media FDD Q ATA ZIP Alarm Relay Ey FAIL With FailiMem End M d Remote Option 4 Cu10 Cu25 RTD input Batch OK Cancel Only the system configuration in the setup data file can be checked If the system configuration is changed and the OK button is clicked a message System Configuration is changed Input amp Data are Initialized appears Clicking the OK button initializes the data Initializing the Setup Data ma 1 Select Setting Initialize Setting System View Help O E SET Regular Setting SETUP Basic Setting Fe Initialize 3 Execute the initialization i Initialize E Hardware Config File Comm 2 The initialize confirmation dialog box opens tialze curent setting i Cancel d SlarimRelay Remote 6 28 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 9 IM 04L41B01 64EN Saving the Setup Data F
58. Operating Loop Designation Set the loops to operate Select from loops whose program control is ON IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations Program Pattern Setting Segment setting IM 04L41B01 64EN You can enter a program pattern for each segment Set the program patterns by clicking the Program pattern tab then selecting Segment settings Select the pattern number Select the segment number Initialize the program pattern Segment setting Insert a segment before the selected segment Add a segment behind the last segment Delete the selected segment Expand reduce the selected segment along the time axis Display the time axis per the segment time ratio Display program patterns together Split display the program pattern at each loop Start value and target value display ON OFF Select current loop Pattern No fil ti Copy Past Initialize Segment No IEA gt Even cut Pete mele inp Add vet Q Q O MB a fanaa Event isp _ PV event display Drag the bar to change the display area Maximum value for target setpoints Segment number Target setpoint for selected segment Set point PY Event TimeEve ep Ramp Soak S Ramp j Soak Target setpoint Loop 1 500 0 300 0 Loop 2 600 0 Loop 3 800 0 Loop4 1000 0 Segment time im EJ o i 01 Segment PID group No 1 gt Segment shift action Con
59. Settings Off Start Reset Start Math Start Math Start orf G Start Reset Start Event Action write ics Event Action Mo Event Action Select ar Remote e Message Relay Ba Ea math start Switch 1 ea Manual Sample MONE Memory Start Stop NOME Memory Startes MONE Memory Starlfetop MONE Memory Start Stop MOME Memory 5 5 1 Group TEN EN EN ENEN ETENE m JOR Too L Copy Copy Details Description Does not start the computation even when the START key is pressed Starts the computation when the START key is pressed Resets the computed result up to then and starts the computation when the START key is pressed Event Action No You can set up to 40 Event The condition to execute the action Settings Description NONE Not use Remote Select the remote control input terminal number Relay Select the alarm output relay number Switch Select the internal switch number Timer Select the timer number Match Time Select the match timer number Alarm User Key Action The action to be executed when an event occurs Settings Description Memory Start Stop Memory Start Memory Stop Trigger Can be specified when the MV is configured to record event data AlarmACK Cannot be specified when the event is set to Relay Switch or Math Start Stop MathStart MathStop Math Reset Save Display Data Save Event Data Message Snapshot Alarm Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Ca
60. Timeup type specify the time of the save operation When Timeup type is Hour this setting is invalid Specify between 00 and 23 Channel Setting the Burnout and RJC IM 04L41B01 64EN SlarmRelay Remote Channel T Scan IntervalMemary J Key LockLogin i Temperature J Control Action Internal Loop iContact Input Control Relay External Loop Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting Set to the positive side 100 Set to the negative side 0 Set the reference junction compensation to A or External Setup Burnout oe UP EUN OFF 2 Internal lt External OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF j OFF UP DTA Internal i External Internal 2 i External Internal i External Internal i External l Internal i External Internal External Internal External Internal i External Internal I External Internal 4 External Internal i External Internal i External Internal i External I Internal External DONQUE a PE CHI 5 Copy J ee Copy Details is J Internal J3 External E Burnout Set the burnout operation For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E RJC Volt uV This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Note
61. To output the data in binary format select 8 e Handshaking Select Off Off XON XON XON RS or CS RS e Address For Modbus protocol enter a value in the range of 1 to 99 For a general purpose communication protocol this value is not set e Protocol Settings Description Normal General purpose communication protocol Modbus Modbus slave Master Modbus master Barcode The barcode protocol This only appears on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option If you select Modbus master you need to configure the Modbus master settings See the next page For RS 422 485 e Baud rate Select 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 or 38400 bps e Data length Select 7 or 8 bits To output the data in binary format select 8 e Parity Set the parity check method to Odd Even or None e Handshaking Not specified e Address Select a number from 1 to 99 e Protocol This is the same as with the RS 232 3 72 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Modbus master I Environment i Alarm 1 Scan Interval I Measure Function Report i Remote I Key Lock I Login I Ethernet Serial I Serial B Modbus master Click to display the channel selection screen Modbus master settings are enabled when you set Protocol to Master under Serial Serial in the Basic Setting tab Basic setting e Read cycle Set the read cycle to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s or 10s e Timeout Set the comman
62. Turn the measurement value tracking ON or OFF Target Setpoint Limiter Specify the target setpoint limiter in the measured span s EU 0 0 100 0 range so that L lt U Output Velocity Lim Select or clear the check box to turn the output velocity limiter ON or OFF and specify a value between 0 1 and 100 0 s This is unavailable for style number S2 or later if you set Control Output to On Off control in the Setup tab for Internal Loop Anti reset Windup Select an anti reset windup of Auto or Manual This is unavailable for style number S2 if you set Control Output to On Off control in the Setup tab for Internal Loop Dev Band Set the deviation band of the anti reset windup between 50 0 and 200 0 This setting is only valid when the Anti reset Windup is set to Manual Set the groups to which control functions apply Control Group Group 1 Group2 Groun Group 4 Groups Grouns Group 7 Groups Group Mame E Control Group o DIG Monitor o DIG Label LooPo E t 01 LOOFDZ ee OOPOS E int o3 Ea int 04 d Logic math o Control Input L L LOGPOS E init o5 L EA 7 06 From the Setting tab select Control Group Group Name Enter a group name using a maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters KIND Select the loops measurement channels and DIO numbers Style 3 or later you want to assign to a group For the CX1000 you can select 1 2 internal loops 1 4 external loops
63. amp DISP or EVENT A D Integrate Select from Auto 50 Hz 60 Hz and 100 ms The Auto setting automatically detects the CX power supply frequency and switches the integration time Scan Interval Select 1s or 2s 9 45 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Buln uos a 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings 5 46 Memory Sample save method of measured computed data Save Select the save method of internal memory data to an external storage media from Auto or Manual Manual Inserting the external storage media into the drive and closing the cover displays a save confirm message from which you can save data When the operation is complete remove the external storage media from the drive so that the next set of data save operation can be performed You can select whether to save all of the data from internal memory or only to update the data still not saved to an external storage media Auto If an external storage media is always in the drive data is saved automatically at a preset interval Data Select the data to be written to internal memory from the following DISPLAY displayed data only EVENT amp DISP event data and displayed data or EVENT event data only Event Data Sampling Rate Select the interval at which event data is saved from the following 1s 2s 5s 10s 30s 60s 120s 300s or 600s Event Data Sampling Mode Select Free Trigger or Rotate Block When the
64. c00 il time adjust on Start ACTION ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 68 4 50 time deviation liMit cece eee eeeeseeceeeeeeeseeeeeeesaeees 3 39 4 30 Time SV CUA oc ctatasecclascenea ces cersassnsies Gautace cueconaonhanGreea cena eenkasaree 5 40 Time event relay OUtDUL ccccceseccesseseeeessseeeesseseecenensess 5 41 time off color aaceczcatacasiaessinstcocaterinaeeaecasiseeeiawensaitaweantteaiseretains 3 49 timeout Command timMeOul cceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 73 4 53 timeout function oeccctetceiinaccateivens oketvalenavcavbeacniettclownsdiis 3 58 4 42 time per revolution a os cots coledinrirurerhannscessenbeugunciscacceworcnsetsnes 3 22 TIVE L s ccasuavsoneneceanieneannasauianedaneancss 3 29 4 24 5 49 6 10 6 20 timer action Vs cia tt cance ce saeaeeactattcahese tneaneaste tea itacecnecneeniecs 3 30 4 25 time ZONE soe cacicxccanstiesitlacanadansetanneseacicanteeseeeancaseaet 3 39 4 30 5 52 TLOG COMPUTATION scissccctccsescnscascssocedenctes 3 16 4 15 5 59 6 10 11g 5 19 21 105 lt o ee ee e ae ae eed a o e R i transfer wait time cece cece cece cess eeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeaeeeaees 3 59 Mond Ty Sa ster n e anes sie ni cctdndsas n O IERES 3 42 DER WIG e E E E S 3 21 4 19 5 64 6 14 U EAIN cory EEEE EA EEE EE T ET 3 16 3 61 4 15 4 45 UNIENDO aeee e E 3 61 4 45 usable characters cece cecc eee eece eee eseeseeeeuueeueueeuseeueuevaesaess 5 76 PS ca caters E yecaciet c
65. cannot be set are not printed Also an item whose Specified Value is not printed is not printed even if the settings are changed so that it can be set Example When Data Kind is set to Display Scan Interval and Data Length which are event data settings are not printed Even if you change Data Kind to Event and set Scan Interval and Data Length these items are not printed System Configuration The system configuration of the setup file The device name firmware version number and options are printed Setup Items The settings for each setup item Footer The page number IM 04L41B01 64EN Print Example Text E System Configuration Ox2000 NONE Secumy H Sssic setting 01 Eevirommnent a Bask Environment Bask Environment Service port b Detal Setting General o Opin Signature 02 Alarm Bask Setting Output relay Hysteresis Alam action Alam dBpiay O3 Scan interval This is an example of what the first printed page looks like Daa Kind Time deviation limk FTP Tag Remote controller iD Baton Trend Type Write Group Scale over Mull login Scan Imenval Scan ime nal AID Integrate 04 Measure Funcion Measure Function CH 05 Eihiemet a TCPAP IM 04L41B01 64EN DHCP Hoel Name IP Address Domain Name Server Paimary Domain Primary Fim Version R400000 Serb gt NONE Tag No Decl mal Point Type Partial Power Fall Message Key Sec
66. configuration files or open existing configuration files and then check the system configuration or change the configuration according to the specifications of the connected MV1000 MV2000 Normally a system is set up according to the specifications of the MV1000 MV2000 to be set up 1 Choose System System Configuration from the menu bar File Comm Setting System View Help Oe W n H System Configuration The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the MVAdvanced tab Fx DxAdvanced WAdvanced System Configuration x ong ni Type Gi M2000 m1000 Channel Firm version Option Math NONE G ON Ext Func NONE Gi ON Serial MONE FS 232 RS 422 485 Alarm Relay FAIL FalL Status relay J F Remote P Pulse F Calibration correction Ll cun Cu25 RTD input Lal Est input Cancel 2 Change the various settings according to the MV1000 MV2000 that you will connect to blue and brown items are selected gray items are cleared The settings in the Option group differ depending on the model and options of the instrument For example for the MV1000 or for the MV2000 with eight channels or fewer the external function item cannot be selected If Pulse is selected blue the Math and Remote items are disabled 3 After changing the configuration and clicking the OK button the message System configuration has been changed The input configuration and data will
67. data type is EVENT amp DISP select 1 2 or 4 When the data type is EVENT select 1 2 4 8 or 16 Data Length Set the interval corresponding to the amount of data data length that can be written as a block of the event data storage region The data length that can be set depends on the event data sampling rate It also depends on the block setting and number of Meas and Math channels and number of loops internal loop and external loops Pre Trigger Length If 0 is selected the event file entirely consists of data after the trigger If 100 is selected the event file entirely consists of data before the trigger Manual Trigger To activate triggers with keys select ON External Trigger When applying trigger signals by remote input select ON Alarm Trigger When applying alarms as triggers select ON Sampling Select the channels to be saved to the memory IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings Memory Timeup When Save is set to Auto under Memory Sample specify the date and time of the save operation Timeup type Select the timing of saving from OFF Hour Day Week or Month When you are not using this function select OFF Day of the week Date When Timeup type is Week select a day When Timeup type is Month specify the date between 1 and 28 It is not possible to specify dates 29 to 31 Time hour When Day Week or Month is selected as
68. display the DX settings See section 2 2 Note You cannot display or change Login items Creating Setup Data See sections 3 2 and later in chapter 3 Saving Setup Data and Applying It on the DX You can use one of the following methods to apply setup data on the DX e Save the setup data to a file and load it using the DX For the procedure for saving setup data see section 3 8 For instructions on how to load setup data see section 6 9 in the User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E e Use communication to send the setup data to the DX See section 3 7 Note For Login items the initial values are output when you create new setup data and the original values are output when you use existing setup data IM 04L41B01 64EN 2 1 uondo Aylindag paoueApy LSV 94 YUM S 9POW 000ZXG O00LXG UO e eq dnjas gt 2 1 Explanation of Operations Printing Setup Data You can print setup data For the operating procedure see section 1 5 Note Login items are not printed Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX1000 DX2000 and Checking the DX1000 DX2000 Hardware Information From this software you can start and stop measurement on the DX1000 DX2000 and display DX1000 DX2000 hardware information For the operating procedure see section 3 10 Connecting to the DX The conditions for establishing a connection with the DX are listed in the table below Ethernet You need to log in to the DX monitoring or
69. e Math Reset e Manual Sample e Panel1 Load to Panel3 Load e Message1 to 8 e Snapshot e PatternNo Set 0 4 bits Register per the number selected under pattern number setting Available when program control is ON 000ZX3 000LX32 24 Bun uos o IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 11 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings SP Number Set Select when registering to the contact input for switching the SP number SP No Selection Source When specifying input contacts of SP No settings select the loop number of the SP Number set to be switched Activate or deactivate each loop number CX1000 LOOP 1 and LOOP2 CX2000 LOOP1 to LOOP6 up to 4 loops if 4LOOP was selected under 6 4 Loop selection Pattern Number Selection When Program Control for Internal Loop is ON When Program Control for Internal Loop is ON With program control you can select the range of pattern numbers when switching program patterns through contact input The pattern numbers are entered in binary according to the number of relays required as shown in the following chart Pattern No No of Relays Assigned Relay s 1 1 1 bit DI001 1 3 2 2 bits DI001 DIOO2 1 7 3 3 bits DI001 DI003 1 15 4 4 bits D1I001 DI004 1 30 5 5 bits DI001 DI005 These are automatically registered under contact inputs according to the selected range of program pattern numbers 1 15 and 1 30 are active only if the number of program patterns is 30 PG2 Control Input
70. e lf there is a duplicate User Name that is turned ON the user with the larger user number is turned OFF e If Setup of all users that are turned ON is set to Disable the Setup of the user with the smallest number is set to Enable OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LX 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Timer Option M1 Click here also selectable from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting Select one Timeout every time the specified time elapses Select the timeout time Time out with the specified p time as the reference Alarm Relay Remote Timer 4 o Scan IntervalMemory Channel Hey LaS kEDAN Absolute Interval Ret time Timer Relative Interval 1 t a iReport Ld Save Data 200 Temperature Aux Timer 2 J Time zone l OFF Absolute terval n B Rettime es erie Q Relative Interval g ol d Metwork id Reset P Save Data Timer 3 OFF Absolute Interval 1h Ret time oo Relative Interval E E Reset poes Save the data to the TLOG file when a timeout occurs Reset computation when a timeout occurs You can set three types of timers to be used in the statistical computation You can have the data saved to a TLOG file or reset the computation when the specified timeout time elapses 6 20 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Report Creating Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Reports Option M1 IM 04L41B01 64EN Click here also selec
71. extension and click here File name C2000 pel Files of type Cx ConfiglationFile pel Cancel Z Specify the location of the setup data file and open the setup file 5 4 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data Entering and Checking System Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN You can create new setup data files or open existing setup data files and then enter or check system configuration according to the connected CX specifications Normally these settings should be entered per the specifications of the CX being setup 1 Select System Configuration on the System menu e Hardware Configurator MewF ile Fie Comm Setting System View Held C E th oyetem Configuration ata Adjustment 2 The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the CX tab a o Type cx2000 cx1000 Channel IS LOOP OLOOP 2LOOP 4LOOP Q 6LOOP Style A Ver 3 02 or later Option Math NONE ON Serial NONE RS 232 G RS 422 485 Media FOD Q ATA ZIP Alarm Relay Remote Ld Batch Program OPattern Q 4 Pattern Gp 30 Pattern x caret You can enter the following settings in this dialog box Type Select either CX2000 or CX1000 Channel Select the number of channels of the CX CX1000 0 when set to Style 2 or later or 6 channels CX2000 0 when set to Style 2 or later 10
72. in a single file Basic setting I Environment Basic Seting S wall Alarm Feflash g OFF g ON 2 Scan Interval Rate of Change Decrease I Measure Function Rate of Change Increase Indicator fy Unhold Hold Output relay I Report all Key Lock I Login Mone 2 Ethernet Internal Switch AMD Serial Relay AND Mone Relay action Ce Energize Q Energize Relay hold Gi Unhold Gi Hold Relay Action on ACK i Normal Gj Feset Hysteresis t pjpa po pp Measure channel HightLow 7 Measure channel Deta HightLow Math channel High Low Ext channel High Low Reflash To set the reflash operation on the alarm output relay select ON The reflash function is set on the first three output relays Rate of Change Decrease Set the interval for the rate of change calculation of the low limit on rate of change alarm in terms of the number of sampled data points 1 to 32 The actual interval is obtained by multiplying the value specified here by the scan interval Rate of Change Increase Set the interval for the rate of change calculation of the high limit on rate of change alarm in the same manner as the interval for the low limit on rate of change alarm Hold Select the alarm indication behavior from the following Settings Description Unhold Clears the alarm indication when the alarm condition is released returns to normal condition Hold Holds the alarm indica
73. in the range of 0 to 65535 for the selected server The default value is 502 e Host Name Set the destination Modbus server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Unit Select Auto if the unit number of the destination server is not required Otherwise select Fixed If you select Fixed the Unit No item is displayed e Unit No Enter a fixed unit number in the range of 0 to 255 4 45 OOOZAW O0OLAW 24 Bun yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings 4 46 Command setting Client command No Select from 1 to 16 for the transmitted command numbers to be configured Command Set the command type Settings Description Read Read to the external input channel 16 bit signed integer type from the server R Math Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server Write Write the measurement channel 16 bit signed integer type to the server W Math Write the measurement channel 32 bit signed integer type to the server Read can be selected on MV2000s with the external input channel MC1 option installed R Math and W Mat can be selected on models with the computation function M1 option installed Start channel End channel client channels Enter the first and last channel numbers of input output The range of channels that you can enter varies de
74. it is ON the hysteresis is set to 0 5 of the scale or the measurement span Remote Option You can assign items to be controlled by the eight remote control terminals This setting is available with the measurement remote input function For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Select a remote number and then click the Copy button This copies the setting of that remote number When you want to paste the copied setting select the remote number where you want to paste the setting and then click the Paste button Scan Interval Memory IM 04L41B01 64EN Temperature tke ote Data DISPLAY GEVENT amp DISP EVENT CHO1 Time zone Event Data Sampling Rate Network Event Data Sampling Mode C Free Q Trigger Rotate J Control Action Block Internal Loop Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting Select the channels that you want to sample Setup f AlarmRelay Remote Interval Scan IntervalMemory AD Integrate Auto soHz so0Hz 100 ms J Channel ead KEVA Qis 2s Key Lock Login Timer Memory Sample Data Length J Contact Input Control Relay Pre Trigger Length o j External Loop Manual Trigger OFF GON External Trigger amp OFF on Alarm Trigger OFF on Memory timeup Timeup type oFF Hour Day Q Week Month Day of the week SETE gt Time hour o Set these parameters when the data type is EVENT
75. mail Transmission SettingS cccccsscecccsssceeccesseeecesssececseuseesceeaeeeessegeeeessaseeesssages 5 69 Auxiliary SUING S vac cictnssesceassenecesnseeackasencadteasaecsseavesndcsens eneioesexasasensedeepacksmassmcedbsessnaecenss 5 70 5 12 Setup Data Adjustment Data Check ccccccssseeeeceeeseececeeeeeesseuseeessesseeesssesessegseeeseas 5 71 5 13 Sending Setup Data to the CX ccceccccccsseeecceeseeeceeseeecseecessceeeeeseeeeeessesesessenseeesans 5 72 5 14 Saving Setup 2 Fekete a BO one ene a Ee a een ee emer ree nen ene keer ane 5 73 5 19 Prin ng Setup Dala acest nce cece ants ones idni r e e er raini 5 74 5 16 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the CX and Checking the CX Hardware I I gaa a RAEE TEE AN T A EEE EATE EE T ET 5 75 IL Usab C NardClEiS ee en ee ee ne ere er ee eee eroris 5 76 Configuring the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 0T Staring the Conng ralO sesser eee eee re areen Ea Eea eE EE ee eran 6 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator cccccssseecccceseececeesececceseeeecsseeecsseeeeessueneesssaaes 6 1 Loading the Setup Data from the DX MV ccccccccccsssseeeceesececcseseeesseeseseceeeeesseneeneees 6 2 Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System ccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 6 3 Loading Preexisting Setup Da cesses site cecceyeee teen ns denseieiecncwahiennconelad seetduancbteidncedicnticnancisinds 6 3 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channels
76. match time timer number to use Sum Scale Set the sum scale to s min h to match the unit of the measured value Example If the unit of the measured value is m min select min OFF Sums as is the measured data per scan interval Reset To reset the TLOG computed value at each interval select ON Alarm and Tag The settings are the same as the measurement channels For details see section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channel Ext Channel IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 15 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bulinbiyuog Ka 4 4 Setting the Computation Channels Rolling Average ON OFF To take the rolling average of the measured results select ON Interval Select the sampling interval when taking the rolling average from the following The sampling interval takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval For example if the sampling interval is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s the actual sampling interval is 6 s Count Number of samples Set the number of samples for the rolling average using an integer between 1 and 1500 The rolling average time is equal to the sampling interval x the number of samples Note MV1000 MV2000 Specifications e Ifthe number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of samples immediately after computation is started the average of the available data is calculated e Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation e Ifth
77. numbers 3 and later in addition to the DX2004 and DX2008 this can also be specified in the fast sampling modes of the DX2010 DX2020 DX2030 DX2040 and DX2048 3 22 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings Circular Save Interval Select the size of a record data file The recorded data is divided by the file size specified here The available settings vary in the range of 10min to 31day depending on the number of memory sampling channels and the Time Per revolution setting Circular Offset Time The time at the reference position on the circle can be offset in unit of an hour up to 23 hours The available settings vary depending on the Time Per revolution setting Trend Display Update 2nd Interval Enabled when Trend Rate Switching is turned ON under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Select a rate from the list The selectable 2nd intervals are the same as those for Trend interval Direction Set the display direction of the trends to Horizontal Vertical Wide or Split Trend Clear Settings Description ON Clears the displayed waveform when the memory sampling is started OFF Does not clear the waveform when the memory sampling is started This is fixed at ON if you are using the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later You can set the multi batch function by setting Batch operation qty under Environment Detail Setting i
78. on the DX and the specified time is within the value specified here the time on the DX is gradually corrected Otherwise the clock is corrected immediately Note that time is not corrected on DXs with the Advanced security function AS1 option when the specified time is over the time deviation limit Firmware version numbers 4 11 and later Select from 10 s to 5 min Select OFF to disables the function Example If Time deviation limit is set to 10s and the time on the DX is 10 hours 21 minutes 15 seconds the time on the DX is gradually corrected if the specified time is between 10 hours 21 minutes 5 seconds and 10 hours 21 minutes 25 seconds 3 39 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings e Date format Settings Display Example Y M D 2005 11 30 M D Y 11 30 2005 D M Y 30 11 2005 D M Y 30 11 2005 Applied Range The format is applied to the date displayed on the screen It does not change the date format on the setup screen of the date time the date in the output data via communications the date saved along with the data and the date used in the data file names e 1st weekday Release number 3 or later This setting specifies how to display the calendar that you use to search past measured data You can set the first day of the week to Sunday or Monday e Service port The following table indicates the number of simultaneous uses number of users that can use the function simultaneously
79. only need to be configured when the print format is Table Item Input Value Option Default Title Enter a character string of up to 128 characters in Nothing is length oo Protocol No Specify an integer from 0 to 2147483647 Date and time Year Month Day Hour Example 2010 04 25 format Minute Second 12 34 56 Stator ae ae Minute Second 12 34 56 Minweseond T Minute Second 12 34 56 MinteSeond ieee Minute Second 12 34 56 Minute Second 2010 04 251 12 34 56 Note The print setting information is held while Hardware Configurator is open 1 6 IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 5 Printing Setup Data Print Example Table This is an example of what the first printed page looks like a peo o O o o o Header Setting Number Ld Setup file aH fel W D O D c 2 gt co O gt O 4 gt Z O gt A s System configuration on the recorder Basic seting Environment Basic Environment Basic Environment Ea E e e E E oaa o N e fe a e omni S e ace i CS a a a O O Basic seting Environment Basic Environment Service port es mava caged van emies a EE EE Setup items C E E ee ore a ee eee e ee Samea vane Paseword el Medi FIFO Footer page number IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 7 1 5 Printing Setup Data Header The header contains the title protocol number date and signature Setup File e Settings Item Description CCCs File Name The name of t
80. or 20 channels LOOP Select the number of loops CX1000 OLOOP 2LOOP CX2000 OLOOP 2LOOP 4LOOP 6LOOP Style Select the CX style number Math Function Select whether or not to enable the math functions computation function Serial Select the serial communications mode from OFF RS 232 or RS 422 485 Media Select the external storage media from FDD ATA or ZIP 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbutinbiyyuog a 5 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data Alarm Relay Select the type of alarm relay from NONE 4p With Fail Mem End 6p or External Loop If you select 2LOOP for the CX1000 the Alarm Relay is automatically set to NONE The items that can be selected vary depending on the model number of channels and number of loops If you select 2LOOP for the CX1000 the Alarm Relay is automatically set to NONE Options If set to a style before Style 2 the following options can be selected e Green Series Comm Select whether options are installed for communications with an external controller This option can only be selected when Serial is set to RS 232 or RS 422 485 Also this option is fixed to Green Series Comm if OLOOP is selected e Ladder Comm Select whether a ladder communication option is installed This option can only be selected when Serial is set to RS 232 or RS 422 485 Also this option is not available if OLOOP is selected
81. or not to use the DX as an EtherNet IP server Select Use or Not don t use 3 69 IM 04L41B01 64EN 000ZXa 000 Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Connect limits Release number 3 or later _ Measure channel Math channel Generalseting Basic seting I Environment i Alarm 1 Scan Interval I Measure Function I Report I Remote I Key Lock I Login S Ethernet TCP IP i FIP I Modbus client E Mail 1 SNTP client I Server functions Coys om on fe ee ha S Connect limits Modbus Server e Connect limits Select ON to place connection limits e Allowed IP Address If you want to only allow certain IP addresses to connect to the DX Modbus server set Use to ON and enter IP addresses in the range of 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 in the Allowed IP Address boxes You cannot enter host names Only the IP addresses specified here can connect to the DX Modbus server 3 70 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Password Management Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Basic setting Environment Certification key i Alarm Host principal 7 Scan Interval Realm name Measure Function Esesaapd I Report Eneryption AESI28 AeS256 arc j Remote S Ethernet EEN 1 TCPAP KDE connection TI FIP KDC server name I Modbus client Port No E Mail 2 SNTP client Server functions
82. right the decimal Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to Turn ON OFF at once all other channels Set the alarm section 6 2 Alarm 2 B D 0 00 MONE a 0 00 HOME 0 00 MNOME 0 00 MNOME aes TER Interval Times Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to all other channels Display zone section 6 2 Set the graph section 6 2 Partial expansion section 6 2 Display color section 6 2 Graph Partial aa olor Ali so B 0 00 ul 5 Mormal Mormal B Mormal Mormal Turning ON OFF Computation Select whether or not to perform computation for each channel Expression Enter the expression using up to 40 characters For details related to the expression see the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 User s Manual IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 9 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bulinbyu0g 2 6 3 Setting the Computation Channels Display Span Alarm and Tag Sets the upper and lower limits of the display The range is from 9999999 to 99999999 Set the number of digits to the right the decimal to four digits or less The settings are the same as the measurement channels For details see section 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channel TLOG Computation Rolling Average Timer Select one of the timers 1 to 3 set in the setup mode The computation interval of TLOG computation is set to the time assigned to the selected timer Sum scale Set the sum scal
83. select NONE Detect Select whether to display alarms ON or not to display alarms OFF when they occur When turned OFF they are not retained in the alarm summary An alarm is generated when the measured value stays above or below the specified value for the specified length of time To use the moving average select the sampling count 2 to 16 Use up to 16 alphanumeric characters to specify a tag You can select tags instead of channel numbers to be displayed on the screen To select whether to display channel names or tag names on the screen select AUX gt Tag Channel on the Setup tab If you select Tag in the Setup screen you can select tag No tag comment or tag in the Data Monitor or Data Viewer You can select the range of the screen in which the waveform of each channel is displayed Specify positions on the display scale for the upper and lower limits The conditions for setting the zones are as follows e Range 0 to 100 The lower limit must be less than the upper limit e The difference between the lower and upper limits must be at least 5 9 55 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings Graph Divisions Select the number of bar graph divisions Bar graph Select the reference position of the bar graph Selecting Center when the bar graph is vertical produces no effect It is set back to Normal when the data is checked Scale When using scale display on t
84. sy Repeat frequency aa Repeat frequency Start Segment Repeat start segment Repeat end segment Repeat end segment Repeat action Select the repeat function from Off On and Repeat Repeat frequency Set the number of repetitions when the repeat function is turned ON in the range of 1 to 999 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations e Repeat start segment Repeat end segment Set the repeat start segment number and the repeat end segment number when the repeat function is turned ON or when repeating in the range of 1 to 99 However the maximum value is the maximum segment number set for the pattern The selectable range for the maximum value is Set repeat start segment lt repeat end segment PV Event CX Style Number S3 or Later The selectable range for the maximum value is 0 0 to 10 0 A AA oe T Pattern Mo E Default setting Segment setting Pvevent Event output z Event disp Copy Faste inte ets Pat EVETT Histeresis All segments 0 All events Oo 4 oy on E o Ra 0 0 q 0 0 10 0 0 11 0 0 12 0 0 13 0 0 14 0 0 15 0 0 16 0 0 With Style2 or earlier set in the setting menu of the Setting tab Event Output Setting PV event relay output Time event relay output Program pattern end signal You can set the PV event relay output time event relay output program pattern end signal and displayed groups
85. tab Title Up to 20 characters Characters Up to 30 characters The number of fields that you can use is 24 for release number 3 or later and 8 for release number 2 or earlier 3 35 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 5 Entering General Settings Event Data 3 36 Daylight Saving Time Group Display Free i SingleTrigger RepeatTrigger A View group ih 0 OFF amp ON Message 3 Comment 1 Annunciator Timer Event Action f File File Event Data 1 Menu Customize 2 Web Report Event related settings are enabled when Data Kind is set to E D or Event in Basic Environment under Environment in the Basic Setting tab Sample rate Select the data recording interval from the available settings See the description for Data length below You cannot specify a sampling rate that is faster than the scan interval Mode Settings Description Free Records data continuously Single Records data when the trigger condition is met Repeat Records data each time the trigger condition is met You can only select Free if you are using the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later You can set the multi batch function by setting Batch operation qty under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic setting tab You can only select Free on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option release numbers 4 and later
86. tab This function is not available on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Password The password used to release the key lock An entered password is displayed as Up to 8 characters Key Function Media Select whether or not to disable each item Load Settings is available in release numbers 3 and later Settings Description Free Key lock not applied Lock Disables the operation IM 04L41B01 64EN Login IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings You cannot configure these settings on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option You can set the Login when Login is selected as Key Security or Comm Security under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Supervisor Administrator Environment i Alarm 1 Scan Interval I Measure Function 1 Report I Remote I Key Lock S Login D eee SUPE EO User Ethernet e Auto Logout Time Settings Description OFF Does not log out until the logout operation is executed 1min to 10min Automatically logs out when there is no key operation for a specified time e Logout Operation Settings Description OFF Only login operation is available Logout Operation Allows the user to switch the operation screen in addition to the login Display operation e Mode The choices differ depending on the selected contents of Key Security and Comm Security under Environment Detail Setting in t
87. the Address Setup Data 1 Click the Send Data button or select Comm Send Setting from the menu bar I Hardware Configurator DX File Comm Setting System view Help File Comm Setting Syst Cm el S te S P k Receive Setting Measure channel L Action b The Network dialog box appears If the password has expired on a DX with the AS1 advanced security option follow the directions in the dialog box that appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Store dialog box appears 3 Click OK Store E IN Send Setting to Connecting Hardware Cancel Data transfer starts A message appears to indicate when data transfer has stopped Click OK to close the message The settings that you sent are applied IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 77 000ZXa 000 Xq 24 BulinByu05 e 3 8 3 78 Saving the Setup Data 1 Click the Save button or choose File Save or File Save As File Comm Setting System View New Chrl h Open Chri I Hardware Contig ai File Comm Sett Print Ctrl F Preview Print Setting DY2000Fulloption pdl Filename DxSettingDatta I Save as type DXAdvanced Configuration File PDL Cancel fi 2 Enter a destination file name and location and click the Save button Save On a DX1000 DX2000 without the AS1 advanced security option The previous file PDL is overwritten On a DX100
88. the Start menu select Programs DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator Hardware Configurator starts and the following window appears New Open Save Print Receive data pe data pa the setup data consistency Display version information ontral Setting System View Help Menu bar Toolbar Measure channel JOLT DELTA SCALE SORT 2 0000 E 5 di at hat tal a 5 d aal tat al 5 d aal tat l A vertical scroll bar may appear Tm M eS fe Se QO Copy Baste Copy Details Ready Scroll through the screen horizontally Exiting To exit Hardware Configurator select File Exit or click the X button IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 3 GYVGNVLSOVG Buisn aiojag E 1 4 Menu Bar Menu and Tool Bars The menu bar is the same for all recorders Only the menu items that can be selected are available File Comm Setting Setting Mode Control Setting System wiew Help Menu Description File Open Opens setup data that has been Restore Original See the explanation later in this section Print Setup Comm Receive Setting Receives setup data from the recorder end Setting Sends setup data to the recorder x Action Hardware Info Receives the device information from the recorder and displays it Memory amp Math Start Memory amp Math Stop Partial Transfer Address Settings See section 3 7 Setting Meas Channels This item appears for the DX1000 Math Channels DX2000 and MV1000 MV2000 Ext
89. the destination channel number To select many channels click the first destination channel then drag over all the channels where you want to paste 4 Click the Paste button You can also copy and paste specific channel items After selecting the copy source in step 1 click the Copy Details button to display the Meas Channel Copy Details dialog box Check whether the items you want to copy paste are selected Setting One Channel at a Time 2 Click the tab of the item x 1 Double click the channel Mote FR Paene RT to set to open the Channel Span L T A Settings dialog box GOFF GWDeta QScale Sort Alarm 1 Alarm 2 el Alarm 3 el El Delay Tine FS Sec Valid Span a oe a oo 3 After setting the items click here Applies the settings Update according to the changes in the Meas sheet The items of the Meas tab can be set for each channel The items set here are the same as the ones in the Meas tab of the Hardware Configurator For details see the page corresponding to the item IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 57 000ZX9 0001XD 24 Buln uos o 5 9 Computation Channel Settings To enter computation channel settings click the Math tab Or you can choose Setting SET Regular Setting Math Functions Double click to set the channel Set the display span 6 characters or less Click this tab Specify the unit Turn ON OFF the computation Specify the constant to be used in t
90. the internal switches to separate DOs 1 ON is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are ON and 0 OFF is output from the OFF output DO when they are OFF O OFF is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are OFF and 1 ON is output from the OFF output DO when they are ON DIO 11 The same action as the DO 1 is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI DIO 12 The same action as the DO 2 is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI DO 2P You can output the ON and OFF statuses of the internal switches to separate DOs A pulse signal having a 1 to 2 second pulse width is output from the ON output DO when the internal switches are ON and from the 0 OFF output DO when they are OFF DOI 12P The same action as the DO 2P is performed while displaying the input status of the specified DI SW Number Set the internal switches assigned to DO DO Number Set the DO performing DIO operation monitoring If the DIO type is DO 2 DIO 12 DO 2P or DIO 12P specify a separate DO with ON and OFF DO numbers may not overlap with other numbers including DIO operation monitoring numbers Not displayed when the DIO type is DI 1 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Settings DI Number Set the DI number to perform operation monitoring Tag Enter tags Up to 8 alphanumeric characters can be used Tag Comment Enter tag comments Up to 8 alphanumer
91. this tab o scan IntervaliMemary d Measure channel MERE ErVEr Key LockLogin Wieb server amp ON OFF Timer Operator Monitor Report PETE Create Page Ca ON 2 OFF Time zone Command e or a OFF J Network Access control G OM 2 OFF Control Action Internal Loop User name DIDOSV Regist Password Unspecified Control Relay External Loop Memory Data Out G Ethernet Serial E mail Transmission Settings When using e mail transmission specify SMTP server name Port number Recipient1 and other settings The e mail transmission function can be used only with Ethernet communications For details about the settings refer to the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E O Q c Q er gt O gt lt as O gt lt N Click this tab o AlarmRelay ew ART ap o scan IntervaliMemary Measure channel eae Key LockiLogin SMTP server name i Timer Port number _ Report iai 7 Recipient Temperature Bin Recipient Time zone Sender n Network Control Action Alam Scheduled System Repot Internal Loop o BNDOSYY Regist P Recipient P Recipient WS Alarm WS include INST WW Alarm WW Alarms WS Alarm E Include source URL Control Relay External Loop Subject Cx Slarm_summary Header Header Memory Data Out Ethernet Serial By clicking th
92. to 5 0 lt boundary lt 105 0 Color Click in the display color setting field to display a color selection dialog box You can select the display color of each channel from 16 colors x Red D violet E f Green Sy C Gray My Blue i Lime f Blue Violet Es f Cyan i Brown Dark Blue Orange az Yellow i Y Green Oooo i Light Gray C LightBlue crupe D Cancel 5 33 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations This section describes optional program control related operations Turn ON OFF Program Control Program control can be turned ON and OFF under Internal Loop in the Setup tab Click the Setup tab then select Internal Loop from the list that appears on the left of the screen Or you can select the items by choosing Control Settings gt Setup Basic Setting gt Internal Loop Program control ON OFF Every two loops Style2 or before Since Style3 or later at each loop Select the loop number Click this tab mila Ral j Setub ad i Alarm Relay Remote Internal Loop o Scan IntervaliMemary Loop 1 Measure channel Key LockiLogin Contral Seting Burm outTuning o Temperature ContralAction fue Control wode OFF amp Single Cascade QS P Switching Retrans i Time Zone z ae a Method G Range PYHigh G Signal o Network EEES Program Control i OFF Ca ON 2 Control Action Pie es PID Control Mode Ca Follow Up
93. to 99 Boundary Set the value that is to be the boundary between the reduced section and the expanded section in the range of minimum span value 1 digit to maximum span value 1 digit For channels that are set to scaling the selectable range is minimum scale value 1 digit to maximum scale value 1 digit Example Input range 6 V to 6V Bound position 30 Boundary 0 The 6 V to 0 V range is displayed in the 0 to 30 range and the 0 V to 6 V range is displayed in the 30 to 100 range The conditions used to set the boundary vary depending on the measurement and computation channels as follows e Measurement channel When SCALE and SQRT are not used Span L lt boundary lt span U When SCALE and SQRT are used Scale L lt boundary lt scale U e Computation channel Span L lt boundary lt span U Note For the DX1000 DX2000 this is when Partial is turned ON under Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Color Display Color Green Band Alarm Mark You can select the display color of each channel from 24 colors Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the scale This setting is common with the bar graph display Region Band area Settings Description Inside Displays the area inside using the color band Outside Displays the area outside using the color band OFF Disables the function Color Set the display color L and U Specify th
94. to be physically defective e Yokogawa will not accept any responsibility for damage caused directly or indirectly as result of use of this software e The serial number will not be reissued therefore it must be kept in a safe place Yokogawa holds the copyright to the software that is on the CD ROM e vigilantplant DAQSTATION Daqstation DXAdvanced and MVAdvanced are registered trademarks of Yokogawa Electric Corporation e Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries e Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated e Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology MIT e Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders e The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the registered trademark or trademark symbols and 1st Edition March 2010 2nd Edition June 2010 3rd Edition November 2010 All Rights Reserved Copyright 2005 Yokogawa Electric Corporation IM 04L41B01 64EN Terms and Conditions of the Software License NOTICE PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE USE Thank you very much for purchasing this medium containing a software program and related documentation provided by Yokogawa Electric Corporation hereinafter called Yokogawa and the program conta
95. whether to use the alarm relay output reflash ON or OFF Relay AND Set the range of relays from the first alarm relay using the AND logic gate All other relays are set to the OR logic gate If NONE is selected all relays use the OR logic gate Relay Action Select whether the alarm output relay should be Energize or De Energize when an alarm occurs Alarm Relay Behavior Select the output relay when returning from an alarm to the normal state of operation when the alarm is released This applies to all alarm output relays Ifthe measuring alarm output option is not active this setting is invalid Unhold Default When the alarm is released the output relay stays off Hold The output relay stays on until an Alarm ACK operation is performed Alarm Indicator Select the alarm indicator when returning from an alarm to the normal state of operation Unhold Default The alarm display ends when the alarm is released Hold The alarm display stays on until an Alarm ACK operation performed 5 44 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings Rate of Change Increase Select the number of data samples that determines the interval of the rate of change of an upper limit alarm between 1 and 15 Rate of Change Decrease Select the number of data samples that determines the interval of the rate of change of a lower limit alarm between 1 and 15 Alarm Hysteresis Set the alarm hysteresis to ON or OFF When
96. 0 Bri onjorr 0 000 None 0 00 None m or M 0 00 None gt LAU tela 0 00 None i rion 3 em a gt 2 8 a B Enter the alarm delay time Enter the tag Enter the tag number E Display zone Alarm 4 Alarm Delay E a Ta Zone Tag No Memory Sampling 0 00 None 0 Sec dl OWN 0 00 None i ON 0 00 None 0 Sec ON 0 00 None 1 FON 0 00 None 0 Sec d ON lt T C p a a E 8 ajaj Turn ON OFF the partial Set the graph expanded display i Select the channel display color Graph Partial Bo gt E qo B OFF 1 1 Mio Bf Normal qo B orF 1 IE Bf Normal q0 B orF 1 Mno Bf Normal q0 B OFF 1 i ba Normal 10 bd OFF __ 3 8 ee M ee ee Select the mark type Turn ON OFF scale display Set the green band g Select the mark color a Green Band Alarm Mark olor Region ee lark kind Scalp display Mark color 1 Mark color 2 Mark color 3 Mark color 4 nside M 100 Fixed 41 K Outside 0 0 10 0 Fixed 1 ON OFF El 0 00 100 Alarm 4 ON C 0 000 0100 Alarm 4 ON OFF E 0 00 1 00 Alarm 4 OFF C Ea R A N N E A E E E A SE E E T a E IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 15 3 4 Setting the Computation Channels Turning Computation ON OFF Set whether or not to perform computation for each computation channel Entering Expressions Enter an expression using up to 120 characters You can display the variables or constants list and add one of the variables or c
97. 0 DX2000 with the AS1 advanced security option The Save As dialog box appears Save As Saves the setup data by specifying the save destination and file name IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 9 Printing the Setup Data For the operating procedure see section 1 5 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 79 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 10 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX1000 DX2000 and Checking the DX1000 DX2000 Hardware Information From this software you can start and stop the DX1000 DX2000 and display DX1000 DX2000 hardware information Starting and Stopping Measurement 1 Select Comm Action Memory amp Math Start Memory amp Math Stop from the menu bar File Comm Setting System View Help O Receive Setting amp File Comm Setting System View Help O Receive Setting amp Me Send Setting Hardware Info Memory amp Math Start The Network dialog box appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Command dialog box appears If the password has expired on a DX with the AS1 advanced security option follow the directions in the dialog box that appears 3 Click OK Recording on the DX starts or stops 3 80 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 10 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX1000 DX2000 and Checking the DX1000 DX2000 Hardware Information IM 04L41B01 64EN Displaying DX1000 DX2000 Hardware Information 1 Select Comm Action Hardware Info
98. 00 Alarm 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Alarm 0 0100 Alar Scale display Mark ci OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Paste Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Copy Details Click to toggle ON and OFF Click to change the display 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Enter external input channel settings in the same manner as those of the measurement channel items Also note that this measurement channel setting screen is only one example your actual screen may vary Select this tab Double click to set the channel Select the reference channel for Select the input mode the difference computation Difference computation Enter the scale Scaling Square root Set the span eqsure channel Scale Detta Scale vot DELTA SCALE SQRT 2 0000 E 0000 fea VYOLT OFF SCALE SQRT 2V 1 2 0000 2 0000 CHO03 rel OFF DELTA SQRT 2V 2 0000 2 0000 2 cHoo4 Rona eas DELTA SCALE 2V 2 0000 2 00002 OLT DELTA SCALE SQRT 2 2 0000 2 0000 e e m Set all E Select the range type Initialize Enter the scale unit Set the low cut Select the alarm type Enter the alarm value Select ON OFF Low Cut 1 Alarm 2 aa a a a 0 0000 s01 0 0000 None orF J 0 0000 502 OFF oF M 0 01 S03 orF 0 00 None orF 3 Select the relay number 0 01 504 orF 0 00 None orF J 0 00 N
99. 0ZX3 000LX32 24 Bun uos o 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings Internal Loop 5 8 CLOG Error CX Style Number S3 or Later Set the method for dealing with abnormalities in the channel data for CLOG an operator for the PV SP computation function and analog retransmission Error Process as a computation error Skip Skip any abnormal data and complete the computation Event Output CX Style Number S3 or Later Common Set a common event output setting for all program patterns Separate Set the event output for each program pattern For each loop there are Control Setting and Burn out Tuning items Ee Hardware Configurator NewF ile File Comm Setting Control Setting System View Help D coe tel te ey S P Alarm Relay Remote Internal Loop Scan IntervaliMemory Loop N Measure channel Key LockLogin Control Setting Burn outTuning Temperature Contral ction sie Control Mode ofr G Single Cascade m PY Switching Retrans o Time zone 7 i 3 Method G Range G P High G Signal 2 Network ORR Nhe te Program Control OFF Cal ON J Control Action PID Control Mode Follow Up ve Fixed point E ALM Control input channel C4 Remote Remote Setting Gy OFF Control Relay Alarm Mode Y External Loop Output Process Control Output Cycle Time 4204 B Analog output Type Ready E ee LOOP Select the loop number to which the settings apply CX1000 1 and 2 When 4 selected fo
100. 1 copy for back up purposes The Licensee shall secure or supervise the copy of the Licensed Software by the Licensee itself with great strict and due care 2 4 Inno event shall the Licensee dump reverse assemble reverse compile or reverse engineer the Licensed Software so that the Licensee may translate the Licensed Software into other programs or change it into a man readable form from the source code of the Licensed Software Unless otherwise separately agreed by Yokogawa Yokogawa shall not provide the Licensee the source code for the Licensed Software 2 5 The Licensed Software and its related documentation shall be the proprietary property or trade secret of Yokogawa or a third party which grants Yokogawa the rights In no event shall the Licensee be transferred leased sublicensed or assigned any rights relating to the Licensed Software 2 6 Yokogawa may use or add copy protection in or onto the Licensed Software In no event shall the Licensee remove or attempt to remove such copy protection 2 7 The Licensed Software may include a software program licensed for re use by a third party hereinafter called Third Party Software which may include any software program from affiliates of Yokogawa made or coded by themselves In the case that Yokogawa is granted permission to sublicense to third parties by any licensors sub licensor of the Third Party Software pursuant to different terms and conditions than those stipulated in this Agreement
101. 1 the Licensee shall assign to Yokogawa all of the rights to defend the Licensee and to negotiate with the claiming party Furthermore the Licensee shall provide Yokogawa with necessary information or any other assistance for Yokogawa s defense and negotiation If and when such a claim should be attributable to Yokogawa subject to the written notice to Yokogawa stated in the preceding Paragraph 5 1 Yokogawa shall defend the Licensee and negotiate with the claiming party at Yokogawa s cost and expense and be responsible for the final settlement or judgment granted to the claiming party in the preceding Paragraph 5 1 5 3 When any assertion or allegation of the infringement of the third party s rights defined in Paragraph 5 1 is made or when at Yokogawa s judgment there is possibility of such assertion or allegation Yokogawa will at its own discretion take any of the following countermeasures at Yokogawa s cost and expense a To acquire the necessary right from a third party which has lawful ownership of the right so that the Licensee will be able to continue to use the Licensed Software b To replace the Licensed Software with an alternative one which avoids the infringement or c To remodel the Licensed Software so that the Licensed Software can avoid the infringement of such third party s right 5 4 If and when Yokogawa fails to take either of the countermeasures as set forth in the preceding subparagraphs of Paragraph 5 3 Yokogawa sha
102. 100 0 Set between the target setpoint s upper and lower limits Alarm value 1 to 4 Set the alarm value The setting depends on the type of alarm PV and SP alarms EU 0 to 100 Deviation High and Deviation Low alarms EUS 100 to 100 of the measurement span Other deviation alarms EUS 0 to 100 of the measurement span Output alarms 5 0 to 105 0 of the output value IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Settings Proportional band P Specify between 0 1 and 999 9 Integral Time l Specify between 0 and 6000s Derivative Time D Specify between 0 and 6000s Output Lower Limit Set the output lower limit between 5 0 and 105 0 such that upper limit gt lower limit Output Upper Limit Set the output upper limit between 5 0 and 105 0 such that upper limit gt lower limit Shutdown Turn the shutdown function ON or OFF Available when the Setup tab s Internal Loop gt Output Process gt Control output setting is set to Current output and analog retransmission is set to 4 20 mA Manual Reset Set the manual reset between 5 0 and 105 0 of the output value Relay Hysteresis Value Set the relay hysteresis in EUS 0 0 to 100 0 Relay Hysteresis Point Select the Hysteresis operating point when using ON OFF control from Mid Lower Limit or Upper Limit Preset Out Select a fixed control output value from 5 0 to 105 0 to be used when operation is st
103. 2 DX104 DX204 DX208 DX204C DX208C MV102 MV104 MV204 and MV208 125 ms and 250 ms DX106 DX112 DX210 DX220 DX230 MV106 MV112 MV220 and MV230 1sand2s A D Integrate 100 ms can be selected only when the scan interval is set to 2 s Memory Sample save method of measured computed data e Number of blocks When the data type is EVENT select 1 2 4 8 or 16 When the data type is EVENT amp DISP select 1 2 or 4 e Pre Trigger Length If 0 is selected the event file will entirely consist of data after the trigger If 100 is selected the event file will entirely consist of data before the trigger e Memory Sample Select the channels that are to be saved to the memory Note If Save is set to Manual the data directory is created at a location that cannot be managed by the DAQ Desktop Therefore the DAQ Desktop cannot be used to handle data files in that directory IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 17 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXd 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Channel Setting the Burnout and RJC Click here also selectable from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting Set to the positive side 100 Set to the negative side 0 Set the reference junction compensation to internal or external 6 18 d Scan Interv Channel Key Lock Login d Timer Report Temperature AUX Time zone Metwork J AlarmRelay Remote alMemory Channel Pi OFF OFF
104. 20mA 20 4mA and 20 OmA 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings 5 10 J AlarmRelayRemote m Internal Loop Scan IntervalMemory LOOP J Measure channel X Key LockiLogin Meose Burn outuning Temperature r Input Process J Aux J Time zone Network Control Action Internal Loop DIDOJSYV Regist Control Relay _ External Loop Burnout Tuning Tab When PV SP Computation Is OFF es Ee eee ee J External ee See Internal J External Internal J External Input Process Burnout Sets the burnout action for the PV inputs of each loop You can select OFF UP or DOWN No 2 is valid only when the control mode is set to PVSwitching Remote is valid only when the PV input is set to remote input This setting is invalid for PV inputs other than thermocouples and standard signals When PV SP computation is ON it is set according to Control Input Channel on page 5 12 RJC Type Volt uV This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs The setting is entered on the PV inputs of each loop No 2 is valid only when the control mode is set to PVSwitching Remote is valid only when the PV input is set to remote input This setting is invalid on the CX main unit for PV input other than thermocouples You can select Internal or External for Type If you select External set a voltage i
105. 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement input span Approximation Set with EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement input span Set between 2 and 11 points Output Enter the linearize output value The value depends on the linearize mode Biasing Set with EUS 100 0 to 100 0 of the measurement input span Approximation Set with EU 5 0 to 105 0 of the measurement input span Note e With linearize bias set so that input output is EU 0 100 Also set so that linearizer input linearizer output is greater than or equal to the previous linearizer input linearizer output e Set so that linearizer approximation output is more than the previous value e Starting from the third point if you set a value smaller than the previous value all settings after that point become disabled e When the PV SP computation function is ON the above settings are entered for each control input channel item under Control Input Channel on the Setting tab See page 5 30 for the setting method 9 25 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Bun uos o 5 4 Control Function General Settings Control Function Settings Control Groups 5 26 Control Loop Control Function SP Tracking PY Tracking Target Setpoint Limiter Control Input PIDJAlarm Operation Related Bi Output Velocity Lim J Linearizer z Anti reset Windup Q Auto Manual Control Function aa DEn rT SP Tracking Turn the target setpoint tracking ON or OFF PV Tracking
106. 6 10 Display Zone Graph Partial Expansion and Colot ccccccccccseceececeeceeeeeeaeeeeeaeees 6 10 COINS TAM acs acinehaccs ces tices as acee as aac cate dede actiuee sos atce iaaeleamaenetaciie oeaea seule deneaieeeecuestanedenssetense 6 10 Setting One Computation Channel at a TIMGE ccccccssseeeccesseeeceeeececseeeeeeseeeeeeeees 6 11 Copying and Pasting Setup Data cic cotecncseneecevmnctsteduedesvexesastece lt hestesalecstetacsedenseve couedeextes 6 11 Contents xii Chapter 7 Index 64A Configuring the Settings ssssrissrrideresisriir ariane RE h Ana E Aan AER AA RAEN Rik EAEE EIRE neir 6 12 Screen Display sxracae etn seracatastennnnnssintvacenndtatecessacaaziesacnoadetssoue aaantosdennsacuseteuiaseesetassnces sess 6 12 M ssag lF iO anne ete ee ete ren een mt rer om en eee ee eee eer 6 13 Group Trip Line a asec ee cade c we Se areca nese eae eee et nse eee de ae eau adcdenexeueseceodeensaeomsceateest 6 14 Setting the View Group DX200 DX200C MV200 Only ccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 6 15 USER Key DX100 DX200 DX200C and MV200 Only Dayliht Saving Batch Option IBT 1 Style Number S2 or Lael onic sos seuehinds ceeazcoasauistcostatueedtancessGensenesieaase sobeeeetetesdescens 6 15 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode cccccccssceeccesseeecceeseeecseeueeccsaeeceesseeeeesseseeeessesesesseseeenaas 6 16 Alarm Relay Remote esse cede seseeiand oniconddanenceiwes veddeuesschdoxsuelabiousaccuesstehsase
107. 7 days 10 min to 14 days auto save interval Trend interval 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min Sampling interval S 4 i 1 Trend interval 30min hn SSCS wn Sampling interval min min Selectable range of 1 hto 31 days 1 h to 31 days 2 h to 31 days 4 h to 31 days 8 h to 31 days auto save interval Display Update 2nd Interval Enabled when Trend Rate Switching is turned ON under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Select a rate from the list The selectable 2nd intervals are the same as those for Trend interval ing i Selectable range of 10 min to 14 days 10 min to 31 days 10 min to 31 days 10 min to 31 days 1 h to 31 days auto save interval ing i Direction Set the display direction of the trends to Horizontal Vertical Wide or Split Trend Clear ON Clears the displayed waveform when the memory sampling is started OFF Does not clear the waveform when the memory sampling is started Message direction Set the display direction of messages to Horizontal or Vertical When the trend is set to Vertical the message direction is fixed to Horizontal Scale Digit Select the Normal or Fine Fine If the scale value is two digit display it can be changed to three digits For example if the scale range is 49 0 to 51 0 the scale values are displayed using 3 digits as shown below 49 0 g 49 6 500 50 4 Bt a ddad dadada aada adnal Value Indicator The current value
108. 9 The number of segments Pattern Mo M Segment setting PY Event Event output Event disp ALM at same E cl SE thispatem attern LU rit 19 ern name attern se segments se event this pattern Setting method Ce Time Ramp i cannot be set here Start setpoint Loop M o E o EA mae Set the segment setting Loopa HE zy iz Loops method Start code G Start Target SP Ramp P1 Start Time PY Start Ramp Pv2 Stat beor4 Set the operating loop Ramp Pv3 Start Ramp P4 Start Gi Ramp PY5 Start G Ramp FYE Start ee Wait action setting i 1 2 3 4 Zone number Wait setting Available when segments have been inserted or added under Segment setting _ OFF 01 _ OFF 0 1 _ OFF 0 1 _ OFF 01 _ OFF i 0 0 o 0 0 o 0 0 ol 0 0 o i 0 0 oji Wait time setting Pattern number Select the number of the desired pattern from 1 to 30 1 to 4 for models with PG1 option Pattern name Enter the pattern name using up to 16 alphanumeric characters Segment setting method Select segment time setting method or segment time ramp grade setting method If you change this setting the program pattern setting corresponding to the pattern number is initialized Start target setpoint Set the start SP a starting condition in the range of EU 0 0 to 100 0 initial value is 0 of the measurement span For style 3 or later the PV event hysteresis setting for loops turned ON
109. A E AS 4 26 a EEE E EE E TA AAEE E EE N E E T AE O E EA 4 27 A E A E E EE E E E E EE E A A E N E A 4 28 Custom Mon sire Era EEEE a E E E EEE 4 29 4 6 Entering Basic SQN S si ccccsteccuevenccccsecsesssinsennensaascdavecseesceataennasbenadacaesnseceesaecemereataecasenescuense 4 30 FAN OOM che ce Sse ca secre Sete seer ete cect Soe agente a EE 4 30 7 EPE EIE ETEEN AA AA OA OE oxen easeose az EET A OEN 4 34 oan MEN alecs ae rE sence aces see ee esses et 4 35 Measure Function ccssctecececsatsntecameccusancexanediatodedessicespactanetetasoveac spans oencessactendeetaxdssasaesancess 4 36 Eo 9 1 Levene a et a ene eo eae ne ee ee en Ree en arene err 4 37 IG SOC SAIPA ETE A EA OE 4 38 User Registati Daher a saree tabtten inate als vende ay Fe strep ala ean AE riae nE oa AE a SEd Sad 4 39 E EN E EEOAE I AOE EAA OE TOEA O I E RETA 4 41 LN cee a E E eee eee 4 52 4 7 Sending the Setup Data to the MV1000 MV 2000 ccccccccccceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeeaaaes 4 55 Sie feo 1s 0 6h gt Beeman ep ee ann ene SO Sp er eon ee ee ee 4 55 4 8 Saving the Setup Data cccccccccsssececceesececseeeeececeuseeeeceueececsuseeeessaseeecsseseesseueeesssaaass 4 57 4 9 Printing the Setup A a ec oars crce iced c batinct eecece nc cies eee eee Rede nccttnen ge Uatetenne se slaceeeeen eas esese 4 58 4 10 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the MV1000 MV2000 Checking the MV1000 MV2000 Hardware Information oe cesta teed Mascedease hoeae e
110. ACCESSION nsccicicorsincdsrsintiecdecineaunsacsanckectsennevedveatiied 3 58 4 42 domain NAM C vsiccwiccsctnticcscenecawtasiassdencscente 3 57 3 58 4 41 4 42 domain PO RIMMAIY scsacecdettonats sane tencatatsactoncaatcndsenenctaaaientees 3 57 4 41 domain secondary cccccsseeeceeeeceeees 3 57 3 58 4 41 4 42 domain suffix search order cece eeceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeees 3 58 4 42 DX P Hardware Contiguratol lt 0 ccesseccccsssssseeccsscsedsecteescneses 1 1 E CHEN PTOI eaaa E aE AA EN Er OEA Eai 3 71 ethernet natn steed tcesaoncaeuscebridlacetensecstussanidiecetectacsicet 2 2 3 57 4 41 event action ezciosaweccentennssacesionsveccactactenteosensnedassoactantcenons 3 32 4 26 event date annenenenennnnnnennrn rnnr errre rernrrrnrorrrrrrrrrerenene 3 36 4 28 E E E E T S E E T 1 3 SSS SION EEP presancesnaakareanananitorasecencunaueensnnnnepaeeaanawansia 5 58 F FAVORITE key ACt OM eres ctonnscleniesacteusnete senaia ni Eeen aknah 3 24 e E EEE E PE see ands E E E ES 5 63 6 13 file NEA ESR sersniacicnricacscntenindiaianrantincicptntaaisariaicuaadepteniass 5 63 6 13 TU PWN eects E O EEA E EEA E 3 44 4 34 first last client Channels ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 3 62 4 46 first last master channel numbers 000ceeeee 3 74 4 53 first day of the WeEGK cccccssssecceceeeeseeeeeeseesseeeeeseaeenseeees 3 40 TIXEE alarmi MAK icasi 3 12 4 12 fixed mages 8 8 gt gt
111. Channel When PV SP Computation Is ON and with CX Style Number S3 or Later 9 12 When PV SP computation is ON see Control Action set burnout and RJC when PV SP computation is OFF set in Internal Loops J AlarmRelay Remote Channel Scan IntervalMemory J Measure channel Key Lock Login Internal External Internal External Oo am vot uv J OFF On 0 Temperature J Aux J Internal Y External Time zone J Network Control Action Internal Loop DIDOSYV Regist Y Internal J External Internal External Internal J External Internal External Internal _ External Control input channel Control Relay External Loop Internal External Internal External Copy Faste Copy Details Burnout Turn each control input channel ON or OFF RJC Type Volt uV This is the reference junction compensation setting for thermocouple inputs Set for each control input channel This setting is invalid on the CX main unit for PV input other than thermocouples You can select Internal or External for Type If you select External set a voltage in the range from 20000 uV to 20000 uV IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings Control Relay _ SlarmRelay Remote Relay J Scan IntervalMemory Module Setting Control J Channel Key Lock Login J Timer J Report J Temperature Aux DOOO1 eE a e J Time zone DOO02 eeeen grata Network Control A
112. Deviation high amp low limit within high amp low limits EUS 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span Output event 5 0 to 105 0 of output PV event display A bar showing that the PV event was set is displayed in the upper part of the program pattern display screen 5 39 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations 5 40 Time Event Set the Time Event Set point PV Event TimeEve RERE Click this tab On1 On2 On3 Off Set the ON OFF setting type of each event 16 events from the following Select Off for events that are not to be assigned On1 Use On time and Off time On2 Use On time only On3 Use Off time only On time Off time Set the ON time OFF time of the time event in hh mm ss format The selectable range is 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 Make sure that Set On time lt Off time Time event display At the bottom of the program pattern display screen a bar showing setting of time events is displayed according to the specified ON and OFF times If time events overlap with those of other segments or in other such cases the specified time event may not occur For details see the CX1000 CX2000 User s Manual IM04L31A01 01E or IM04L31A01 03E Repeat Set the repeat action The repeat start segment repeat end segment and repeat frequency is displayed in the program display screen Click this tab Repeat action Dot con Rotate Repeat action
113. EE E AAT O cu reeenetadeans 5 55 Movig Py AOS aac sasece sate ater isins karius neioii vin iara enaena saraba TuRu iaiu ais iiaiai 5 55 WAG EEEO E EEP OTEA O OE EES O E A O 5 55 LO eer E E r E E 5 55 OM eee ee ase EEE EEEE EEEE EANES 5 56 E E ENTIE E AAEE IEAI IE AE E EI AET A EAE eee ae Sees eee 5 56 Display COlOT aw esr siaet cern cece neice as enn ie season osseunyacesedcenanesessodauiasattsadenasateasteuieuesssteasmuaszes 5 56 Copying and Pasting Setup Data accion cl sc aweehe cg sects aszebesbee chi ssch ewcie senna deed ete se ened 5 57 Setting One Channel at a Time ccccsssececceeeeeeceeeeeeceseesececceueeeesseseeesseesesseageeeseas 5 57 5 9 Computation Channel Settings sce cccccedericatessnadedtes ceaeviecsevaecuedamadanaealedoceseatduteestdantvadenteevencvesd 5 58 Comp taton ON OFF aoc es accent este st essen esacteans eani aaii erae 5 58 Ga EE E RP ee eee A E en ae er ee ee ee eee eee 5 58 DIS PAy fe 0 2 ener aerer eer ee ene tee ener eerie reir he eee eee an nee cere nen E ete ere reas 5 59 PAU ING WAG ests ssacwsencesoutcontl iacttaninpananldsan A 5 59 Tel GC CO AON tae en senate ars ad os ecsa ace aens eS i i 5 59 ER ONG FV SAS Sse seeder sinwarcyd N O dean iiy sus dies Cop middanaudenansces 5 59 Zone Graph Partial and Color icicssincsssutonsaceacensacansaewversnscasoesacntanbacsbedeatennssentanseedonne s 5 59 OS ce ye cscs sc ace rc A eeeas eee eee hee pease 5 59 Setting One Computation Channel at a TIME
114. F 001 0 00 200 00 EEE Turn ON OFF all at once Initialize Set the TLOG computation E Set the rolling aiia Rol TLOG ling Average Timer type Timer Sun Scale Reset vterva Count Type Timer 11 BoF ON FION 1cs 1 orF Timer 4 1 e ONF ONN B 1 OrF 0 0 Timer 1 1 eia 0N OFF ics E Mo 0 00 Timer 1 1 E OFF OHN O0FF 10s E 1 OFF 0 000 Timer oe jioa OFF O0FF 10s X 1 OFF 0 00 Select the alarm type Enter the alarm value Select the relay number Select the aa Alarm 1 Alarm 3 0 None 0 501 0 505 0 0 None 0 0 502 0 0 506 0 00 None 0 00 503 0 00 507 0 000 None 0 000 504 0 000 508 0 00 None Q 0 00 None Q 0 00 None 3 EAE e 3 Bp 8 3 ESES Enter the alarm delay time Enter the tag Display zone Alarm 4 Zone Alarm Delay T Memory Samplin Type Alarm Relay Detect y ini L u Scale display position or M 0 None 10 sec ON 100 1 OFF 0 0 None 10 sec ON 100 1 No No oF B 0 00 None 10 sec ONH 100 1 No No 0 0 0 OFF El 0 000 None 10 sec ON 0 100 1 oad 0 00 None 10 sec Fi ON 0 100 1 4 3 2 8 M M Turn ON OFF the partial Set the graph expanded display im Select the channel display color Graph Partial E BA Normal 4 10 OFF 4 10 10 El Normal i 10 OFF hie gt Weide a OFF 8 8 p 1 1 A 10 v Normal OFF 1 IE B Normal 10 OFF 1 1 Select the mark type Turn ON OF
115. F scale display Select the mark color Green Band Alarm Mark Color Region CEE lark kind Scalp display Mark color 1 Mark color 2 Mark color3 Mark color 4 UECOE gt 100 Fixed 4 ONH Outside 0 0 10 0 Fixed 1 ON C Set the green band JOFF 0 00 100 Alarm ON C 0 000 O 100 Alarm 41 ON o 0 00 1 00 Alarm 14 OFF AT SS Sa Ee ee a Ee eee ae eee Enter the constant used in the expression IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 4 Setting the Computation Channels Use Turning ON OFF Computation Select whether or not to perform computation for each channel Entering Expressions Enter an expression using up to 120 characters You can display the variables or constants list and add one of the variables or constants in the list to your expression simply by clicking it For details related to the expression see the MV1000 MV2000 User s Manual x Exess ABS Absolute value E SOR Square root Click the tab to display Multiplication LOG Common logarithm a list of that item Division EXP Exponent LN Natural logarithm OK Cancel Span Display Span and Point Sets the upper and lower limits of the display The range is from 9999999 to 99999999 Set the number of digits to the right the decimal to four digits or less 0 to 4 Unit Enter the unit using up to six characters TLOG TLOG Computation Timer Type Select timer or match time timer Timer Select the timer number or
116. Input gMrip Line Uzer Key Daylight Saving Mode Biasing A Control Group DIG Monitor DIO Label l aA 0 0 Logic math 2 e ki Control Input 5 200 0 0 0 B 200 0 0 0 T 200 0 0 0 a 200 0 0 0 9 200 0 0 0 10 200 0 0 0 11 200 0 0 0 Mode Select the linearize mode from OFF Biasing or Approximation Input Enter the linearize input value The value depends on the linearize mode Biasing Set with measurement input span EU 5 0 to 105 0 Approximation Set with measurement input span EU 5 0 to 105 0 Set between 2 and 11 points Output Enter the linearize output value The value depends on the linearize mode Biasing Set with measurement input span EUS 100 0 to 100 0 Approximation Set with measurement input span EU 5 0 to 105 0 Note With linearize bias set so that input output is EU 0 100 Also set so that linearizer input linearizer output is greater than or equal to the previous linearizer input linearizer output e Set so that linearizer approximation output is more than the previous value e Starting from the third point if you set a value smaller than the previous value all settings after that point become disabled e When the PV SP computation function is OFF the above settings are entered for each loop item on the Setting tab See page 7 25 for the setting method 5 31 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Buln uos o 5 5 Control Channel S
117. Instant Outputs the instantaneous value e File kind Specify the method used to create report files Settings Description Split Saves each type of report to a separate file Combined Saves the report data of two types in a single file Separate2 Saves a collection of reports such as the hourly reports for a day or the daily reports for a month to a file release numbers 4 and later e Template Function Release numbers 4 and later You can create report templates in XML spreadsheet format and use them to automatically create custom report files To use templates select ON This setting is fixed at OFF when File kind is set to Separate2 3 44 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings e Set Calibration Release numbers 4 and later To use calibration management select ON Notification You can specify how many days before the calibration due date you want to display the calibration notification screen You can set the number of days to a value between 1 and 10 Renotification You can specify the period at which to display the calibration notification screen The calibration notification screen will continue to appear until calibration is completed e Signature Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Process Type Set the process type to choose what kind of collection of measured data can be signed Setting Description Continuous You can sign each individual measured data file Batch You can sign a coll
118. LAY POMOUG ica necercesenasdveaticnasehdcndeiianbusaddandied aceilschaadbaewes 5 44 alarm COll oases ea ciacialee ee tonto ae eeneset 3 49 alarm delay canons ancecartactussanesesncemeenustascceere cess 3 10 4 9 5 55 6 6 alarm indication sie cc tdccciwecvecicdnecactonnsanevsssddededehindebsctoes 3 47 4 34 alarm levels oon ccesicnasogcs sas saccisauius wiece ane anciasaseinese gasses aceaceuseens 3 28 alarm TAU ccricrccnzcstatecs cucu tenteicniadiccseuittutacaasddnicaaciinnte 3 12 4 12 alarm NO OQING since cr asevchersilen atenaasicdantscls niin a tentasoue auxin 3 49 4 32 alarm output TOL AY saetectnaiacdsenctdancentendard gontexeinGarontaxderd 3 48 4 34 alarm value ic coscucecccctccderteuncupresviwbecderteeasuccs 3 10 4 9 5 55 6 6 2 TLE LA 2 2 Gee eet ae eae ee AS nee eee ey eee 3 28 annunciator PIO CC a segs cecciecciecctatecesscncantececatateactinatanteceectadieenies 3 49 annunciator SEQUENCE cccnicnicacvcsesendcrarsdetcensseoidaraeeeentewxneiseedic 3 49 annunciator window display COlOM cccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 49 authenticated e mail transmission cccccceceee cece ee eeee enna ees 3 63 Authentication SMTP c cece cece eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeueeeaeeeaees 3 63 auto INGCFEMGMN case ceccccicecsercnestadiebesndsasensnestacesclenneaxenaves 3 42 4 32 IMO TO COVEL V eai nean Eiri AATE raei 3 73 4 53 GUO SOV 6 scscsicnce as then davendcatncendieticutiversaitutenienlauimauaciactex 3 43 4 33 auto Save in
119. Lock Enabled when Key Security is set to Keylock under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Password The password used to release the key lock Up to 8 characters Key Function Media Select whether to lock each item Settings Description Free Key lock not applied Lock Disables the operation 4 38 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings User Registration IM 04L41B01 64EN You can set the User Registration when Login is selected as Key Security or Comm Security under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Supervisor Mii ii lt lt Environment Logout i Alarm Auto Logout Time TI Scan Interval Logout Operation Cy Off Logout Operation Display I Measure Function 5 I Report S Login Mode S Supervisor Fe Admini User Admin 1 Ethernet Serial e Auto Logout Time Settings Description OFF Does not log out until the logout operation is executed 1min to 10min Automatically logs out when there is no key operation for a specified time e Logout Operation Settings Description OFF Only login operation is available Logout Operation Allows the user to switch the operation screen in addition to the login Display operation e Mode The choices differ depending on the selected contents of Key Security and Comm Security under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Settings Descri
120. MB or more more space may be required depending on the amount of data stored CD ROM Drive One CD ROM drive Mouse A mouse supported by Windows Monitor A video card that is recommended for the OS and a display that is supported by the OS has a resolution of 1024x768 or higher and that can show 65 536 colors 16 bit high color or more Interface Port When communicating through RS 232 use a COM port COM1 COM2 COM3 or COM4 supported by Windows When communicating through RS 422 RS 485 connect a converter to an RS 232 port To communicate through an Ethernet connection you need an Ethernet card supported by Windows Also the TCP IP protocol must be installed Printer A printer supported by Windows is required An appropriate printer driver is also required Operating System OS Os Mersin Windows 2000 Windows XP Home Edition SP3 Professional SP3 excluding x64 Editions Note e The time zone can be set in Date Time which can be opened from Control Panel e If daylight saving time is used mark the check box of Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving changes e The time zone should not be set using the autoexec bat file If TZ GTMO is set in the file specify rem to disable it e Data created in 2038 or later cannot be handled e The font Courier New needs to be installed on your personal computer IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 3 Starting Exiting the Software Starting 1 From
121. N 4 7 Sending the Setup Data to the MV1000 MV2000 Sent Setup Data You cannot send data while the MV1000 MV2000 is performing memory sampling or math computations Address Setup Data When settings that deal with communication hereinafter referred to as address settings such as IP addresses are changed the data for those settings is sent separately from other setup data An MV that receives address setup data restarts automatically and begins operating with the data that has been sent The following items are address settings e The TCP IP and Server functions settings under Ethernet e The Serial and PROFIBUS DP settings under Serial Other Setup Data Other setup data is sent together Sending Address Setup Data IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 Select Comm Partial Transfer Address Settings from the menu bar The Network dialog box appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button amp Ethernet Address User Mame User ID Password C RS 423 485 Cancel The Store dialog box appears 3 Click OK The MV starts sending setup data The data that you send is enabled after the MV restarts Store x IN Send Setting to Connecting Hardware Cancel Note After you change the address the address that is sent is recorded as the retry destination The next time you open the Network dialog box the address appears as the initial value 4 55
122. N Alarmi O oF on Alarm D oF on Alarm O oF on Alarm Q oF on Include INST O oF on Include source URL OFF ON Subject Alarm summary Header Headers Basic Setting Set the SMTP server and mail address e SMTP server name Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP Server e Port No Unless specified otherwise set the number to the default value The default value is 25 e Security Settings Description OFF Disables POP before SMTP POPbeforeSMTP Enables POP before SMTP e Address 1 Address 2 Enter the e mail address Multiple e mail addresses can be entered in the box of one recipient When entering multiple addresses delimit each address with a space Up to 150 characters can be entered e Sender Enter the sender e mail address You can enter up to 64 characters POP3 Settings If you need to use POP before SMTP specify the POP3 server e POP3 Server name Enter the host name or IP address of the POP3 server e Port number Unless specified otherwise set the number to the default value The default value is 110 e Login name Enter the POP3 server login name e Password Enter the POP3 server login password You can enter up to 32 characters e Send delay second Enter the wait time from POP3 server authentication until transmission Set a value in the range of 0 to 10 seconds 4 47 OOOZAW OOOLAI 24 Bun yuo 4 6 Entering Basic Settings e Login method To send the POP3 server login password with
123. N set the value in the range from 30000 to 30000 Set the decimal place in the range from 0 to 4 With Style 2 or earlier the setting range is from 0 001 to 9 999 PV Range PV Range Enter the maximum value minimum value decimal place and units Set the max and min values between 30000 and 30000 such that max gt min and max min lt 30000 PV Switching PV Range Set within the input range When setting Method to Range in the Control Action within the Setup tab s internal loop item or when setting Method to PVHigh only the upper limit is set If you set Method to Signal the PV Switching setting is not available Note When the PV SP computation function is ON the above settings for the input related settings are entered for each control input channel item on the Setup tab See page 7 30 for the setting method 5 19 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbutinbiyyuog o 5 4 Control Function General Settings 5 20 When PV SP Computation Function is ON PVSP math PY SP math LOOPO1 i L PIDJAlarm Mode orr Gon 3 Operation Related 1 Control Function i 1 LOOP02 Unt Si LOOPOS Py Switch Point i L i 1 LOOPOS 1 LOOPOE 1 E kemote pias ool 1 Math Error amp Over Under 3 Enter PV or SP related settings When the control mode is analog retransmission the setting menu for that mode is displayed See the next page PV SP Computation Function Select whether to enter sett
124. Pale sens aa EEEE 5 37 program pattern end Signl cccccessesesesseesseesseeeeeeneees 5 41 SEDLE EE ETE A er A E E E EE E A ET 3 72 4 52 PV SP computation function ananenaannneennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnne 5 20 PYV SP egua lo isoen siir e rN E 5 20 PVY event eee ee a a aner e A aN Eri 5 39 5 41 PV event relay OULD ic cisicicsctadiarientsinvsinsitactvadundceniawesanntinabian 5 41 PY event display essencia aina ea ais 5 39 PV event NySteresis cccccccscssceccessscecseeseeessesseeeseseeessees 5 27 Ro BE A S A EAE A N A E A E E E E eee 5 38 ramp rate time unit cc cdscescsmeanendeateanesascsineranndiecaccudnsdpannausdestaans 5 38 IM 04L41B01 64EN Index NAS gecesi te O 3 7 4 7 5 54 6 5 read cycle a cetonancet oe anc adeaiontieinessateaiaatene aeioasnoocareudenn 3 73 4 53 recipient 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 4 48 4 49 ref tme ainra e i a a er aiL TEES reiia 3 65 4 48 reference Channel cccceceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 8 4 7 5 54 6 5 PT AS Fos EEEN E tonics E E A E EA 3 47 4 34 DO ste aoe EA E E T ON E E E A 3 62 3 74 4 46 4 54 relative tiMer asiek css csctaccceacansantcsitacy dust eetadacetesecadeceataueattace 3 29 DENY EET AIE 3 10 3 40 4 9 6 6 relay ACUO eenaa ie i einan 3 48 4 34 BEV AND cein EAEE 5 44 6 16 release 01010010 lt nnne iv NO creana eE are te eds geen EE E E 5 45 6 16 remote controller ID oo 0 ccc cecc esc eeseseeeee eee seaeeueeaeeeaeeaes 3 41 remote control t
125. The Licensee shall agree that the Licensed Software shall be provided to the Licensee on an as is basis when delivered If defect s such as damage to the medium of the Licensed Software attributable to Yokogawa is found Yokogawa agrees to replace free of charge any Licensed Software on condition that the defective Licensed Software shall be returned to Yokogawa s specified authorized service facility within seven 7 days after opening the Package at the Licensee s expense As the Licensed Software is provided to the Licensee on an as is basis when delivered in no event shall Yokogawa warrant that any information on or in the Licensed Software including without limitation data on computer programs and program listings be completely accurate correct reliable or the most updated 4 2 Notwithstanding the preceding Paragraph 4 1 when third party software is included in the Licensed Software the warranty period and terms and conditions that apply shall be those established by the provider of the third party software 4 3 When Yokogawa decides in its own judgement that it is necessary Yokogawa may from time to time provide the Licensee with Revision upgrades and Version upgrades separately specified by Yokogawa hereinafter called Updates IM 04L41B01 64EN Terms and Conditions of the Software License 4 4 Notwithstanding the preceding Paragraph 4 3 in no event shall Yokogawa provide Updates where the Licensee or any thir
126. Transfer at Signing You can transfer measured data files display or event data files to an FTP server after you sign them You need to configure the FTP client settings so that display and event data are transferred Setting Description On Measured display and event data files are only transferred to an FTP server after they are signed Also the Transfer wait time settings are invalid transfer is executed immediately Off Measured data files are not transferred to an FTP server after they are signed 3 46 IM 04L41B01 64EN Alarm IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Environment Basic Setting S Alarm OFF 500ms 1s 2s D Scan Interval Rate of Change Decrease 1 2 Measure Function Rate of Change Increase 5 acd Indicator Unhold Hold Ethernet Output reay Internal Switch AND None D Relay AND None B Relay action De Energize G Energize Relay hold amp Unhold Hold Relay Action on ACK amp Normal Reset Hysteresis __ Measure channel High Low 05 Measure channel Delta High Low 0 0 Math channel High Low 0 0 Alarm action Sa No Logging amp OFF ON Annunciator mode OFF ON SequeniGe Time off colar GJ Green Cy White Red Orange Pink Yellow Red Orange Pink Yellow Red Orange Pink Yellow Red Orange Pink Yellow Reflash To set the reflash operation on the alarm out
127. Turn ON sample or OFF do not sample Zone Zone L and U You can select the range of the screen in which the waveform of each channel is to be displayed Specify positions on the display scale for the upper and lower limits The conditions for setting the zones are as follows e Range 0 to 100 The lower limit L must be less than the upper limit e The difference between the lower and upper limits is at least 5 Graph For details see section 5 7 in the User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E Scale display position Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 10 for the DX2000 or from 1 to 6 for the DX1000 Select OFF if you do not wish to display the scale Scale divide position Select the number of main scale marks on the trend display from 4 to 12 and C10 C10 The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks and scale values are indicated at 0 30 50 70 and 100 positions on the trend display Bar display position Select Normal Center Lower or Upper 1 Lower and Upper can only be selected with DX main unit firmware version 2 0x or later Bar divide number Select number of divisions of the scale on the bar graph display IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 11 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Partial Partial Expanded Display Bound position Set the boundary for the partial expanded display The range is from 1
128. a The items checked in Copy Details can be copied and pasted Click the channel number to select the copy source or paste destination To select multiple channels to be copied drag the channel number to specify the range to be copied To select multiple copy destinations select the range in a similar fashion IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 7 OOZAW 00LAIW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channels Setting One Channel at a Time 1 Double click the channel you wish to set GOFF Dette GQscale sort 3 Select the tab of the item to be configured Meas voe EE evee IT Span L 2 The channel setting reich M e dialog box opens Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 E Delay Tine D ZEC Valid Span 4 After setting the items click here Apply the settings Update according to the changes in the Meas sheet The items in the measurement channel tab can be configured for each channel The items that are configured are the same as those configured on the spreadsheet For details see the page corresponding to the item IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 3 Setting the Computation Channels Double click when setting each channel Set the display span 6 characters or less Select this tab Enter the unit Turn ON OFF computation Enter the constant to be Enter the expression used in the expression l A Expression CH32 CH33 CHi4 L Initialize Select the number of digits to the
129. a ee v e Month Day Week Hour Minute Set the month day and weekday Set the time in the range of 00 00 to 23 59 for Hour Minute e Timer action Single Executes the action once when the condition is met Repeat Executes the action at every specified time On a MV2000 with the external input channel MC1 option specify the channel that will be manually sampled On all other models all channels will be manually sampled so this setting is not necessary Click to display a channel selection dialog box Channel selection dialog box Goes setting 1 Daylight Saving Time Manual Sample I Group i Display i View group 1 Timer Manual Sample i Event Action i File i Wenu Customize Copy Baete Copy Details Fill and increment by 1 starting from the top of the selection Turn ON OFF all in the selection at once Drag to select a range Manual sample number Select a number from 001 to 120 The instantaneous values are output in this order Manual Sample e Use Select On when assigning a channel to the manual sample number e CH No Enter a channel number of a measurement channel computation channel M1 and PM1 options or external input channel MC1 option 4 25 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bun yuo Ka 4 5 Entering General Settings Event Action 4 26 General setting 1 Daylight Saving Time I Group I Timer 1 Manual Sample B Event Action 1 File I Menu Customize Math Start
130. acaastecsenecelecsssencelauntensoanest ceeenecn 3 13 Setting One Channel at a M6 seen eee ee ee nee ee eee eee eee eee ee 3 14 3 4 Setting the Computation Channels lt cecseccescacsackececnisentesecsssGanniatiol percesddeateteaiesechndecsaceweatnerses 3 15 Turning Computation ON OFF icsccsescccdeniadsdeivexeacedsancdosecnasacedasduacdsiveceecheasodeseeescetoeenosse 3 16 Enternng EX DiC SSION Se sissors innn Miesutstabvenesdunsins aeaeclsaareedaneddiataicieeatigesngeueasssaeraseals 3 16 Span Display Spam and POU ashe ee ascent iii e ae NEREA RAS EA EREEREER ia 3 16 RI cc ote E Oscessacassasnacnesdunececesenoreteceescen are 3 16 TLOG TLOG Computation j ee a enn nes ner nee ne 3 16 Aan aE NAC sc nticas cdencrteannncenstictnaeceaean nie coneda E ens seustsaaadeuenneniaale 3 16 RONO PAO radi setae wears ocean A outa stata sta watansatenae camantanes A S 3 17 Memory Smpling Zone Graph Partial Color Green Band and Alarm Mark 3 17 Cone 2 g eee eee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee 3 17 Copying and Pasting Setup Data sce secccsccscvecctadsecceteuecnenesesaisdeacnneesicen sdeces acextiGenenerssacnaee 3 17 Setting One Computation Channel at a TIMGE ccccccsseceeccesseeecesesecceuesesseaneeeeses 3 18 3 5 Entering General CUNO esis estese cnc eeeastan tinea dieee estas ne seen wee eeecs baie pecan en eae eee eee 3 19 Daylight SAVING Time ccnccccecsnedroovacenacdaascconermmedeevaesesadesencntesiseescensenasdeophccnteiwsccoanssiateen
131. activating the alarm output relay is met in the next scan interval the relay output is activated This operation is valid only when the alarm output relay is set to Hold Reset The relay output is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed If a new condition for activating the alarm output relay the relay is activated Note When reflash is turned ON the operation of the first three output relays is set to nonhold Specifying Hold produces no effect Measure channel High Low Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence release of the high low limit alarm specified on measurement channels Selectable range 0 0 to 5 0 of the span or scaling width Measure channel Delta High Low Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence release of the difference high low limit alarm specified on measurement channels Selectable range 0 0 to 5 0 of the span Math channel High Low Ext channel High Low Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence release of the high low limit alarm specified on computation and external input channels Selectable range 0 0 to 5 0 of the measurement span Basic setting a Scan Interval Alarm Scan Interval S Scan Interval AD Integrate Measure Function Report Key Lock 1 Login 1 Ethernet i Serial Scan interval Select a scan interval A D integrate Select the A D integration time as necessary Only the selectable settings are displayed
132. ail Setting Temperature Unit Qc F Option Alarm Time zone Time deviation limit Date format J Scan Interval Measure Function J Report ist weekday J Remote Service port J Ethernet Memory Media Information amp OFF ON Measurement Error amp OFF ON Communication Error amp OFF ON Memory stop amp OFF ON Alarm amp OFF ON FAIL relay Q FAIL Status Relay Memory Sampling UserLock Login Status relay FAIL Status Relay Memory Sampling UserLock Login e Data Kind Settings Description Display Records display data E D Records display data and event data You cannot select E D when Trend Rate Switching under Environment Detail Setting under the Basic setting tab is set to ON You cannot select E D if you are using the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later You can set the multi batch function by setting Batch operation qty under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic setting tab You cannot select E D on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Event Records event data e Temperature Unit Select C or F e Time zone Set the time zone of the region in which the DX will be used in terms of the time difference from GMT A negative value indicates that the local time is behind the GMT e Time deviation limit Current time pp Poeun time Ne a n a Time deviation limit When the time deviation between the time
133. apses e The alarm detection operation is reset if a power failure occurs The operation restarts after the power recovers e Ifthe alarm setting of the delay high limit alarm is changed when an alarm is already activated and the input is greater than or equal to the new setting the alarm continues For all other cases the alarm detection operation starts at the new setting This is also true for the delay lower limit alarm Alarm Relay To output relays select the output relay number Otherwise select None This can be selected when Alarm No Logging is turned ON under Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Select whether to show or hide the alarm indication when an alarm occurs If set to OFF a signal is output to the alarm output relay or internal switch when an alarm occurs but it is not indicated on the screen The alarm is also not recorded in the alarm summary 000ZAWN 000 LAIN 24 Bulunbiyuog ka 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Moving Average Tag Memory Sampling To use the moving average select the sampling count Times 2 to 400 Up to 16 characters can be entered for the tag You can use the tag name instead of the channel number to be displayed on the screen This can be selected when Tag is Tag under Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Turn ON sample or OFF do not sample Display Zone Zone L and U Graph 4 10 You can select the range of the scree
134. aracters That Can Be Used List of Input Types Type Allowed Characters Alphanumeric characters Symbol Arbitrary string Yes Yes Yes No Alphanumeric Yes Yes Yes Yes including and Machine address Yes Disallowed E mail address Yes Disallowed Subject Yes Disallowed File path name Yes Disallowed Yes and Disallowed indicate availability Item Tag group name Batch field title characters file header mail header Unit user name password character string account Expression Host name domain name server name and domain suffix Transfer destination transfer source Mail title File name directory name initial path Disallowed in the symbol box indicates some disallowed characters are present even though input was possible The following characters cannot be used in a file path Expressions are defined by the grammar Allowed alphanumeric characters and symbols expressed with a single byte are as follows Table of Character Codes 4 60 zi Alphanumeric characters Symb AAA AAA e HE e epe AU eener ereere P reker PPPECHree rer rl e CHL PEE EEEP EE SP means space 7 s the symbol for degrees of temperature Input output and indicated using IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter5 Configuring the CX1000 CX2000 5 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator the Hardware Configurator Window and System Configuration Settings The Hardware Co
135. ars when you press the DISP ENTER key Main Menu The display selection menu appears when the DISP ENTER key is pressed Click to select Type of main menus being set Daylight Saving Time J Group Display View group GROUP 1 GROUP 4 MESSAGE Message Comment Annunciator Timer Event Action File Menu Customize Menu J Function Web Report Changes the left right display area Delete selected items Click to display a sub menu on the right side of the screen Add an item beneath the selected item O Q c ey m o er gt g gt lt g x lt N For information about the menu see section 5 17 in the DX1000 User s Manual or section 5 18 in the DX2000 User s Manual Function The FUNC key menu appears when the FUNC key is pressed Daylight Saving Time J Group I Display View group I Message iI Comment 1 Annunciator i Timer MEDIA EJECT I Event Action SNAPSHOT Ld File MANUAL S Menu Customize TRIGGER SAVE DISPLAY SAVE EVENT i Menu S Function si Web Report For information about the menu see section 4 1 in the DX1000 DX2000 User s Manual IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 37 3 5 Entering General Settings Web Report Release number 3 or later 3 38 Daylight Saving Time Group Display J View group Message 2 Comment Annunciator Timer
136. arse sect et earn cece E EAE EEE EE TI ETE oss EE E EEEE 4 7 Low cut Can be set when the mode is 1 5V and when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT SCG CIC aa sess coe scecaccieceesancseesscicdaosmtannoacensiateo cugdensdiecenseeeaceentennettoseseceieds 4 8 Low cut value Can be set when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT SECO ft Panam ne Nn E ne etme Oe ree ern eee ees een eee eee 4 8 CIID FADIOMeG ORO CUOM sisca i a icity ts EE Eara rbai 4 8 PACU Ml AEE EEEE E EEA EE E EENAA AETAT 4 9 SD E EES PEE RE E E E E E E A E 4 9 WIC WIIG FV CAO si snnesuiesiomiimiiessuisalerctadandiinioiuitawiiel arias aiii ii bhinn roiu rna iid eriiiri nieta 4 10 LE e cet i eet PE E EA ETE EE EAE E E EIEE EE E E ES A E 4 10 Memon Seti dicssa nnie ni n eA REN A S E aa RE AAAI E ni 4 10 Display Zone Zone Land U j sisssncisrriniiimerariiino dnne arnir i i iai 4 10 12 Dee r a te eee ene ene ee ee eee 4 10 Partial Partial Expanded Display cacsccevastsesadsseesanientoenvinacsnsdenteouatenesesdeubelambeteeatnnedestaats 4 11 MS OIOM AIS COlOT irinaren raigna oriniai airn eri Ra i ianari 4 11 acen Ba ere E 4 11 ANIA K era e E E A E R 4 12 Copying and Pasting Setup Data cis cseccscecd a nstheeedeesesatacee es bacdotentoicedsdenteevslanhedervohocdeeees 4 12 Setting One Channel at a Time cccccsseececccesececsceseececeeeeeecceuseeessesseeeseeeeesseaeeeeseas 4 13 4 4 Setting the Computation Channels cccccccssssecccessseecceesececscesseceseees
137. art is executed Otherwise select OFF IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Server Function Alarm 0 Environment FTF Server Use Cl Mot Use Scan Interval Wieb Server 5I Measure Function Use Wot G Use I Report Key Lock I Login Operator OFF G ON Access Control CFF E S Ethernet Q Mot Use s1 TCPAF i OFF G on j FTF Access Control OFF i ho 2 E Mail dbus client SMTP Server Use fol Mot Use 2 SNTP client B Server functions 1 Serial Modbus Server Use fal Mot Use e Use Select Use or Not don t use e Web server Use For the Web item under Server select Use or Not don t use When Use is selected the Web page item is added to the basic setting mode menu Operator To set the operator page select ON Operator Access Control To use access control select ON You must enter a user name and password to display the operator page You must select Login as Key Security or Comm Security under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab and register users under the User Registration Command To write messages select ON Otherwise select OFF Monitor To display the monitor page on a browser select ON otherwise select OFF Monitor Access Control Same as the Operator Access Control e SNTP Server Use select Use or Not don t use e Modbus Server Use select
138. ating system OS For such descriptions refer to the Windows User s Guide etc Conventions Used in This Manual e Unit a EEE EA Indicates 1024 Example 100 KB e Menus commands dialog boxes and buttons Enclosed in e Note Provides useful information regarding operation of the software About Images The images that appear in this manual may be different from those that appear on the software but not to a degree that interferes with procedural explanations Products Covered in This Manual Item Described in This Manual DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Up to release number 4 firmware version 4 1x Described as DX1000 DX2000 in this manual MV1000 MV2000 Up to release number 1 firmware s version 1 0x CX1000 CX2000 Up to style number S3 DX100 DX200 DX200C Up to style number S4 MV100 MV200 Up to style number S4 DAQSTANDARD Up to firmware s version R8 2x IM 04L41B01 64EN Revision History IM 04L41B01 64EN Edition 1 How to Use This Manual Additions and Changes Revised for release number 4 of the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 This manual was created through the division of the fifth edition of the conventional DAQSTANDARD user s manual IM04L41B01 61E into different manuals for each software application Changes to the operating environment support for Windows 7 Improvements to descriptions Changes to the operating environment Support for Windows XP SP2 is terminated Improvements to descriptio
139. ation You can perform this operation without logging in Start or stop recording You cannot perform this operation IM 04L41B01 64EN 2 2 Displaying Setup Data To Load Setup Data from the DX1000 DX2000 Use communication to receive and display the DX settings IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 Click the Receive Data button or select Comm Receive Setting from the menu bar The Network dialog box appears Enter all the parameters for Ethernet and click the OK button For information about the connection conditions see section 2 1 gt gt RS 232 Por MG Baud kates Parity Baud rate Barts AGGress If the Receive Data dialog box appears proceed to step 4 If the current password has expired and you are prompted to change it proceed to step 3 Enter the new password into the New password and Re type new password boxes and click the OK button The Receive Data dialog box appears Click the OK button The software receives the setup data from the DX and displays it Receive Data x N Receive Setting from Connecting Hardware i Cancel uodo Ayindag paoueApy LSV 94 YUM SI PON 000ZXG O00LXG UO e eq dnjas gt 2 2 Displaying Setup Data Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System 1 Click the New button or select File New from the menu bar Ep Hardware Configurator Mews TL Hardware Contigur The System Configuration dialog b
140. be initialized Continue appears System configuration x System configuration has been changed The input configuration and data will be initialized Continue a 4 Click the OK button to initialize the data OOOZAW OOOLAI 24 Bulunbiyuog Ka 4 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Settup Data Initializing the Setup Data 1 Choose Setting Initialize from the menu bar File Comm Setting System view Ee Lal Meas Channels Math Channels Ext thannels General Setting P Basic Setting F The Initialize dialog box opens lnitialize A Initialize current settings mea _ 2 Click the OK button to initialize the current settings The changed settings are restored to the condition when they were newly created 4 4 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Setting Operation You can select a range of channels and set each item at once Click and select from the list Drag to select a range Click the text box to Turn all channels ON OFF enter a number E Hardware Configurator NewFile Ee 10 x File Comm Setting System View Help O S W o MeasCh Detta Scale Sqrt Range Type VOLT DELTA SCALE SORT PAA VOLT DELTA SCALE SORT Puka VOLT DELTA SCALE SQRT VOLT DELTA SCALE SQRT VOLT DELTA SCALE SQRT 2 0000 o000 VOLT DELTA SCALE 2 000 o000 VOLT DELTA 2V 2 0000 2 0000 VOLT DELTA SCALE SORT 25 2
141. ble click to set the channel Select the reference channel for Select the input mode the difference computation Difference computation Enter the scale Scaling Square root Set the span egsure channel Scale Qelta Scalg Ref Cl vort DELTA SCALE SQRT 2 0000 E 0000 fone VOLT OFF SCALE SQRT 2V 1 Mi 2 0000 2 0000 CH003 VOLT OFF DELTA SORT 2V 2 0000 2 0000 2 choos MORE E 2V 2 0000 e Hoos RR DELTA SCALE SORT 2v 2 0000 2 0000 4 o S Set all Enter the scale unit Set the low aa act feel i Select the relay number elect the alarm type Enter the alarm value Select the ON OFF Low Cut 1 Alarm 2 l oe a E may Vae alamReay oelect Tyne Vali 0 0000 S01 0 0000 None OFF p i 0 0000 502 OFF oF M oi 0 01 s03 o 0 00 None iam Select the range type Initialize 0 01 504 orF 0 00 None orF 0 00 None orF 0 00 None orF Set the value to the maximum value possible Set the value to the minimum value possible Enter the alarm delay time Enter the sampling count Enter the tag name T Alarm 3 A Moving Average rm Dela a orF 0 0000 None 0 0000 None 10 sec P ON 2 Ezami OFF n000 10 sec P OW 0 00 None OFF v 0 00 None 10 sec ON we OFF v 0 00 None 10 sec O0FF OFF v 0 00 None 10 sec OFF E 8 3 PWI 2 a E Yee ae 3 3 Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to all other channels
142. ble value Set the minimum possible value For Ext channels 201 The items in the measurement channel tab and Ext channel tab can be configured for each channel The items that are configured are the same as those configured on the spreadsheet For details see the page corresponding to the item IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 4 Setting the Computation Channels Double click when setting each channel Turn ON OFF computation Select the number of digits to the right the decimal Select this tab Set the display span Enter the constant Enter the expression Enter the unit used in the expression Expression FTO Fi ON co01 002 K01 cHio2 Want leer cmos Wakil Weubuns OH oo3 K04 eA OFF 001 aa ON OFF all at once Set the TLOG computation i _ Set the rolling ee Rolling Average Timer type a Macs Type i Aana oae Timer OFF OFF OFF OFF 10s OFF OFF 10s OFF OFF 10s OFF OFF 10s a 3 eS SE lt 2 3 a 2 a Select the alarm type Enter the alarm value Select the relay number Select ON OFF Ta Lie ail oe We a Type ea orF J ne EA Fi ON oFF Ei Fionjorr amp ne OFF 0 0 None B 7 oN ior M 0 0 None B oN is _ Initialize O 2 gt Q mF co r gt D O x lt g x lt N OFF 0 00 None Ei rion jorr amp Erion jorr 0 00 None 0 000 None LAR tela 0 00
143. blue box is selected An item with a gray box is not selected 7 O x Ey Hardware Configurator NewFile File Comm Setting System View Help Dsl o 4 MeasCh Detta Scale Sqrt Range Type CHOO1 jee T Mode id Low Cut Ld Graph CHOO2 KAeN d Delta Scale Sqrt d Alarm E Partial cCH003 Kaen id Range Type ad Alarm Delay I Color CHO04 pel id Ref Ch Ld Moving Average Green Band d Span d Tag Alarm Mark 4 Scale Ld Memory Sampling I Calibration Correction d Unit 4 Zone Cancel Select All Clear All TOOL E 2 Copy Paste Copy Details C A e Click this button to open the item selection dialog box and select the items that you want to copy Paste to the copy destination Copy the copy source settings f f Copying and Pasting Settings 1 Select the copy source numbers the CH row in this figure and click the Copy button To specify multiple copy sources drag over the numbers to select them 2 Select the copy destination numbers the CH row in this figure and click the Paste button To specify multiple copy destinations drag over the numbers to select them The settings are copied and pasted 3 13 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Setting One Channel at a Time 3 14 1 Double click the channel you wish to set Set the maximum possi
144. bunal of competent jurisdiction such provision shall be null and void with respect to the jurisdiction of that court or tribunal and all the remaining provisions hereof shall remain in full force and effect IM 04L41B01 64EN How to Use This Manual Structure of the Manual This manual consists of the following seven chapters and index Chapter Title 1 Before using the DAQSTANDARD 2 Setup Data on DX1000 DX2000 Models with the AS1 Advanced Security Option 3 Configuring the DX1000 DX2000 4 Configuring the MV1000 MV2000 5 Configuring the CX1000 CX2000 6 Configuring the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 7 Troubleshooting Index Range of Explanation in this Manual Content Explains the PC system environment required for use of the DAQSTANDARD Also explains how to install it Explains how setup data is sent and received on DX1000 DX2000 models with the AS1 advanced security option Explains how to configure the DX1000 DX2000 measurement conditions and other settings Explains how to configure the MV1000 MV2000 measurement conditions and other settings Explains how to configure the CX1000 CX2000 measurement conditions and other settings Explains how to configure the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 measurement conditions and other settings Gives a list of error messages and corrective measures Gives a list of important terms used in this manual This manual does not explain the basic operations of your PC s oper
145. called Licensee shall agree to the following terms and conditions for the software license hereinafter called the Agreement based on the use intended for the Licensed Software Please note that Yokogawa grants the Licensee permission to use the Licensed Software under the terms and conditions herein and in no event shall Yokogawa intend to sell or transfer the Licensed Software to the Licensee Licensed Software Name DAQSTANDARD Model DXA120 Number of License 1 Article 1 Scope Covered by these Terms and Conditions 1 1 The terms and conditions stipulated herein shall be applied to any Licensee who purchases the Licensed Software on the condition that the Licensee consents to agree to the terms and conditions stipulated herein 1 2 The Licensed Software herein shall mean and include all applicable programs and documentation without limitation all proprietary technology algorithms and know how such as a factor invariant or process contained therein Article 2 Grant of License 2 1 Yokogawa grants the Licensee for the purpose of single use non exclusive and non transferable license of the Licensed Software with the license fee separately agreed upon by both parties 2 2 The Licensee is unless otherwise agreed in writing by Yokogawa not entitled to copy change sell distribute transfer or sublicense the Licensed Software 2 3 The Licensed Software shall not be copied in whole or in part except for keeping one
146. cation function you can have it switch to the program operation display ON Switches to the program operation display when a program execution command is sent OFF Does not switch to the program operation display default even if a program execution command is sent IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 43 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og a 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings To enter measurement function basic settings click the Setup tab Or you can select the items by choosing Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting Alarm Relay Remote 2 Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting 1 Select this tab Setup AlarmRelay Remote AlarmRelay Reflash OFF on i Scan IntervalMemory J Channel Relay AND Key Lock Login rea Relay Action De Energize G Energize Report Alarm Relay Behavior Unhold Hold i Temperature Alarm Indicator Unhold Hold J Aux J Time zone iNetwork Rate of Change Increase Select between 1 and 15 Rate of Change Decrease REMOTE 7 ites REMOTES kleiz s Control Action Alarm Hysteresis J Internal Loop Remote 3 Contact Input Rosine re Dea __ Copy Paste the External Loop REMOTE 1 ives E Paste py REMOTE2 ONE B selected range REMOTE 3 HON REMOTE 4 eN REMOTES DONE REMOTES E z F Select the controlled item Alarm Relay Select the alarm format The selected items are blue Reflash Set
147. cccccccseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeas 5 60 IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter 6 IM 04L41B01 64EN Contents Copying and Pasting Setup Data rs cccwcscsccecsececatdseanleseanencceainiabe necxieessscsccbadexnncs ones sdeued 5 61 o0 STFS eas ON ge te ahs seston E E AE 5 62 SONA uae bagi EAA E cud crs AAE SEES IENA AE AA E 5 62 PTS Se EG ate eset ae wc emis eects ete ee euieeeseaaceueaseenasatiectnseanebsceeieeanesasnmeseeesdeeeemeanaetee 5 63 Son IE EU ise cnc ecse sacs tetra c deec eared etemteenenaat soaetachecacee egemesas ieesateceavepeacentecdenam 5 64 View Group CX2000 ODIY passes eceerccedeccpsetatecenctetadeececeanseastaded eavacdseastaceceecseiaeeuseanec tes 5 65 User Key Daylight Saving resserre EE RE EAR ETRE ENER ARN 5 66 BAU Madera a E EEE PE E E E E EE EE P A E E E A E AEE E E EE 5 66 9 11 Network rele ge eee ee eee er a Ene ee eee ene eee ee eee eee ee 5 67 TCP IP NN Sate esetee oe cae eascaceaanoteteecsenensncenacseentoeuecemsconecaneueasntsncetenanteseeceaneanesseee 5 67 Serial Communication Settings cccesssceccssececeeeseececeeeeecceueeeecsesseeeseuseeessesseeesees 5 67 Modbus Master Settings c cccsccccssecececeesceecseseeeecsesseeeseusececceuaecesssegeeeesaeesensssages 5 68 an ge 111 E een an AA eet ne eee een re ete A E ena ere mre fre mee Meee ere 5 68 Web Server Settings cccccssccccccsseeccceesceecceseeeecseuseeecesececsecgececseageesssegeeeessegeeesssases 5 69 E
148. ccsoncmecdeeect2 aieiaseeteesaetestauencstiosdean Glewsdesdie onie Hemumaaseetleldatabeansieennidaneets 6 29 6 10 Printing the Setup a eck tate ech access ode then Seto cearobe cee deetnnceanerandeeaee deur stecesseanctudoesue 6 30 6 11 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX MV Checking the DX MV Hardware Tnifos O 9 eee eeines eter Neen nee eres er mee enc ern oer nese Seo ee ere ee er eee en ere entree 6 31 6 12 Characters that can be Used aicessccccseccscgescsseniesieisdecustenebnctacadstenideosdedaduenccienthserssaceendoncanend 6 32 Troubleshooting Tal POUDICGMOOUING escremar isian inii a snd Linen a anian Anrini 7 1 IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter1 Before using DAQSTANDARD 1 1 Overview of DAQSTANDARD DAQSTANDARD Software Package DAQSTANDARD consists of the following three software applications e Viewer e Hardware Configurator e DX P Hardware Configurator e Viewer Data Viewer displays the values and waveforms of the measured data from the recorder and prints them e Hardware Configurator Hardware Configurator is a software application for creating setup data for the recorder It can send setup files that you have created to the recorder and save them to storage media It can be used with the following recorders the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 DX100 DX200 CX1000 CX2000 MV1000 MV2000 MV100 and MV200 e DX P Hardware Configurator DX P Hardware Configurator is a software application for creating setup data for the DX100P DX200P re
149. channel lf difference computation is performed between channels that have different range and type settings the decimal position of the computed result is set to that of the channel computing the difference If the number of digits to the right of the decimal of the reference channel is greater than that of the channel computing the difference the reference value below the least significant digit of the channel computing difference is rounded beforehand Sets the upper and lower limits full scale of the display When the span L and span U values are set to the same value or when a value outside the range is entered they are corrected when the data are checked Scale L scale U and decimal point Scale s value is displayed by taking the range between scale L and scale U to be full scale Enter the upper and lower limit values to which you wish to convert the raw values Include the decimal point When the scale L and scale U values are set to the same value or when a value outside the range is entered they are corrected when the data are checked Unit Enter the unit using up to six characters Computes and displays the square root of the input This setting can be used only when the input mode is set to VOLT voltage As necessary set the span scale and unit OOZAW 00LAIW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 24 Bunn uoo 2 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channels Alarm Four alarms Alarm 1 to 4 can be specified on each channel Type Sel
150. corder It can send setup files that you have created to the recorder and save them to storage media About Hardware Configurator Creating Setup Data You can use one of the following three methods to create setup data e Specify a new device and options e Edit setup data that is stored on an external storage medium or the PC e Edit setup data received from the recorder Configuring the Recorder You can use one of the following two methods to configure the recorder e Load the settings to the recorder from a CF card or other external storage medium e Send the setup data to the recorder Printing Setup Data You can print setup data Recorder Information Acquisition You can acquire the recorder s device information through communication IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 1 GYVGNVLSOVG buisn alojag E 1 2 Hardware PC System Requirements Personal Computer A computer which runs on Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows Vista or Windows 7 CPU and Main Memory e When Using Windows 2000 or Windows XP Pentium III 600 MHz or faster Intel x64 or x86 processor 128 MB or more of memory e When Using Windows Vista Pentium 4 3 GHz or faster Intel x64 or x86 processor 2 GB or more of memory e When Using Windows 7 32 bit edition Intel Pentium 4 3 GHz or faster x64 or x86 processor 2 GB or more of memory 64 bit edition Intel x64 processor that is equivalent to Intel Pentium 4 3 GHz or faster 2 GB or more of memory Hard Disk Free space of 100
151. cscociecevesterseecoceeseveexs 3 57 3 58 4 41 4 42 server secondary ccccssceceseeeeeesecsees 3 57 3 58 4 41 4 42 SetVice 0 8 Senne ee ee ee a i ee een eS 3 40 4 31 SS OM ers ccesasaisacaciesicacouesaatosenaces AEE e 5 38 seting UNCION lt c 5 422ascseeasnanessdectestsansennsenaasedeqateabaadentnaudadieated 2 2 setting one channel at a time ccccceeeees 3 14 4 13 6 8 setting one computation channel at a time 5 60 6 11 setting the system Configuration ccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 5 5 SUD PAE EEEE ETTE 5 49 6 19 setup data adjustment ais aces cisnstacsdanccvonwensseamadecatasetiamsebadaans 5 71 setup data other than the address setup data 0 3 76 Index SEUD MOUG eee ee eee at eee ne ee ene ee ee eee eS ene 6 16 SING EEE E O ET E E EEE E A A T Delis 3 45 SIGN POM SCONCEN vis sancnnteutaniacincndsedunntninniaciondedeabunsisiunoncuasionss 3 45 SMTP server MAING wc accscexicvowsnadess banadnstansssncues eiaaietinavececnae sa 4 47 SMTP server NAME cece eee cec cece cece ceeseeceueseeeseueeueeeueeeeeeueeenes 3 63 SNTP SOI V CP eiccinctcterctenntadbctinre unienactinntaiaitle sunietaiedsiciseacaions 3 40 4 31 ON e Cae ee HET ane ON E SI eet tre TNE EEE Samo SOAS eT Ee er ne arnt ene Soe 5 38 SPa eee ene eye ae ee ee 3 16 4 15 span IMO cnduecenacteaceseatoracncenawiasensnscnnagneancantesescnanrssnsaneene 3 7 4 7 specified vals sahacie lt copsntecd ice sdonci
152. ct the match timer number Select the event level switch number Select the event level switch number Select the event edge switch number 1 Available in release numbers 3 and later 2 Available in release numbers 4 and later IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN Action 3 5 Entering General Settings The action to be executed when an event occurs Settings Memory Start Stop Memory Start Memory Stop Trigger AlarmACK Math Start Stop MathStart MathStop Math Reset Save Display Data Save Event Data Message Snapshot Display Update Interval Change Manual Sample Timer Reset Display Group Change Flag Time ADJUST Panel Load Alarm Display Reset Comment Display Favorite Display Description Can be specified when the DX is configured to record event data Cannot be specified when the event is set to Relay Switch or Alarm Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified when the DX is configured to record display data Can be specified when the DX is configured to record event data Set the message number and the destination Set the message destination to all groups All or a group number Can be specified when the function for switching between the trend update interval and the secondary update interval is enabled Cannot be specified when t
153. ctansicaciecetaaniactadentcabiaeatchasbexcs 1 8 Square WOOK oor sodas seccccdeieendoecsecosiaca eeieeden 3 8 4 7 5 54 6 5 start 6 0 2 eRe eee oe ee ee eee eee ee ee ee eae renee 5 36 AV T i Le PE E E E T E E E E E A TA 1 3 starting and stopping measurement cccceeceeeeeeeeeeeeee ees 5 75 starting the DX Configurator saiccosssssseeadhnnssesleetsnebanseerentnclestemenns 6 2 Start target setpoint scisso saceczcteexeccdedessaessecdeeeecedicseaeest 5 35 E EE E T E E AEE TE TE 3 40 4 31 structure of the file NAME eee eece eee eeeeeeeeneeneees 3 34 4 27 style NUMDET oirrese enna beset OA alsin REESE EE REO iv SUDJECT isoeiinesiianiereninis 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 4 48 4 49 subnet MASK ccc ccecceceeceececeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeevaneeees 3 57 4 41 sum scale stg cta ter chetceeneaccntadicetecnteasedeantecscciantataname adaed 5 59 6 10 system cConfiguration c ccccccceeeeeees 1 8 3 3 4 3 5 1 6 28 system setting e mail 0 0 0 cccceeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeaeeseeeees 3 66 4 49 T la MA 3 11 3 41 4 10 4 31 5 32 5 55 5 59 6 6 6 22 C e ff o Seco ene meer anette ret on ener Oe E a ete AE c Reem ine beter 3 11 3 41 Te SGU it sesana anaana EEA 5 38 tarting the hardware COnfiguratOl ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 5 1 TOPP aaa iea aE E a 6 23 temperature unit ws saviccarctatanvradverersieeniaabadedoinenceannieesans 3 39 6 22 terms and Conditions of the Software License
154. ction J Internal Loop Contact Input Control Relay J External Loop DOOOS PE a DOOO4 fe E a E DODOS De energize Hold Beil De energizeHold Module Setting Select the terminal blocks where you want to register contact outputs from CTRL1 2 CTRL3 4 CTRL5 6 or EXTDIO CTRL3 4 CTRL5 6 and EXTDIO are available only with the CX2000 and when the number of loops is 6 or more with 6 4 loop select selection is not possible when set to 4 loops EXTDIO is available with the CX2000 and when External Loop is selected for alarm relay FAIL CTRL1 2 Only Activates the output of a relay contact signal FAIL signal if a fault occurs in the CX CPU When it is ON default OFF contact output number DO001 of control output terminal block 1 in the Relay Action Behavior setting is automatically assigned to De_energize Nonhold Self Diagnosis CTRL1 2 Only Activates the output of a relay contact signal in the event of input burnout an A D converter fault or reference junction compensation failure When it is ON default OFF contact output number DO002 of control output terminal block 1 in the Relay Action Behavior setting is automatically assigned to De_energize Nonhold Relay Action Behavior Set the contact output relay operating mode to De_energize Hold De_energize Nonhold Energize Hold or Energize Nonhold IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 13 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Bun uos o 5 3 Control Fu
155. d Password Up to 6 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the password is displayed after the item is entered Setup Select whether to allow setting changes in the setup mode for the user Note e lf there is a duplicate User Name turned ON the user with the larger user number is turned OFF e If Setup of all users that are turned ON is set to Disable the Setup of the user with the smallest number is set to Enable Timer Option IM 04L41B01 64EN Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting Select one Time out every time the specified time elapses Select the timeout interval Time out with the specified time as the reference J AlarmRelay Remote J Scan IntervaltMemory J Channel Ref time Key Lock Login Interval Timer Interval i Ropt i Save Data J Temperature J Aux Timer 2 J Time zone ofr J Network J Control Action Internal Loop Relative Interval Contact Input E Reset J Control Relay Absolute Interval I Save Data Timer 3 oFF Absolute lateral J External Loop Q Relative Interval i ol Save Data Save the data to the TLOG file when a timeout occurs Reset computation when a timeout occurs You can set three types of timers to be used in the statistical computation You can save the data to a TLOG file or reset the computation when the specified timeout interval elapses Thi
156. d Unit 4 Zone OK Cancel Select All Clear All ry a a a a ry el Copy Paste Copy Details ma O J r Click to display the screen for selecting setting items to copy then select the desired items Paste the selected settings to the specified range Copy the selected settings of the specified range 1 Select the copy source channels Click the Copy button 2 Select the paste destination channels Click the Paste button 4 12 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Setting One Channel at a Time 1 Double click the channel you wish to set 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bulinbiyuog ka Set the maximum possible value Set the minimum possible value For Ext channels 201 The items in the measurement channel tab and Ext channel tab can be configured for each channel The items that are configured are the same as those configured on the spreadsheet For details see the page corresponding to the item IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 13 4 4 Setting the Computation Channels 4 14 Double click when setting each channel Turn ON OFF computation Select the number of digits to the right the decimal Select this tab Set the display span Enter the expression Enter the unit Pich Generalseti oN A E cHio2 WA EAA cmos LALL ENIA 0 Expression 0 0 2000 0 0 00 200 00 0 000 CH104 0H 003 KO4 Yeay OF
157. d party conducted renovation or improvement of the Licensed Software 4 5 THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OF QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE WRITTEN ORAL OR IMPLIED AND ALL OTHER WARRANTIES INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED BY YOKOGAWA AND ALL THIRD PARTIES LICENSING THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE TO YOKOGAWA 4 6 Correction of nonconformity in the manner and for the period of time provided above shall be the Licensee s sole and exclusive remedy for any failure of Yokogawa to comply with its obligations and shall constitute fulfillment of all liabilities of Yokogawa and any third party licensing the Third Party Software to Yokogawa including any liability for direct indirect special incidental or consequential damages whether in warranty contract tort including negligence but excluding willful conduct or gross negligence by Yokogawa or otherwise with respect to or arising out of the use of the Licensed Software Article 5 Infringement 5 1 If and when any third party should demand injunction initiate a law suit or demand compensation for damages against the Licensee under patent right including utility model right design patent and trade mark copy right and any other rights relating to any of the Licensed Software the Licensee shall notify Yokogawa in writing to that effect without delay 5 2 In the case of the preceding Paragraph 5
158. d timeout value to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s 10s or 1min e Retrials Set the number of retrials when there is no response from the slave Select OFF 1 2 3 4 5 10 or 20 e Inter block delay Set the inter block delay to OFF 5ms 10ms 15ms 45ms or 100ms e Auto recovery Set the auto recovery time from communication halt Select OFF 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min or 1h Command setting e Master command No Select from 1 to 16 for the command numbers to be configured e Command Set the transmitted command type Settings Description Read Read to the external input channel 16 bit signed integer type from the slave R Math Read to the communication input channel 32 bit floating point type from the slave Write Write the measurement channel 16 bit signed integer type to the slave W Math Write the measurement channel 32 bit signed integer type to the slave Exchange M Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server write the custom display value to the server release numbers 4 and later Read can be selected on DX2000s with the external input channel MC1 option installed R Math W Mat and Exchange M can be selected on models with the computation function M1 option installed 3 73 IM 04L41B01 64EN 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings 3 74 Start channel End channel master channel numbers Enter the first and last chann
159. dakonaetees use sebsosceedatadanesaecansinnoreseeeteasenececne us 2 3 To Load Setup Data from the DX1000 DX2000 ce eeeccceeececeeseeteeeeesseeeeseeeesaaeees 2 3 Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System ccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeesaeeeeeeaas 2 4 Loading Existing Setup Rea ict votes ve ticciesisee hotieatneneesewlacosasinhcesascticsaitnladwosiweqevsssate 2 5 Configuring the DX1000 DX2000 3 1 Staring the Harware Configurator ssesvesdenceductsnatesnesqeceesvnet neuelncxsedencchtabtexanetianeeendaaaetaclgadeasnees 3 1 To Load Setup Data from the DX1000 DX2000 ccccccccccceeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeeesaeeeesaneees 3 1 Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System cccccecseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 3 2 Loading Existing Setup Date sec sccscnccpsscscctssectcadacasdetaastescencuobianershdescaseancsouenadivetucensunisded 3 2 3 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Settup Data 3 3 Changing Checking the System Configuration cccccsssececceseeeeeceeeeesceeeeeessesseeeseas 3 3 initalizng the Setup Dalasi nen n ee ene eae nee nee ee eee R ESTERE 3 4 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels cccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseneeeeas 3 5 Input Type Mode and Range Ty O sicxicecetncicasesteecexetenscxesat aceestsoaddanecdevadaddesastectedencesdhence 3 7 Linear scaling OCALE J ene nee re eee me eee a eee eee oe 3 7 Dif
160. de eater E A 2 2 user s manual o oo cece ccc cece cece es eee cee eeuesueeeeeaeeeueeeeeeseueeaesanenes 1 4 userID eree E Geen ee cu omeareatceneeeeases 5 49 6 19 LS Sy E E E E E A T 5 66 6 15 user WAI ata cacccnraceccaancazsaacrantactaueatettedaenintaticuanstetenedse 5 49 6 19 user registration sj catersneccsdeaecaacnatevectiniem tenet ances 3 55 4 39 Vo value ON erfoOf 20 cc cececceececeececeeceeceeceeeeseeeeeeueeeeueeeenesanees 3 44 4 33 1S ES 6 ee ene OP een RE Oey iv 1 11 Version information cc cee ccecc cece eee eeeeeeseeeseeeeaeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 1 11 NUS ETE AE T E E 1 1 Vew QUOUDS irringarri iiir 3 25 4 22 5 65 6 15 Index 4 view POM crest cesesscnsioneciasieciseui ates oes lactoeueasaetivaciate 3 25 4 22 We wait action ciccsedaciaccctexktotaccnebaieusciexticacdandoienscieriamenceeens 5 36 5 39 Wait Meee A E E E EE 5 36 wait zone NUMDEL ccececececeecececececececcacaecececececucavavaeaenes 5 39 Web OI cscs cr ce acepaaansacenanectaaiaacmasnctmaantedaceciaiaianausnieietieatageass 3 38 web SOI CP soc satirccatcacacton ca ccncneuradiceshasaccenauesetadedaaweet 3 69 4 51 Z ZOMG EE E T A E AS 3 11 4 10 5 32 5 55 5 59 6 6 IM 04L41B01 64EN
161. demand injunction against the Licensee in case that Yokogawa deems that the Licensed Software is used improperly or under severer environments other than those where Yokogawa has first approved or any other condition which Yokogawa may not permit Article 10 Termination Yokogawa at its sole discretion may terminate this Agreement without any notice or reminder to the Licensee if the Licensee violates or fails to perform this Agreement However Articles 5 6 and 11 shall survive even after the termination Article 11 Jurisdiction Any dispute controversies or differences between the parties hereto as to interpretation or execution of this Agreement shall be resolved amicably through negotiation between the parties upon the basis of mutual trust Should the parties fail to agree within ninety 90 days after notice from one of the parties to the other both parties hereby irrevocably submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Tokyo District Court main office in Japan for settlement of the dispute Article 12 Governing Law This Agreement shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of Japan The Licensee expressly agrees to waive absolutely and irrevocably and to the fullest extent permissible under applicable law any rights against the laws of Japan which it may have pursuant to the Licensee s local law Article 13 Severability In the event that any provision hereof is declared or found to be illegal by any court or tri
162. die eves abe anes Mosee seach 4 59 4 11 Characters That Can Be USE ccceccccccccceeeeeceeeeeceseeeceaeceseueeeceaeeessaseessaeeesseeeseeeesas 4 60 PSPS OE MOEN Lye Sareea cece cass cess eae eee eee eee eee 4 60 Table of Character Codes icccccccancsazicecseccceetaaeedancasssebediantscunecetands seatenesindesecsierdiseewnedis 4 60 Configuring the CX1000 CX2000 5 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator the Hardware Configurator Window and System C nnguration kero st 9 0 oueeeemnesee er meen ee neers sone neo ee enn cent are sr wee on a Renee et oe ene 5 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator cccccsseeccceeeececcceeececcceeeeeeceeeeeeseusesessuensesssaees 5 1 Loading Setup Data from the CX wsicsieintecsncerontsebecrcuclsciespsaieoterssadiebsaseneseaktenteeceeiteiertece 5 2 Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System cccecssseeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeeeaas 5 3 L ading EXist ng Setup Dala esrara birir cane eee eee 5 4 5 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data 0 5 5 Entering and Checking System SettingS cccccsccccssseeeccsesececsceseeeeceeeseeeseusseesseaaeees 5 5 initializing the Setup DATA asks ccies teres cess inira EE enpi aAa EAER N RRON E AEA Sasecquienaceecdenacebsaaees 5 6 5 9 Control Functi n Basie SeMnNgS ee en ene ee nnn a EE AERE 5 7 ON CUO eai antes accesaciceanne suse soceeaseiese ne Gescecasdeasteceaesce seceeseosesenc
163. display from the following Settings White Black default setting Cream and Lightgray Scroll Time Set the switching interval from the available settings between 5 s and 1 min The groups switch in ascending order Jump Default Display Returns to a preset display if there is no key operation for a specific time Settings Description 1min to 1h Time until switching the display OFF Disables the function HISTORY Key Operation e Operation Settings Description History Switches to the historical trend display when the key is pressed Favorite Switches to the favorite display that you registered when the key is pressed e Group Display Settings Description Current Displays a favorite display in the current group Saved Displays a favorite display in the group that was selected when you registered the favorite display e Time Axis Zoom Settings Description Current Displays a favorite display at the current time axis zoom rate Saved Displays a favorite display at the time axis zoom rate that was selected when you registered the favorite display 4 21 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bulunbiyuog 4 5 Entering General Settings View Group 4 22 Set the screens that will be displayed in the 4 panel display This function is for the MV2000 only With revision R7 21 or later you can open a settings dialog box for any view group by double clicking its number View group number View 3 Group Name View Group View Kind View K
164. e When Trend Rate Switching is turned ON Data Kind cannot be set to E D under Environment Basic Environment in the Basic Setting tab Write Group Settings Description Common Write the message to all groups Separate Write the message to the displayed group Power Fail Message ON Amessage is written when the MV recovers from a power failure while memory sampling is in progress Change Message ON Writes the time the interval is switched and the new trend interval as a message when the trend interval is switched Scale over Settings Description Free The value is set to over range if the value is less than 30000 and over range if the value is greater than 30000 excluding the decimal point The value is displayed as Over and Over respectively Over The value is set to over range if the value is less than 5 of the scale and over range if the value is greater than 105 The value is displayed as Over and Over respectively Example If the scale is 0 0 to 200 0 the value is set to over range if the value is less than 10 0 of the scale and over range if the value is greater than 210 0 Nolo For computations such as TLOG CLOG and report the handling of the scale over range value can be set in advance Alarm No Logging Turn ON when using the Alarm No Logging function The Detect setting is enabled in the Measure channel Math channel Ext channel tab s Key Security S
165. e Interval Select the sampling interval when rolling average is activated Times Number of samples Select the number of samples number of data points used to compute the rolling average Display Zone Graph Partial Expansion and Color Constant 6 10 The settings are the same as the measurement channels For details see section 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channel You can set constants to be used in the expression Up to 12 and 30 constants can be specified on the DX100 MV100 and DX200 DX200C MV 200 respectively IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 3 Setting the Computation Channels Setting One Computation Channel at a Time 3 Select the tab of the item to be configured Click here to enter the operator 1 Double click the channel you wish to set 2 The channel setting dialog box opens Oi SUM oi SUM a Time jor OFF Valid Span Ex 4 After setting the items click here Set the maximum value Set the minimum value Copy the first setting lt Select Operator dialog box gt Select the operator type and click the operator button Select Operator Basic Logical Relation Channel Addtion ABS Absolute value Operator button The items in the math channel tab can be configured for each channel The items that are configured are the same as those configured on the spreadsheet For details see the page corresponding to the item Copying and Pasting Setup Data See secti
166. e 5 7 ghicldats EOOD teeeeart ence tere E ase eee eee een E ene cane eee E ane eee 5 8 DI DO SW Regist Contact Input ccs nace zc occcerecceseceevexsce ve iosntectechesuasanecbiewcatsecelaeeiadenent 5 11 Control Input Channel When PV SP Computation Is ON and with CX Style Number S3 Or 2 9 eRe ene nn eee eee ene eee eee eee ae eee eee ree ee ee cee eee eee 5 12 OU OU TV Ae cece ats cers E ces eee cane eenceteeeeen eset 5 13 FS VN WOO acces sees E E 5 14 54 Control Function General Settings sesers spit cescecshseadsavstiesdisneceandiesdiscadaneentaveciesdteesadines 5 18 OU INU ate Sate ete cece ces ose a seen E a 5 18 A alog FRG UE ANSI SIOUN ee soststeaiisn extern aeet anti snssnnanendcen dance danas dedtantinaneinatieasin teaumadeceatacdans 5 21 Contents Operation Related coca cee eee acc eee dace Sete ses erseeenses eee cnenc sees ae sen aaenaskce ace sesectinenees 5 24 Linearize When PV SP Computation IS OFF c ccccccssesececeeeeeeseeseeeeceseeesseseees 5 25 C ntol FUG UO hse UNG S os oat ccs ctcassae roe a EEE EEA E AEEA 5 26 So g ge SK 0 0 oc ae ce ee ee ec ene eee ee eee eer ene nee eee ec 5 26 PV Event Hysteresis Style 2 or Carlier ccccssscecccseseececeeeseecceeeeesseuseeeseeseeeessaaes 5 27 DIO Operation Monitoring Function CX Style Number S3 or Later ceceeeeeeees 5 28 DIO Labels CX Style Number S3 or Later ccccccceceeccseeeeccessecesseeeeeeseeeseessseees 5 29 Logic
167. e Alarm Scheduled System or Report tab you can make settings separately for each type of e mail message IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 69 5 11 Network Settings Auxiliary Settings 5 70 You can set the control output DO when the communication buffer recovers internal switch status processing and auto recovery of communication with Modbus master temperature controllers valid for serial communications These settings are available when serial communication is installed Click this tab Scan Intervalwemary Measure channel Recovery Status for Comm Butter Key Lock Login Dewey G clear Continue a Timer 2 Report Temperature Modbus Master Exp loop os Auto recovery al OFF Bon Time zone Cycle dmi Metwork d Control Action Internal Loop DOWNS Regist d Control Relay External Loop Memory Data Gut G Ethernet Serial Recovery Status for Comm Buffer You can set the recovery operation for the control output DO internal switch communication buffer to be performed when the power is turned ON or when recovering to Operation Mode from Basic Setting Mode The communication buffer is an internal region for turning the DO internal switches ON and OFF via communications Continue Holds the status of the control output DO and internal switches Clear Clears the status of the control output DO and internal switches Modbus Master Exp loop You can select whether or not to automatically r
168. e and unit Display Span Sets the upper and lower limits full scale of the display When the span L and span U are set to the same value or when a value outside the range is entered they are corrected when the data is checked Scale Scale L scale U and Decimal Point The scale value is displayed by taking the range between scale L and scale U to be the full scale Enter the upper and lower limits to which you want to convert the raw values Include the decimal point When the scale L and scale U values are set to the same value or when a value outside the range is entered they are corrected when the data is checked Unit Enter the unit using up to 6 alphanumeric characters 5 54 IM 04L41B01 64EN Alarm Alarm Delay Moving Average Tag Zone IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings Four alarms Alarm 1 to 4 can be specified on each channel Type Select H L h dH dL R RH r RL T or t The selectable alarms vary depending on the input mode and computation type For details see section 7 2 of the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Value Alarm is generated using the specified value as the boundary The selectable range of alarm values varies depending on the input mode and range Relay Select the output relay number or internal switch number for outputting to relay output or internal switches Style 3 or later When not outputting to relays or internal switches
169. e 3 19 OUD a cape tes E see asic vo oie ee Ste pe ee es eee ee 3 20 DI DEY sa eeteegecat sca eenenerecsesnrcanse bes cnncesesnatenes srt EEEE AEEA EEEE E E E ERES 3 22 by ea 0 9 essas E EA E E ee eer ee ee eee 3 25 TS SS Seats ctar tc E E EA OEA E AEE OEE 3 26 Comment Release number 3 or later ccccccsceeccsseeeccessececceeseeecseeseeeesegeeeesseneeees 3 27 Annunciator Release number 3 or later cccceeeeceesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeesaaees 3 28 WSS silicosis e A mas eameavs pau sagecees cata enyste andes odontag E 3 29 Manual Sample 6 aestenn deaccncorccasaadersecnassezessounnsoneteacectnuedecdecssacencteawaveessciexscnesebestucseeesioseensd 3 31 FS Pe NOM patie atte san tec ees inca vs datas weed acento bald ees einen i 3 32 FIO reae E E EEE EEE EEEE 3 34 SAB E th E A AE E ES EEE E EA E NE 3 36 Custom ICI oe sxe otes canteesncseddenamnces cs andes seamsoscanusiauanshestiecaeasanesleneedenaidacciecusnacastcenanmenneecnice 3 37 Web Report Release number 3 or later ccccceccccessececcceeseeeceeeeeeeceeeeesseeseeessuees 3 38 3 6 Entering Basic SCUINOS sic ncscasnertesacts nccecacdcecesmecenasdessdcespicadesdadanees mascheoddasogncesmesedavinasteidacsees 3 39 Fe MONS Macc seen arcsec restate paaten EEEE a eoa E raais 3 39 PVM IM E EE EPEA AE TEE PEA EA E A E S A 3 47 SSI IMENA sesira aa E ira EN E ESE ai 3 50 Meas re FUNCION 4 caseratetecencacacoorstciaessuataernecensciacaumnenececuaetaunrsnvebsat
170. e 4 mae 9 Enter a number Ce Message 5 Ce Message 6 Ce Message T Ce Message 6 m Snapshot from 0 to 9999 Lot Mo Auto Increment OFF Ca ON Data Display Information QJ TIME Si BATCH IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 11 Network Settings To enter network settings click the Setup tab then select Network from the list on the left It is also possible to select the item in SETUP Basic Setting on the Setting menu TCP IP Settings Connect the CX to the Ethernet and in the dialog box below enter TCP IP settings Type the same address for IP Address as the one of the Address box of the Network Settings dialog box 1 Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Comm 2 Click this tab 1 SlarmRelay Remote TCPAP 1 Scan IntervalMemary Measure channel IP Address L Key LockLogin IP Address Timer Subnet task Specify the Report Default Gateway IP address Temperature AUX DNS Setting Time zone DNS i Metwork E ee Ses Primary Server IP Address A Specify these Internal Loop Secondary Server IP Address addresses when using the DNS P DUDCISVY Regist Uae Nears o Control Relay coman Mame i External Loop Domain Suffix 1 Domain Suttix 2 Keep Alive OFF i ON Timeout G OFF on hilh Memory Data Out G Ethernet i Serial Enter the timeout value when turned ON Serial Communication Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN Whe
171. e Measure channel Math channel Ext channel tab s This function disables the alarm indicator and the logging of alarm events to the alarm summary It also disables the display of alarms by the alarm annunciator release number 3 or later e Annunciator mode and Sequence Release number 3 or later To use the annunciator function select ON and set the sequence Settings Description ISA A 4 A no lock in sequence ISA A A lock in sequence ISA M A double lock in sequence Time off color Release number 3 or later The annunciator window display color when no alarms are activated You can select White or Green Alarm display Release number 3 or later Level When multiple alarms occur the DX gives higher priority to the display of alarms with higher levels Settings Description 1 gt 2 gt 3 gt 4 The order of alarm level preference from highest to lowest preference is 1 2 3 4 1 gt 4 gt 2 gt 3 The order of alarm level preference from highest to lowest preference is 1 4 2 3 1 gt 4 gt 3 gt 2 The order of alarm level preference from highest to lowest preference is 1 4 3 2 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 Alarm 3 and Alarm 4 You can set the alarm color for each alarm level It is easy to understand what processes are taking place when alarms occur if you associate an alarm s color with its level This setting applies to all channels 3 49 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Scan Interval
172. e Media Glock GFree J Time zone Disp Enter Key Block Q Free J Network J Control Action J Internal Loop J Contact Input J Control Relay External Loop vein iene tsa rss sae Auto Logout OWN usert Unspecified Enable 1 User ID OFF user2 Unspecified Enable 1 OFF user3 272 Unspecified Enable 1 user4 t Unspecified Enable 1 OFF users 277 Unspecified Enable 4 Turn ON to use the user setting Select to use login auto logout or user ID Key Lock Setting Key Lock When using the key lock function select whether or not to activate the key lock function lock or free For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 07E or IM 04L31A01 03E Password Enter the password used to release the key lock using up to six characters is displayed after the password is entered Login Setting Use Login To use the login auto logout or user ID select the appropriate items Auto Logout Selected If idle for ten minutes logs out automatically Clear Requires the logout procedure to log out 5 48 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings User ID Specify whether to use a user ID when logging in User ID entry is enabled when the check box is selected User Setting List User name Use up to 16 alphanumeric characters for the user name User ID Up to 4 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the User ID is displayed after the item is entere
173. e Server Name Enter the name of the file transfer destination FTP server using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Port No Enter the port number of the file transfer destination FTP server in the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 21 e Login Name Enter the login name for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e Password Enter the password for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters An entered password is displayed as e Account Enter the account ID for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e PASV Select ON when using the DX behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is OFF e Initial Path Enter the directory of the file transfer destination using up to 64 alphanumeric characters The delimiter for directories varies depending on the implementation of the destination FTP server Example When transferring files to the data directory in the home directory of an FTP server on a UNIX file system nome data If the file transfer to both primary and secondary destinations fails the DX aborts the file transfer When the connection recovers the DX transfers the data that could not to be transferred in addition to the new data file However since the data that is transfer
174. e computation function The table below shows the number of timers supported by the DX1000 and DX2000 Model Number of Timers Models without the multi batch function BT2 4 option Models with the multi batch function BT2 option 12 release number 3 or later When Using an Absolute Timer e Mode Select Absolute e Time interval Select the interval from the available settings between 1min to 24h e Ref time Set the time in the range of hour 0 to hour 23 When Using a Relative Timer e Mode Select Relative e Time interval Set in the range from 00 01 1 min to 24 00 24 hours Hour Setin the range from 0 to 24 Min Set in the range from 0 to 59 e Reset at Math Start ON Resets the timer when computation is started The resetting of the timer is not considered to be a timeout Even if the timer is used as an event the action is not executed 3 29 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu05 e 3 5 Entering General Settings 3 30 Match Time Timer Set the time match condition used in event action You can set the time condition that is used by the event action function The table below shows the number of match time timers supported by the DX1000 and DX2000 Model Number of Match Time Timers Models without the multi batch function BT2 4 option Models with the multi batch function BT2 option 12 release number 3 or later e Kind Day Set the time match condition of a day Week Set the time match condition of a week
175. e computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the rolling average is computed The upper and lower limit is t100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal place is the same as that of the span lower limit Memory Smpling Zone Graph Partial Color Green Band and Alarm Mark The settings are the same as the measurement channels For details see section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channel Ext Channel Constant You can set constants to be used in the expression Up to 60 constants can be specified Copying and Pasting Setup Data See section 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channel Ext Channel 4 16 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 4 Setting the Computation Channels Setting One Computation Channel at a Time 1 Double click the channel you wish to set veon E MON OH co01 0027 K01 ON 201 002 K02 su103 OH oo1 Kos 2 The channel setting dialog box opens Clicking here and selecting the list of operators switches the display Select channels on the Measure channel Math channel and Ext channel tabbed pages and select desired operators to create an expression ABS Absolute value SOR Square root LOG Common logarithm EXP Exponent LNE Natural logarithm The items in the math channel tab can be configured for each channel The items that are configured are the same as those configured on the spreadsheet For details see the page c
176. e detector Yes DI voltage level contact input Yes 1 5 V No The values in the Range Type list box vary depending on the above settings The following input types have been added in release number 3 DELTA No Yes Yes Yes Yes No SCALE No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes SQRT No Yes No No No No Mode Input Type TC si Type XK XK GOST N3 option RTD Pt100G Pt100GOST N3 option Cu100G Cu100GOST N3 option Cu50G Cu50GOST N3 option Cu10G Cu10GOST N3 option Pt46G Pt46GOST N3 option The following input types have been added in release number 4 Mode _ Input Type Pt200W Pt200 WEED N3 option e Span L Span U Input range The selectable range is displayed on the screen The selectable range for Type N has been expanded from 270 0 to 1300 0 C in release number 3 Note e You cannot set the same value to Span L and Span U e When the Mode is 1 5V or Sart Span L must be less than Span U Linear Scaling SCALE Converts the unit to obtain the measured value e Scale L Scale U Input range after converting the unit The selectable range is from 30000 to 30000 e Point Set the number of digits to the right the decimal to four digits or less 0 to 4 Note e The DX converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point from the value span specified by Scale L and Scale U For example if the scale setting is 5 to 5 the value is c
177. e display position Set a value within the span or scale range L Lower limit of the area U Upper limit of the area Displays marks indicating the values of the high and low limit alarms delay high and low limit alarms and difference high and low limit alarms This setting is common with the bar graph display Mark kind Settings Description Alarm Indicates green under normal conditions and red when an alarm is activated Fixed Displays a fixed color IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Scale display To display alarm point marks select ON Mark color If the Mark kind is set to Fixed specify the color of the alarm point marks Click a setup box to open its display color selection dialog box If you select AUTO alarm point marks are displayed using the specified alarm display colors by accessing Basic setting gt Alarm gt Alarm display release number 3 or later Copying and Pasting Setup Data IM 04L41B01 64EN You can copy and paste settings using the Copy Paste and Copy Details buttons Selecting the Items That You Want to Copy 1 Click the Copy Detail button The item selection dialog box opens 2 Select the items that you want to copy Items with a blue box will be copied Click the X button to close the item selection dialog box The item selection dialog box that opens when you click the Copy Detail button Setting items appear An item with a
178. e for the upper and lower limits The conditions for setting the zones are as follows e Range 0 to 100 The lower limit must be less than the upper limit e The difference between the lower and upper limits is at least 5 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channels Graph Divisions Select the number of bar graph divisions Bar graph Select the reference position of the bar graph Selecting Center when the bar graph is vertical produces no effect It is set back to Normal when the data are checked Scale When using scale display on the trend screen select the position to display the scale For details related to divisions bar graph and scale see section 7 10 in the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 User s Manual Partial Expanded Display Position Set the boundary for the partial expanded display The range is from 1 to 99 Boundary The conditions used to set the boundary vary depending on the measurement and computation channels as follows e Measurement channel When SCALE and SQRT are not used Span L lt boundary lt span U When SCALE and SQRT are used Scale L lt boundary lt scale U e Computation channel Span L lt boundary lt span U Note The partial expansion settings take effect when the partial expansion function is set to Use in the Aux section of the Setup tab Display Color You can select the display color of each channel from 16 colors Copying and Pasting Setup Dat
179. e of the measured results select ON Interval Select the sampling interval when taking the rolling average from the following The sampling interval takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval For example if the sampling interval is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s the actual sampling interval is 6 s Count Number of samples Set the number of samples for the rolling average using an integer between 1 and 1500 The rolling average time is equal to the sampling interval x the number of samples Note DX1000 DX2000 Specifications e If the number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of samples immediately after computation is started the average of the available data is calculated e Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation e Ifthe computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit the data is clipped at the upper or lower limit and the rolling average is computed The upper and lower limit is 100000000 excluding the decimal point The decimal place is the same as that of the span lower limit Memory Smpling Zone Graph Partial Color Green Band and Alarm Mark Constant The settings are the same as the measurement channels For details see section 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channel Ext Channel You can set constants to be used in the expression Up to 60 constants can be specified Copying and Pasting Setup Data See s
180. e selectable range is minimum scale value 1 digit to maximum scale value 1 digit Example Input range 6 V to 6V Bound position 30 Boundary 0 The 6 V to O V range is displayed in the 0 to 30 range and the 0 V to 6 V range is displayed in the 30 to 100 range The conditions used to set the boundary vary depending on the measurement and computation channels as follows e Measurement channel When SCALE and SQRT are not used Span L lt boundary lt span U When SCALE and SQRT are used Scale L lt boundary lt scale U e Computation channel Span L lt boundary lt span U Note sss For the MV1000 MV2000 this is when Partial is turned ON under Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Color Display Color Green Band IM 04L41B01 64EN You can select the display color of each channel from 24 colors Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the scale This setting is common with the bar graph display Region Band area Settings Description Inside Displays the area inside using the color band Outside Displays the area outside using the color band OFF Disables the function Color Set the display color Land U Specify the display position Set a value within the span or scale range L Lower limit of the area U Upper limit of the area 4 11 OOOZAW OOOLAIW 24 Bulunbiyuog E 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Alarm Mark
181. ecipient box is used as the sender s address instead e Alarm Transmits an e mail messages when alarm is active released e Scheduled Transmits an e mail message when the specified time is reached e System Transmits an e mail message during recovery from a power failure when memory end is detected or when an error related to the external storage medium and FTP client occurs e Report Transmits an e mail message when report is created only on models with the optional computation function M1 e Subject Header1 Header2 Subject Set the subject of the e mail message using up to 32 alphanumeric characters Header1 and Header2 Set the string to be attached to the e mail message using up to 64 alphanumeric characters 6 25 OOZAW 00LAIW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LX 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 6 Adjusting the Setup Data Checking the Data 1 Click here System Data Adjustment E Hardware Configurator D4200 1_pnl File Comm Setting System view Help 2 If the data are not consistent D a S R the following dialog box opens Meas Settine Adjusting Data Data Adjustment VS Any adjusted data are exist Enter OK to continue Check to hide this dialog Change the value of CH 1 Spanii from 999999 000 to 1 999 Change the value of CH 2 Spanii from 999999 000 to 1 999 Checks whether or not the specified setup is consistent with the actual system If it is not the data are automatically corrected The data are c
182. ecover communications with modbus mice and temperature meters If you select automatic recovery you can also specify the recovery interval You can select one of the following intervals 1 min 2 min 5 min 10 min 20 min 30 min or 60 min Specifying the Memory Data Out Mode You can only specify to output memory via Ethernet or serial communications IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 12 Setup Data Adjustment Data Check IM 04L41B01 64EN E 1 Click here Or choose the System menu Data Adjustment bai f k CH Mode Delta Scales 2 If the data is not consistent the following dialog box opens Data Adjustment VS Any adjusted data are exist Enter OE to continue Check to hide this dialog Change the value of CH 1 Spanii from 999999 000 to 1 999 Change the value of CH 2 Spanii from 999999 000 to 1 999 Checks whether the specified setup is consistent with the actual system If not the data is automatically corrected Data is corrected in the following cases e In such cases as when values of items of the Meas Math tab are outside the specified range e When an invalid character string is used Click here to display the correction list Data Adjustment Dialog Box If Data Adjustment Dialog on the View menu is selected the Data Adjutment dialog box opens whenever data is not consistent when checking or transmitting data Note Perform the data check before sending the new setup data to t
183. ect H L h I R Tort T ort is selectable when the style number is S2 or later The selectable alarms vary depending on the input mode and computation type For details see section 6 2 in the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 User s Manual Alarm value Alarm is generated using the specified value as the boundary The selectable range of alarm values vary depending on the input mode and range Alarm delay Alarm is generated when the measured value stays above or below the specified alarm value for the specified time delay period Relay To output relays select the output relay number Otherwise select NONE Input Filter and Moving Average Tag Display Zone 6 6 Moving average can be specified on models DX106 DX112 DX210 DX220 DX230 MV106 MV112 MV210 MV220 and MV230 Input filter can be specified on models DX102 DX104 DX204 DX208 DX204C DX208C MV102 MV104 MV204 and MV208 Input filter To use the input filter select the time constant 2 s 5 s or 10 s Moving average To use the moving average select the sampling count 2 to 16 Up to 16 characters can be entered for the tag You can use the tag instead of the channel number to be displayed on the screen The Setup screen is used to select whether to display the channel number or the tag on the screen You can select the range of the screen in which the waveform of each channel is to be displayed Specify positions on the display scal
184. ection 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channel Ext Channel IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 17 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 4 Setting the Computation Channels Setting One Computation Channel at a Time 1 Double click the channel you wish to set veon E MON DH co01 0027 K01 ON 201 002 K02 su103 OH oo1 Kos 2 The channel setting dialog box opens Clicking here and selecting the list of operators switches the display Select channels and constants on the Measure channel Math channel Constant and other tabbed pages and select desired operators to create an expression ABS Absolute value SOR Square root LOG Common logarithm O EXP Exponent OFF ON Rolling Average LNC Natural logarithm The items in the math channel tab can be configured for each channel The items that are configured are the same as those configured on the spreadsheet For details see the page corresponding to the item 3 18 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 9 Entering General Settings Daylight Saving Time S Daylight Saving Time I Group I Display View group Message i Comment 1 Annunciator 1 Timer Event Action I File Menu Customize ail Web Report Start Time and End Time Set the date and time at which to switch to daylight saving time and the date and time at which to switch to standard time IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 19 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 5 Entering General Setting
185. ection of all the measured data files from the start to stop of a recording However you can only sign a file from the DX when the file covers the measured data of an entire recording from start to stop Sign from Recorder Set the signature privilege range for DX key operations Setting Description Off You cannot sign files from the DX Signature 1 You can sign files from the DX using the Signature1 privileges Signature1 2 You can sign files from the DX using the Signature1 and Signature2 privileges Signature1 2 3 You can sign files from the DX using the Signature1 Signature2 and Signature3 privileges Memory Stop at Signature You can configure this setting so that a screen for making a signature historical trend display appears when recording stops memory stop Setting Description On The historical trend display appears automatically at memory stop Off The display does not change at memory stop Note You cannot set Memory stop at signature when e Sign from recorder is set to Off Even when Memory stop at signature is set to On the historical trend display will not appear when e The process type is Batch and the measured data is divided into multiple files e A user without signature privileges performs memory stop e The multi batch function BT2 option is being used and batch overview mode is enabled IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 45 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings FTP
186. ecvedonauatiou seebedtvendsddeestd anreecteeeeestel 3 82 Configuring the MV1000 MV2000 4 1 Starting the Harware Configurator cccccccccccsssceecceesececceuseeeceeeeecessseeessegeeesssueeeessanseees 4 1 To Load Setup Data from the MV1000 MV 2000 ccccccccseececeeececeeeeeaeeeesaeeesaneees 4 1 Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System cccceeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeaas 4 2 Loading Existing Setup Daa ic aecincescos cea oceic onset dsteaesteusisenccacedtaassseenteceseeceadetutastededexteacsieen 4 2 4 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Settup Data 4 3 Changing Checking the System Configuration ccccccsseeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeesseeeeeeeaes 4 3 Initializing the Setup DACs sseceteerssactnrcensatennadarasecendtiosdebrsnsueeaseceass dene ontideuitadibncbeaetarenseeas 4 4 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels ccccccccccseececeseeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeesaees 4 5 Input Type Mode and Range Type cccccsssccccsssececcessececseesseesceuseeessegeeeesscseeesseaaess 4 7 Linear Scaling 1S CALE ets ticcticcge nts seit aetcenencousiede oicseensuanbesguesahenesaedeeieenoieivenSsabosie teneeee 4 7 Difference Computation DELTA casinscsiactsassdeneesenteiceneynctnedeateaaeeacnseednancuyenaeteteuacdnsseabis 4 7 FE E m EEEE EEEE EEE ATA E AET E EA AAEE LEA EEEE 4 7 soue ROOL eean E oe eee ee eee eee eee ee 4 7 NOG once
187. ed e Ifthe directory name is not specified DATAO default is automatically set as the directory name Manual Save Select whether to save all the data or data that has not been saved during manual save 5 63 000ZX3 000 X32 24 Buln uos o 5 10 Display Settings Group Trip Line 5 64 Click here Or choose the Turn ON OFF the trip line display Setting menu SET Regular Setting Set the trip line value by Click the tab of the group dragging the slider to be configured Set the trip line by Specify a group name specifying a value J Display j e qe MessageFile Group Trip Line Group Name ip Lir eel View Group a OFF amp ON dint User Key Channel Configuration 100 Daylight Saving 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Control Group No 2 orF on Meas GticH o No 3 OFF on No 4 Q OFF ON 0 100 100 PA Select the channels that you want to Select the color of register in the selected group blue ON the trip line Group Name Use up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the group name Channel Configuration The maximum number of channels that can be assigned to a group is 6 for the CX1000 and 10 for the CX2000 The assigned channels are listed under Channel Configuration Trip Line Up to four trip lines can be set to one group With regard to the trip lines set here the first and second settings No 1 and No 2 refer to the trip lines in Data Monitor and Da
188. ee sincupsrerismnauniesiaaenedtererncimusunenaaudtenisaeterereteis 1 8 NANOS Messag iis cia isccicsncsvteesuensinapreveisarantinnwinieiiances 3 42 4 32 changing the system configuration cccccceseeeeeeeeees 3 3 4 3 IM 04L41B01 64EN CUPS siete cs canecenaricctwcuccuseaumensctentsciceussausonuetestasienccsncas 5 47 6 18 Chahine COMM QUPAUOM sciccctaxGccdeccnncvesesacecsasdeecencedorsaneitacarecnedes 3 20 characters that can be USEC cccccseeeeeeeeeseeeees 3 82 4 60 checking the system configuration ccccccssseeeeeeeees 3 3 4 3 check the data cece ccacech orc sasendseiecornedaruattewnabonbadecveadatdonbachxeariencs 6 26 check the system Configuration c cccccceessseeeeeseeeeeees 6 28 clears the entire waveform circular cccceesseeeeeeeeeaeeeees 3 23 client command NUMDET ccceceeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeseees 3 62 4 46 OOM e E 5 33 5 59 color band on the scale a aaeseenenanannnenenenerererenenrrrnne 3 12 4 11 color of the alarm point marks cccceeccceceeseseeceeeeeeseeeees 3 13 comm security eect iic cede ores eninsehicentet ore rmnadnned taoeoodeauecsnst 3 43 4 32 command setting sessicisdicsssttcsvseasiersnaeianaias 3 62 3 73 4 46 4 53 command TY DG cee ec condcccveanetacticediatebaecaach 3 62 3 73 4 46 4 53 COMMEN ee esee ee a EEEE E E san i 3 27 comment text bloCK essiricssinnicnrsiniinnirnnsianianisnadiancsnnsinsdnnss 3 27 comment tex
189. eesseuseeesssseesssages 4 14 Use Turning ON OFF Computation cccccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseaeeseesaaees 4 15 EMENN EX DRC SSION Goi sevsignis nrinn siege Eear EEES 4 15 Span Display Span and FOU cdc oaeecccetsesesnccstniccnetcseiate sence sesttezatcnatiendenaraesietesxcueneetensa 4 15 RN eects cee secs ee spose ese danas sees EE EE AE T EEA I EE tee AE EEE 4 15 TLOG TLOG Om LSLeNIOIN 520 ctacuamrcscesectetacencncaiorenttenedcesesaneecetacenetacatenesccesiceen eaened 4 15 PEA ING WAG e cas isiten et sana E ivainmaducianbeass ovine 4 15 RONO PV CIAO siismiceisacoeiienaicisuusertedeendeteriveuaniiee tina ts Eiin a inni r a iieri pii 4 16 Memory Smpling Zone Graph Partial Color Green Band and Alarm Mark 4 16 IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter 5 IM 04L41B01 64EN Contents ON SUN ace cree E E ec 4 16 Copyvingvand Pasting Setup Data sccccsccnceece nde ences icaesasncudscanacesseta scedeacecenacacasiedeacscareazes 4 16 Setting One Computation Channel at a TIMGE ccccccsesececcesseeeseesseeccseeesesseageeeeees 4 17 A5 Entering General Se WINS acces cot gee tele sentence ninia EAEE eee EAE EANA EETA ERENER 4 18 UE ETS E E E EE T A E E A E A A E AE 4 18 O eeaeee E sa epee ace E E 4 18 DISD I e E E 4 19 VIC O csc sce gah ce cee ae rcs te a eee eae cee 4 22 WIGS SACS E EE E E E PEE EE EEE E T EEE ETT 4 23 TO e E SS 4 24 Wiel tre ampie saer E L 4 25 EVOM ACION ae ee eee E E A
190. eiers 3 43 4 33 memory alarm TING case esccescoceess acsswenciansCoswoncanexeaxsesseenss 5 51 6 22 memory sample cccccccsececeeseeceseeecuseeceueeeseueeseaeees 5 46 6 17 memory SAINI Ghiwascsccsevennneuiscentsnsentesianincusenemounseiairedeutindass 3 11 memory stop at signature sc cine scieccassarine donc eceniaeerniecnmarscess 3 45 menu bar neaasosaztessceseccesesecies nto naccectstentaetseiseccaoreetentaatseceeensenetics 1 4 mMenu CISOIAY areren nania ENEE NEE 3 41 MESSAQE ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeees 3 22 3 26 4 20 4 23 5 63 6 13 message file sans ceacnlccnd ye suutontucbendeuterncuiesguntaeeaensmuccnbausanetecoendds 5 63 message to all groups oxi c2sscicicatenatcantnsdupdintaaduarinedeoninaas 3 42 4 32 modbus client otctsstecstersecois tecateacnoseecoastattectendnoetesiecsteceres 3 61 4 45 modbus Master scsscsenadetccsnicctcdscdediieidsalinsndicdateidesanees 3 73 4 53 ModbuS SEPVEP cececceceeceeceeceeeeceeeeeeeseeteeeeeaueeeeneneeess 3 40 4 31 MOE eee e e E E T er Or 3 7 4 7 5 54 6 5 monitoring function ssseeeenneeesserterresrrrrreresrrrerenrrrrreeeesnnree 2 2 IM 04L41B01 64EN Montor page oaeoi aK oia 3 69 4 51 moving average ccccesceceeseeceeeecseseessaeees 3 11 4 10 5 55 6 6 N PV Ole eee a a a E S 5 67 6 23 node Addres Ss sncensetnntuetansanancansen aeacboacatanascsentencstescnosennarenciedes 3 75 POOO e eee aE E EA EEE E S 3 49 number of blockS icc cisivnavacccecen sanded ccnaienesde
191. el numbers of input output The range of channels that you can enter varies depending on the command type as follows Read 201 to 440 R Math C01 to C60 Write 1 to 48 W Math 101 to 160 Exchange M release numbers 4 and later C01 to C60 Address Enter the address of the slave device in the range of 1 to 247 Register Set the register number of the server For an input register select in the range of 30001 to 39999 and 300001 to 365536 For a hold register select in the range of 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465536 The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 in the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual Type Select INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT L The type you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 in the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 17E In release number 3 FLOAT has been added as a data type for measurement channel data and computation channel data IM 04L41B01 64EN Serial PROFIBUS DP Release number 3 or later 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Node Address Set to a number from O to 125 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 75 000ZXG 0001 Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 7 Sending the Setup Data to the DX1000 DX2000 Sent Setup Data You cannot send data while the DX1000 DX2000 is performing memory sampling or math computations Address Setup Data When setting
192. elay output terminal from the following DO001 to 006 DO101 to 106 DO201 to 206 RO001 to 012 only on models with the expansion DIO terminal block SW001 to SW036 internal switches Style3 or later Action Displays the relay output action Energized De Energize per the Control Relay settings on the Setup tab Event Display Group o CortrolLeop Contra Contra seins Setup Program patter a Pattern Mo E Detant setting Segment setting PY Event Event output Eventaisn Copy Paste mitialize All segments 0 All events a Event display group You can select events for when groups are displayed in the CX program selection screen or program operation screen Up to 5 events can be specified ON OFF Turns the display ON or OFF Kind Select either time event or PV event Number Set the event number IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations AUX Automatic Message Display Position Operation Display Automatic Switching Turn message display ON OFF and set the loop display position on the CX Message displays on the CX trend display screen Display position when partitioned for each loop on the CX Tag display settings cannot be entered here Tag comment display settings cannot be entered here z f Program pattern Co t C 1 A A tup Default setting Segment setting PY Event Event output Event disp aux All segments 0 All events 0
193. elimiter for directories varies depending on the implementation of the destination FTP server Example When transferring files to the data directory in the home directory of an FTP server on a UNIX file system home data If the file transfer to both primary and secondary destinations fails the MV aborts the file transfer When the connection recovers the MV transfers the data that could not to be transferred in addition to the new data file However since the data that is transferred resides in the internal memory of the MV if the data is overwritten the data that could not be transferred is lost 4 44 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings MODBUS Client j Environment Alarm Scan Interval l Measure Function i Report Key Lock Login Ethernet TCPAP FTP Modbus client E Mail SNTP client J Server functions Serial eed Server anni Click to display the channel selection screen Changes the upper lower display area Communication interval Set the read cycle to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s or 10s Auto recovery Set the interval for retrying the connection when the connection is interrupted for some reason Select OFF 10s 20s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min or 1h Modbus Server setting e Server No Select from 1 to 16 for the server registration numbers to be configured e Port No Enter the port number
194. enesescrasareueness seamen 3 51 BO eases es Sen a ewe ec ns Soci iv pe ems ew eee See 3 52 Remote Release number 3 or later ccccccccssseeececeeeeeceeececeeeueeeessegeeeesssseesssaaes 3 53 IO EOC a e E E A 3 54 Eelo ia EPE A E A EEEN A E EEEE A A N 3 55 AA A E A A E E E A E E I E A AE E A E EE 3 57 Contents Chapter 4 viii E E A E A ete E E E EE A ET 3 72 Serial PROFIBUS DP Release number 3 or later ccceccccesseeeceeeeeeeesseeeeeeees 3 75 3 7 Sending the Setup Data to the DX1000 DX2000 n1nnn0nnnnnnnnsnnnnennnerrnnnnnnenrnsnnrnenrnenne 3 76 Sent Setup Dal aie cocsiiccsieneteesncxesacseeescosesessussantcheuueseniecetedsacesnanceshesosdewnsvesatsetexcedenseseseesbaue 3 76 3 8 Saving the Setup Dae sie sisec as eeeeee tk eseere seca cSvegtavt asaies oa eapdec See eh ociee Sulack ace splececeseeeedae See aseSeode 3 78 3 9 Printing the Setup DA asec ce cecexnccdeseconsesantcnnsansanadesdaccadectasscgsanauads sexdenesdatnactinssuenticwdsercsadecsices 3 79 3 10 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX1000 DX2000 and Checking the DX1000 DX2000 Hardware Information cccccccccssececceececseececceeceeseuceseeeessececsaaeessgeessuseessaeees 3 80 3 11 Characters That Can Be USCC yccccveeccesiscvensdebenvecesivensteveiwssdensdccedleeactiensskedserievenelexddueeaeste 3 82 Listor VC Ty Serene cee eis iio ea ene ien eee a 3 82 Table of Character Codes sede dared varenss end eoisner Sopa de
195. eport Span Point L Temperature arc Aux bere J Time zone Network Control Action J Internal Loop J Contact Input Control Relay External Loop i vA O e Tuning Setting Tuning item ON OFF Tuning Setting 4p Select On for the parameters that you want to display in the tuning window and Off for other parameters ID Select the ID of the item from the choices below Internal Loop SP target set point A1 alarm 1 setting A2 alarm 2 setting A3 alarm 3 setting A4 alarm 4 setting P proportional range integration time D differentiation time OH upper output limit OL lower output limit MR manual reset H hysteresis DR control action direction DB dead band PO preset output ETC others BS measured value 1 input bias FL1 measured value 1 input filter BS2 measured value 2 input bias FL2 measured value 2 input filter RT ratio setting RBS remote input bias RFL remote input filter or W01 W36 control computation constant IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings External Loops Internal loop SP target set point A1 alarm 1 setting A2 alarm 2 setting A3 alarm 3 setting A4 cannot select with UT320 UT321 UT350 or UT420 P proportional range integration time D differentiation time OH upper output limit OL lower output limit MR manual reset H hysteresis DR cont
196. er Time zone style number 4 Set the time difference from the GMT IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Network Setting the TCP IP 1 Click here also selectable from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Comm 2 Select this tab Setup J Scan Interv al T 1 Channel IP Address 1 Key Lock Login IP Address _ Set the IP 1 Timer Subnet Mask Report mn address Defaut Gateway J Temperature zR A AU DNS Setting Time zone DNS Network s FA Primary Server IP Address _ Set these addresses when using the DNS Secondary Server IP Address Host Mame Domain Mame Domain Suffix 4 Domain Suffix 2 Keep Alive OFF On Timeout GOFF on lh Memory Data Out G Ethernet Serial Enter the timeout value when turned ON In the case of a CONFIG file the IP address cannot be configured When communicating with the DX100 DX200 MV100 MV200 via Ethernet the IP address subnet mask and default gateway must be set on the DX100 DX200 MV100 MV200 beforehand Setting the FTP 2 Select the primary or secondary tab 1 Select this tab o AlarmRelay Remote Scan IntervalMemary Channel Key LockLogin a FTP Connection J Timer F Report Server Name Temperature Port Humber Aue lt aa Time zone La ai NaI Select the file S Network Password transfer Account destination PASY Initial Path Disp amp Event Data Qorr on Report Gor GION Memory Data Out Ethern
197. er destination transfer source Mail title File name directory name initial path Disallowed in the symbol box indicates some disallowed characters are present even though input was possible The following characters cannot be used in a file path Expressions are defined by the grammar Allowed alphanumeric characters and symbols expressed with a single byte are as follows Table of Character Codes 3 82 Alphanumeric characters Symb CULT TF CULT LF HE ee BP ALLL PPP Pre ekee H FeekeHerere PPPEECHree rer rl e AU PEPE EEEP EE SP means space amp O59 2 is the symbol for degrees of temperature Input output and indicated using P and f are only allowed in expressions IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter 4 Configuring the MV1000 MV2000 4 1 Starting the Harware Configurator The Hardware Configurator can transmit and receive the setup data change the setup data and create new setup data The setting screen may differ from your actual screen To Load Setup Data from the MV1000 MV2000 Before performing the following procedure please make sure that the communication method and parameters are correct 1 Click the Receive Data button or select Comm Receive Setting from the menu bar I Hardware Configurator NewFile File Comm Setting System View He Send Setting Action F Measure channel Receive Data f The Network dialog box appears
198. erminals ccccccccc ces eeceeseeseeseeeeeeeaeeueeaeas 3 53 REDCAR ACUOM g E E E T 5 40 repeat MOQUCNICY sci cacedesreceinciecebs dhacteecclacsearnasedbiehaesnecnasecetededs 5 40 POON aonane 3 44 3 52 4 33 4 37 5 50 report CHANNE L cccecccesceceeeeeseceececeneeteneeeeeeeeeeaees 5 50 6 21 f 91819 OODE aimee eee eee tte ac ee Ren nen ae Ne ener Ane 3 52 report layoUl caasaeneantsncatsarsacecurtuetiaaricordunmnensedtadeeamentenaestonodanss 3 38 report settings mall ccccccsesssceeceeeeseeeeeeseeeeeees 3 67 4 49 repon template Seain iai n aai 3 44 POSTON C ircanasaci ahinntcsiotdavamnsdcueniectmiigitaenscioniesinniouaauacioenaamicians 1 5 OU US cetera e oe otitis ewes cece EEEE ones 3 73 4 53 revision STONY scienee ben ddesechol oir inkeer ath rriari V E EEA AIE A AE E N AE T 3 51 4 36 5 47 6 18 rolling average ccaseverceececcasetectzerectnedessieee 3 17 4 16 5 59 6 10 R9 232 SCUINGS scctiactesncicsannieadieeedadeseasassansedsastacaiesitecs 3 72 4 52 FO settee a a o teases 3 72 4 52 S SAVE eria E E emiaan anes eet 6 17 save interval seca cies orcs iactattiesilonal a onda ct Nacpeatlancignonduceuncecieshaetioatteiens 3 22 saving setup data eahctacten ecternton het vanced riie nnrscin a eissien nego senna 2 1 saving the setup data cccssscccssseeeeseeeeees 3 78 4 57 5 73 Seale a a a e 5 54 6 5 6 7 scale OVC oc tencin trecatsdecadicteswnevedabsdeeattatcuasenedabscauteinettases 3 43 4
199. esas odacpenlecevaseenaedeseecesd iced 5 45 Channel Setting the Burnout and RUC ccccceecccccssseeeeceeeceesseeseeseaeseeessaeeeessaeeeees 5 47 Key LOCK EOQ sisine eater ar ree re en aE ee mer eer ere rte Ea 5 48 AUN UO A E EEE A A EE EAE T E ETE 5 49 Report Creating Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Reports Setting Available When the Computation Function Option is Active ccccccccceeceeceececeee cesses eeeseecesseeeesseeeeseneeeees 5 50 Tag Memory Alarm Time Displayed Language and Partial Expanded Display SUN e AAEE T denne EAEE E E E E EA 5 51 Temperature Oa eeeeenn nen emer ee ney eee en are ee ee aura ee ee eee ee 5 52 MIT ZO Il Oo 2 aie oe cnet ences OE AE IEEE AOE SERE EEO EAEE EE 5 52 5 8 Measurement Channels SettingS cccccccssssceccsseeeeceeeseeceseeececsseseeesseseeeeseusesesseageeeseas 5 53 Input Type Mode and Range Type cccccssseccecseeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeesaeaeeeesanees 5 54 Difference Computation and Reference cccccccccseecccceeceeceeceeceneeeseueeseeueessaeessaaees 5 54 UTR 0 Gos sab caste neater gets caeeennsacaveds cated anceudenesedia tecne seacnee oa nesteeceteeguasecdaeeeseseavace lt seess 5 54 Display le AUN cases ee sc ssa ee secs ds tne sce Se de ee ones eee oe spc eee eee Se 5 54 CN cared ee ca nce E epee eceesatee ees teav ase sane onede oe acaneceoe ectieaeteenait aneedesaece 5 54 EE Msg E oe oi EAS ers 2 Go cg osc coe E EEA A ET EAE T 5 55 EED i T O
200. esensMlaslancasseceeslees 6 16 Scan Interval MEMOSY cccccseececccesceecceesececceeuecccaueuseecsaueceecseuseeessegeeeessusesessenseeesees 6 17 Channel Setting the Burnout and RUC cccccecccccssseecceeeececseeeeeseeeseeeeseaeeeesseseees 6 18 Key HOGI MO GU sa ceactossesonsessatace nensacioiiexenetseseostedvaseadszaseacednnnseceacieciceneaconcteeseensesiacsoncnes 6 19 TA TIO IA as ccs es see esc ese rece E eae eme pac a E EES aaa 6 20 Report Creating Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Reports Option M1 cccceeee 6 21 Setting the Temperature Unit Tag Channel Display Memory Alarm Time Displayed Language Partial Expanded Display Batch Option BT1 Style Number S2 or Later and NL 9 a lt a ne gee ne rrp eer ee Oe tr a eee ee ee ann er 6 22 ENE 8 A POROA cece easement AEE EIE EEA N E EE E E E I EA 6 23 6 6 Adjusting the Setup Data Checking the Data cc ceccceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeneeeeeens 6 26 6 7 Sending the Setup Data to the DX MV ccccccccseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseaaeeesseaeeeeeeas 6 27 6 8 Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data ccceccceeeeeeeeeeees 6 28 Checking the System Configuration ccccccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeesseeeeeseaeeeeeesaeeeeessaeeees 6 28 Initializing the Setup Data cosh geek cet actetecccenrddavnesce ducersdeeuscardeinndsteedavdecteesuectdiesxdtenidinedelon 6 28 6 9 Saving the Setup Date sec
201. ess of the media storage setting Setting This item is only available on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option The setup file and change settings log file that are saved when the settings have changed are automatically transferred Indicates snapshot using the FUNC key communication command EV2 command USER key or remote control function e Output Directory Format Release number 3 or later Set the directory output format to MS DOS or UNIX Transfer wait time Release number 3 or later There may be cases when data cannot be transferred from the DX to the FTP server due to too many simultaneous connections to the FTP server An example is when multiple files are created and need to be transferred at the same time from multiple DXs By shifting the transfer time you can avoid having too many simultaneous connections to the FTP server File Type Setting Display data files O to 120 minutes Event data files Report files O to 120 minutes 3 59 IM 04L41B01 64EN 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Setting the FTP connection destination Consult your network administrator when setting parameters such as the primary secondary FTP servers port number login name password account and availability of the PASV mode e Primary Secondary You can specify two destination FTP servers Primary and Secondary If the primary FTP server is down the file is transferred to the secondary FTP server
202. et Serial By using the FTP function you can automatically transfer the measured computed data files to the specified server IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 23 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode 6 24 Setting the serial communication option C2 C3 Select this tab o AlarmRelay Remote i Scan Intervaltiemory aA Baud Rate i200 Wado 40 m0 19200 3400 J Key LockLogin Data Length a7 T Timer Parity nonE Woop Weven Sepa RS232 Handshaking G OFF OFF QP xXOMxON IXOMRS GIcSRS o Temperature ve RS422A 485 Address En RS4224 485 Protocol Gi NORMAL Qi MODBUS Q MODBUS MASTER Time zone Network Note When using modbus you must set the protocol to MODBUS or MODBUSMASTER Setting the Modbus Master option C2 C3 style number 4 Select this tab Setup J Sean IntervalMemory Basic setting o Channel o Key LockLogin Read cycle a Timer Timeout o Temperature AUX Command setting o Time zone Bran Commu Data Slave _JOFFicnn Fico B 30004 INT16 eal 2 _ 0FFien Bco B a000 INTIE E 3 _ 0FFien Bco B a000 INTIG E 4 ee ees Bce B a000 INTIE z 5 _ OFFicn Bee B 30001 INTIE B 6 _ 0FFien Bco B 30001 INTIE z 7 Dieu e 30001 INTIE E 5 tl Sole Beo B 30001 INT16 EJ Memory Data Out G Ethernet amp Serial Setting the web server style number S4 Operator page Monitor page YR Setu
203. etic A T 3 48 4 35 DN OS sas oriiipiniodin nirre aeih aiia bierna 5 54 POPU UA OOD ossessi a EE EEEO AG 5 8 interval jaceconencczortncsuseauencemescesmbosaaubncensuntezenbesatuonsorsansezevtusceace 5 59 Ta Ee E o EE TEE AA EEE E EEA E iv include instantaneous value c ccceeeeeeees 3 64 3 65 4 48 include source URL 3 64 3 65 3 66 3 67 4 48 4 49 DU AN n erea EE E E cates toes setae earn sensei 6 28 initializing the setup data cccceeeeee es 3 4 4 4 5 5 6 28 WRC A TO AU Asa srrestictoas sna EEE NA E EOE ONE 3 60 4 44 inital program pattereita rissani reiner 5 35 WG GT eE A 6 6 TOY e A A scien A E E E E 3 7 4 7 6 5 instrument information Server eesesoseneeseeeenerererrerene 3 40 4 31 inter block delay a ssaicis asdrcascoce siwatnnd exeonnnconaureeenieneadsicore 3 73 4 53 internal SWITCH cece ceeceeceeceeceeeeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeneeees 3 47 4 34 DEWEY Al esre e a ae E E EEEE RE 3 65 4 48 6 10 interval rate of change alarm ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 47 4 34 invalid USET cccdcavassacdcccaventssctuamcecacteiceatetncioensicttennsawsaioiaereniesecias 2 2 IP address voccscwussivervnlenimmavaaseneers eneaiiien 3 57 3 58 4 41 4 42 K KDC server NAME 1 0 2 cece cc cecceecce cece ceeeeeceseeeeceeeeseeeeseeeeaeeeaeees 3 71 PAI suonano iee ERS Ea 3 58 4 42 A e AEAT 3 54 3 56 4 38 5 48 6 19 POV SCCM A EE E 3 43 4 32 C ANGUAGE aa A EEN 5 51 NIN AN esata aos tptcc
204. ettings Report 3 52 No Click to display the channel selection screen Channel selection screen Click the channel you wish to set up J Remote Key Lock 1 Login J Ethernet Report kind Select the type of report to be created Settings Description OFF Do not create a report Hour Creates hourly reports Day Creates daily reports Hour Day Creates hourly and daily reports Day Week Creates daily and weekly reports Day Month Creates daily and monthly reports Day Week day and Time hour Set the date or day of the week and the time when the report is to be created The specified date time is when the report file is divided Set the values in the range indicated below Items with a dash are invalid Report Type Day Week day Time Hour 0 to 23 Day 1 to 28 0 to 23 Hour Day 0 to 23 Day Week SUN to SAT 0 to 23 Day Month 1 to 28 0 to 23 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 Report Channel No The report is output in order by this number Use Select ON for the report channels to be used CH No Set the channel to assign to the report channel All channels can be assigned but reports are not created for channels set to Skip or OFF even if they are assigned In the stacked bar graph display report data is displayed in the following groups However only channels that have the same unit as the first group in the channel are displayed 1 2 3 4 5 6 Report Groups DX1000 R01 t
205. ettings Internal External The following settings apply to the internal and external loop s SP PV and OUT displays To enter control channel settings click the Control Int tab Or you can select the items by choosing Control Setting SET Basic Setting Control Channels Internal LOOP T T bed i w 10 4 PV INT 01 PY SP INT 01 SP INT 02 PV SP INT 02 5P INT 02 0UT PY INT 03 PY INT 03 SP INT 03 OUT PY INT 04 P SP INT 04 5P OUT INT 04 0UT py INT O8 PY OOPOE SP INT O6 SP OUT INT O6 OUT Ta ear a tag using maximum of 16 alphanumeric characters You can select tags instead of channel numbers to be displayed on the screen Select whether the channel name or tag is displayed in the Setup tab under Aux gt Tag Channel By selecting Tag in Aux of the Setup tab you can select the tag No tag comment or tag in the Data Monitor or Data Viewer Zone You can select the range on the CX s screen where each channel waveform is displayed Set the lower and upper limits as percentages on the scale displayed The zone setting conditions are as follows e Setting range 0 to 100 Lower limit lt Upper limit e Difference between upper and lower limits at least 5 Graph Div Select the number of bar graph divisions from 4 to 12 or C10 When selecting C10 the scale of the trend display is divided into 10 or some other number of major divisions numbered at the
206. ettings Description Login Enables only registered users to operate the MV using keys The User registration is displayed in the Basic Setting tab Keylock Enables the key lock function Set the key lock function in the Basic Setting tab OFF Disables the security functions Comm Security Settings Description Login Enables only registered users to operate the MV via communications The User registration is displayed in the basic setting mode menu OFF Disables the security functions IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings e Auto Save Settings Description ON Automatically saves the measured data to the CF card OFF Does not automatically save the data Save the measured data manually to the CF card or USB flash memory USB1 option e Media FIFO You can select this with MV main unit firmware version 2 0x or later This is valid only when Auto Save is ON Settings Description ON If there is no more free space on the CF card the oldest file is deleted and the newest file is saved OFF If there is no more free space on the CF card the measured data is not saved to the CF card Option Basic setting Environment Math 0 Basic Environment Value on Error i Over Qe Over J Detail Setting Overflow Sum Ave Beo g Sa Ami Option Overflow Min Max P P i Over Skip j Alarm Scan Interval I Measure Function i Report 1 Key Lock J Login Etherne
207. f the delay high limit alarm is changed when an alarm is already activated and the input is greater than or equal to the new setting the alarm continues For all other cases the alarm detection operation starts at the new setting This is also true for the delay lower limit alarm Alarm Relay To output relays select the output relay number Otherwise select None This can be selected when No Logging is turned ON under Alarm Alarm action in the Basic Setting tab Select whether to show or hide the alarm indication when an alarm occurs If set to OFF a signal is output to the alarm output relay or internal switch when an alarm occurs but it is not indicated on the screen The alarm is also not recorded in the alarm summary IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Moving Average To use the moving average select the sampling count Times 2 to 400 Tag and Tag No You can use the tag instead of the channel number to be displayed on the screen This can be selected when Tag is Tag under Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab Release number 2 or earlier You can enter tags using up to 16 characters Release number 3 or later You can enter tags using up to 32 characters You can enter tag numbers using up to 16 characters You can specify whether or not to use tag numbers by setting Tag No under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic setting tab Memory Sampling
208. ference Computation DELTA cress cave sresescsncsncscetcatacsedesnedacteastice sedexccucbadadsaatedeceedducededencs 3 8 FP Macca cetera E E E 3 8 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN Contents S16 5 21d ROO Oe atte eee eee eae ee eee eee ee ee eee 3 8 COAL E E ap patente een E E E E A E A A EE ETE E E T 3 8 Low cut Can be set when the mode is 1 5V and when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT selected a serccere vases cs cee dene cated ete ecte rece cee ee ike cee gavenee cece as Geeecueeoeacueat ete wee 3 8 Low cut value Can be set when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT Se 61 5 eee en ene eee ee ene eee eee ee ene eee 3 8 Calibration OF GO CHON czccecesiccccctenaceccausacretsgnedcceseaenecas aceccesecsees E AEE EEEN 3 9 PUAN a PE E E A arses E E E E A E PE A A E A A EA E E O E E 3 10 Ei o E E A E EE TE TE A E E E E E EE EA AOE E 3 10 MOVING AVAE aceiren A AE EATE AE EE 3 11 WAS A INO a E teaanednaaitngniaeieans 3 11 Memon ANON eects eerste ge aceite a us ae cee ptiee epee nseeee cee anese ace es eee eee eee 3 11 Zone Zone Land U ene te eee eae ae re ree eee ene oe ere ee ceeee ee eee 3 11 Bess ce E eee cima ae ta ee sess seeds natn eee pee eee cece 3 11 Partial Partial Expanded Display icc sccncsticcncecacdveascdaassecansdocenctensende tastelaoiasannccguincesiase 3 12 colo DPR OT e E ee ae eee 3 12 ae D E ad E E E esaeetacabenzee 3 12 Alanna N aan E E 3 12 Copying and Pasting Setup Data xc igeissieecnideicccencctaloutssest
209. ffer from your actual screen DX MV Style1 Style2 Style3 Style4 Style Number S1 S2 S3 S4 C EO ae eee oe O O 7 Oo e 6 ee ee Oe eee ae EE a ee ee oe a MV200 Starting the Hardware Configurator See section 1 3 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 1 6 1 Starting the Configurator Loading the Setup Data from the DX MV Receive Data icon 1 Click the Receive Data icon or select Comm gt Receive Setting 2 The Network dialog box appears POGreSs 3 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Receive Data dialog box appears Receive Data OR __Cancel_ 4 Click OK to start receiving data 6 2 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 1 Starting the Configurator Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System New file E Hardware Configurator NewFile Fil Comm Setting System View Help E A IEIR P Meas i Hardware Configurator NewFile File Comm Setting System View Help a 1 Click the new file icon or select File New Chl O Open aie i oe 2 The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the DX tab Print Ctrl F Preview System Configuration Ee DX haa E eaaet i i G 3 Click the appropriate items Channel K style EY E Chinese mode and click the OK button to Option open the Configurator screen Math NONE ON Serial Q NONE RS 232 RS 422 485 Fieldbus Media
210. from the menu bar E Hardware Configurator DX20006 File Comm Setting i View g Receive Setting zals Setting Action Action Memory amp Math Start Point _ Memory amp Math Stop The _ dialog box appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Hardware Information dialog box appears If the password has expired on a DX with the AS1 advanced security option follow the directions in the dialog box that appears x Type 01000 ine Firm ersion 8 is Firmware version Hardware Serial number Measch 12 Mathch 34 Number of channels Memory n Internal memory size Option Options Serial NOME Media CF Alarm Relay 20 0 0 TOKUCHU Suffix 2 Option OK Click to close the dialog box 3 81 000ZXa 000 Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 11 Characters That Can Be Used List of Input Types Type Allowed Characters Alphanumeric characters Arbitrary string Yes Yes Alphanumeric Yes Yes Machine address Yes E mail address Yes Subject Yes File path name Yes Yes and Disallowed indicate availability Symbol Yes No Yes Yes including P and Disallowed Disallowed Disallowed Disallowed Item Tag group name comment text field Web report title item name tag number Batch field title characters file header mail header Unit user name password character string account Expression Host name domain name server name and domain suffix Transf
211. g 7 1 Troubleshooting Warning Message List Code Message W3435 System configuration has been changed The input configuration and data will be initialized Continue W3453 All program pattern configuration will be initialized Continue W3454 This pattern configuration will be initialized Conutinue W6031 Current value is invalid because the value is the same with line d W6035 Contains invalid data Open this setting W6036 Start Memory sampling Math W6037 Stop Memory sampling Math W6038 Initialize Current settings W6039 Hardware and software configurations don t match Continue sending data W604 1 Send Setting to Connecting Hardware W6042 Receive Setting from Connecting Hardware W6043 The edited settings will be lost Are you sure you want to continue note d is a number Error List Code Message Corrective Action E0401 Communication Error Check the communication settings E6001 Failed to make file Check the free space in the directory E6002 Failed to open file Try to load the file again If still not possible the file may be damaged Select another file E6003 Unreadable file Select another file E6004 Communication impossible while media in use Execute the operation after data has been saved to the medium E6005 Now sampling amp calculating Can t store settings Stop memory sampling and calculations computation E6006 Now sampling Can t store settings Stop memory sampling E6007 Now calcu
212. g the e mail at the specified interval to Recipient1 and Recipientz2 e Include INST Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is Periodic_data 4 48 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings System Alam Schedtied System Report System SAA Recipient i OFF ON Recipient i OFF oN Include source URL i OFF ON Subject System_varning Header Header2 Specify the settings for sending e mail when the MV recovers from a power failure at memory end and when an error occurs e Recipient and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select ON to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is System_wanrning Report Alm Seeded System Report Repot Recipienti i OFF Gy ON Recipient i OFF ON Include source URL i OFF ON OOOZAW OOOLAI 24 Bun yuo ka Subject Headerd Header Specify the settings for sending e mail when reports are created e Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select On to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is Report_data 4
213. ge i Comment 7 Annunciator Timer Event Action File S File I Event Data I Menu Customize Web Report 1 Daylight Saving Time oo ow Faste a Batch Batch 1 Batch 2 Baten 3 Batch Baten 5 Baten Directory name Set the name of the directory on the storage medium for saving the data on the external storage medium Up to 20 characters Symbols that can be used and _ Strings that cannot be used AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT 1 to LPT9 When the multi batch function BT2 option release 3 or later is enabled set the Header Structure File Name Title and Characters items for each batch group Header Set the header comment to be written to the data file Up to 50 characters Structure Sets the structure of the file name when saving data Settings Description Date Serial number user assigned character string date Serial Serial number user assigned character string Batch Serial number batch name when using the batch function IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN File name Set the user assigned section of the file name Up to 16 characters Symbols that can be used and _ Field Title Field Characters Set text strings When the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later is enabled select the appropriate batch
214. ge shall not exceed the price amount of the Licensed Software or service fee which Yokogawa has received Please note that Yokogawa shall be released or discharged from part or all of the liability under this Agreement if the Licensee modifies remodels combines with other software or products or causes any deviation from the basic specifications or functional specifications without Yokogawa s prior written consent 6 2 All causes of action against Yokogawa arising out of or relating to this Agreement or the performance or breach hereof shall expire unless Yokogawa is notified of the claim within one 1 year of its occurrence 6 3 In no event regardless of cause shall Yokogawa assume responsibility for or be liable for penalties or penalty clauses in any contracts between the Licensee and its customers Article 7 Limit of Export Unless otherwise agreed by Yokogawa the Licensee shall not directly or indirectly export or transfer the Licensed Software to any countries other than those where Yokogawa permits export in advance Article 8 Term This Agreement shall become effective on the date when the Licensee receives the Licensed Software and continues in effect unless or until terminated as provided herein or the Licensee ceases using the Licensed Software by itself or with Yokogawa s thirty 30 days prior written notice to the Licensee Article 9 Injunction for Use During the term of this Agreement Yokogawa may at its own discretion
215. he Basic Setting tab Settings Description OFF Not register Key Log into the DX1000 DX2000 using keys Comm Log into the DX1000 DX2000 via communications Web Log into the operator page and monitor page of the DX1000 DX2000 using a Web browser Key Comm Log into the DX1000 DX2000 using keys and via communications e User Name Set the user name Up to 20 characters e You cannot register user names that are already registered e You cannot register quit or a user name containing all spaces e Password Set the password Release numbers 3 and earlier up to 8 characters Release numbers 4 and later up to 20 characters An entered password is displayed as e You cannot register the word quit a character string that contains spaces or a password containing all spaces 3 55 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings User Up to 30 names can be registered J Environment Alarm J Scan Interval J Measure Function Report J Remote Key Lock Login Supervisor S User Ethernet Changes the upper lower display area e Mode The available settings vary depending on the Security setting Settings Description OFF Not register Key Log into the DX using keys Comm Log into the DX via communications Web Log into the monitor page of the DX using a Web browser Key Comm Log into the DX using keys and via communications e U
216. he CX 5 71 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 13 Sending Setup Data to the CX You cannot send data to the CX during memory sampling i Hardware Gonhaurater HewFile File Comm Setting System View Help r RS 232 Por Tay Baul Rate Bant Baud kates Parity Address 3 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Store dialog box appears Store E IN Send Setting to Connecting Hardware Cancel Click OK to start sending the data A message appears to indicate when data transfer has stopped Click OK to close the message Note Of the network settings in the Setup tab the following items are not transmitted e IP Address under the TCP IP tab e All settings under the Serial tab 5 72 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 14 Saving Setup Data For the operating procedure see section 3 8 The setup file name extension is pcl IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 73 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbutinbiyyuog a 5 15 Printing Setup Data For the operating procedure see section 1 5 You cannot select Print Format Settings 5 74 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 16 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the CX IM 04L41B01 64EN and Checking the CX Hardware Information You can start and stop the CX as well as display CX hardware information from the Hardware Configurator Start Stop operation is only possible with memory sample and math functions This software does not support this operation f
217. he event is set to Timer Specify the number of the group to be displayed Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote You can specify this when the annunciator sequence is set to use the ISA M annunciator and the event is set to Remote User Key or Edge Specify the comment text block number to display Choose which registered display to switch to Set Action to Key or Select Settings Description Key Performs the same operation as pressing the favorite key Select Displays the specified favorite screen Set the registration numbers of the screens you want to specify in the No boxes 1 Available in release numbers 3 and later 2 Cannot be selected on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option When the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later is enabled specify the target batch group when you set the action to any of the settings below Settings that require the designation Memory Start Stop of a specific batch group Memory Start Memory Stop Math Reset Save Display Data Save Event Data Message Display Group Change 3 33 000ZXG 0001 Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 5 Entering General Settings File 3 34 When the multi batch function BT2 option release 3 or later is disabled Daylight Saving Time Group I Display View group i Messa
218. he expression crt 1 1 200 00 200 00 1 1 1 Specify on expression Expression L initialize Select the number of decimals Turn ON OFF Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to all at once all other channels Set the alarm section 5 8 Alarm 1 Alarm 2 o oo Mone E o oo MoNe B s o 00 NoNE E FOH orr o 00 MONE E FOH orr o oo MonMe E F OW orr o oo MOME EF OW orr 0 00 MONE 0 00 NONE c oo MonNe E FF OW orr o oo MONE Fj OW orr n T d z Enter the alarm period Specify a tag section 5 8 10 sec OFF a OFF 10 Bi i 10 sec OFF E OFF 32 E _ OFF10 Bi E OFF Bi E OFF Bi wa Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to all other channels Display zone section 5 8 Set the graph section 5 8 Partial expansion section 5 8 Display color section 5 8 olor o T 50 Mormal I Mormal i 50 B Mormal i 50 B Mormal i I B Computation ON OFF Select whether to perform computation for each channel Expression Enter an expression using up to 40 characters For details about expressions see the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Expressions cannot be used with measurement channels on 0 measurement channel models 5 58 IM 04L41B01 64EN Display Span Alarm and Tag 5 9 Computation Channel Settings Set the upper and lower limits of the display The range is
219. he manual sample number e CH No Enter a channel number of a measurement channel computation channel M1 and PM1 options or external input channel MC1 option 3 31 IM 04L41B01 64EN O 2 gt Q gt co r gt D O x lt g gt L N 3 5 Entering General Settings Event Action 3 32 1 Daylight Saving Time Group 1 Display I View group I Message i Comment Annunciator Timer S Event Action I File Menu Customize Web Report Math Start Settings Off Start Reset Start Event Action No Remote i Wessage Relay i Memory Start Switch i Memory stop Alarm Math Start Timer i Math Stop Match Time i Math Reset NONE Description Does not start the computation even when the START key is pressed Starts the computation when the START key is pressed Resets the computed result up to then and starts the computation when the START key is pressed You can set up to 40 Event The condition to execute the action Settings NONE Remote Relay Relay off Switch Switch off 2 Timer Match Time Alarm Alarm off User Key Level Level switch off 2 Edge Description Not use Select the remote control input terminal number Select the alarm output relay number Select the alarm output relay number Select the internal switch number Select the internal switch number Select the timer number Sele
220. he save destination Manual Save unsave Gi Al folder Message Up to 16 characters can be entered for the message File header Adds a comment to the header section of the measurement computation data file Director name Set the name of the folder in which the measurement computation data files is to be saved Note e Up to eight characters can be entered for the file header and director name AUX CON PRN NUL and CLOCK cannot be used e lf the directory name is not specified DATAO default is automatically set Manual save Select whether to save all the data or data that have not been saved during manual save IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 13 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bulinbyuog 2 6 4 Configuring the Settings Group Trip Line 6 14 o Daylight Saving Batch Click here also selectable from Turn ON OFF the trip line display Setting SET Regular Setting Set the trip line by dragging Select the tab of the group to be configured Set the trip line by ihn Enter the group name ae a value Group Mame Trip Line a Mo w OFF i ON Color T 100 poe ele tO No 2 Ga OFF On Color T 100 po el 10 No 3 Gi orr on Color 100 00 No 4 GI oF on o 100 jem es EE lt Check the channels that you wish to register Select the color of in the selected group blue ON the trip line Group name Up to 16 characters can be entered for the group name Number of channel
221. he setup file that is being edited The full path is printed The name of a newly created file is NewFile The ID number of the setup file that is being edited If there is no ID number or if the file has been newly created a diagonal line is drawn through this cell File Date The date when the setup file that is being edited was created If there is not creation date information or if the file has been newly created a diagonal line is drawn through this cell These items only appear for files that were created on a DX with the AS1 advanced security option files with pel dsd and dse extensions e Changed Value The last file name setting number and file date that were loaded when you selected Load Changed Settings Specified Values and Changed Values There are specified value and changed value columns for the system configuration and setup items The setting values are the values at the time when one of the following operations was last performed the same as the settings that are recovered when you select File Restore Originall e File New e File Open e File Save e File Save As e Comm Receive Setting e Comm Send Setting e Comm Partial Transfer e System System Configuration The changed values are the last values that have been set for each item If a value has not been changed a diagonal line is drawn through its cell Note Items that
222. he time corresponding to 1 division of the time axis on the trend display from below You cannot specify a trend interval that is faster than the scan interval See the table under Save Interval below 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h and 10h Can be set on the DX1002 DX1002N DX1004 DX1004N DX2004 and DX2008 e Save Interval when recording display data Select the size of a record data file The recorded data is divided by the file size specified here The available settings vary depending on the number of memory sampling channels a the Trend interval a Trend interval interval auto save interval 12 1 d 3 co 7 rian 14 ain Trend interval interval ee range of 2min min to Smin min to min min to Smin min to 20 min hour to auto save interval 14 31 31 31 31 a Trend interval interval UTA range of omin hour to th hour to 2h hours to tho hours to ah hours to auto save interval 31 days 31 days 31 days 31 days 31 days 1 Selectable on the DX1002 DX1002N DX1004 DX1004N DX2004 and DX2008 release number 3 or later 2 Selectable in fast sampling mode on the DX1006 DX1006N DX1012 DX1012N DX2010 DX2020 DX2030 DX2040 and DX2048 release number 3 or later e Circular Time Per revolution rev Select the time of revolution from 20min to 4week For release number 2 or earlier this can only be specified on the DX2004 and DX2008 For release
223. he trend screen select the scale display position Partial Expand Set the boundary for the partial expanded display The range is 1 to 99 Boundary The conditions used to set the boundary vary depending on the measurement and computation channels are as follows e Measurement channel When SCALE and SQRT are not used Span L lt boundary lt span U When SCALE and SQRT are used Scale L lt boundary lt scale U e Computation channel Span L lt boundary lt span U For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Note The partial expansion settings take effect when the partial expansion function is set to Use in the Aux section of the Setup tab Display Color You can select the display color of each channel from 16 colors x Red D violet f Green a C Gray i Blue Lime Blue Violet Cyan f Brown Dark Blue Orange as Yellow i Y Green i Light Gray Light Blue f Purple E E Cancel 5 56 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings Copying and Pasting Setup Data You can copy the setup data of one channel or more to other channels Use the following procedure to copy and paste 1 Click the source channel number that you want to copy To select many channels click the first source channel then drag over all the channels that you want to copy 2 Click the Copy button at the bottom left of the window 3 Click
224. ht Restore Key G Key amp Alarm Trend Background Ca White Gi Black Historical Trend Background White G Black QJ Cream Light Gray Scroll Time Jump Detaut Display HISTORY Key action Action History G Favorite Group display i Saved Current Time axis zoom i Saved Current 4 19 O e Q y Q er D lt gt lt N 4 5 Entering General Settings 4 20 Trend interval div Specify the trend storage interval sampling interval and recording interval in terms of time per division on the time axis You cannot choose a sampling interval that is faster than the scan interval See the table under Save Interval below High speed model 5s 10s 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Medium speed model 15s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 15min 20min 30min 1h 2h 4h 10h Only during fast sampling mode You cannot use fast sampling mode on models with the external input channel MC1 option Save Interval when recording display data Select the size of a record data file The recorded data is divided by the file size specified here The available settings vary depending on the number of memory sampling channels and the Trend interval setting Trend interval Bs ts tS 8S Sampling interval 125ms ss 250ms_ 500ms_ ts 2S Selectable range of 10 min to 12 h 10 min to 1 day 10 min to 3 days 10 min to
225. iaxearates eseensisaaceieecauaedesnanensoueaaneus canecmeecasensensancmascabesecediens 1 9 PEE SRN eo see pate eee eens E Sete ec cee oes dae ee wes see open ee oe Se 1 10 Piint PrEViEW as caren secstencasusseaesianacuieasteanataaectecoruteccuaebeneusatel steonseieeean susie cuhesseamintsesenauacts 1 10 Fe MMMM e cece shears tances wins E EAE T A I sd EA E E AA AE 1 10 1 6 Displaying the Version Information cccccccccccsseeeeeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeesaaees 1 11 POC U en E EE E E 1 11 Setup Data on DX1000 DX2000 Models with the AS1 Advanced Security Option ZA Explanation of Operations n eanneanannennnnennnaninrninrrnnnnrrnnerrrnerrnrnrrnnrrennrrsnnrrnrrrnnrrnrnererrrrnne 2 1 Displaying Setup Dala s srsrceisrniedsnaiie atie ern srren a dtair a eiir iraina 2 1 Creating Setup gt 2 eee eae een ne eae eee neon ree er mene eer ere ee 2 1 Saving Setup Data and Applying It on the DX ccccccsseeeeceeeeeeeeseeeseesseeeeessesseeeseas 2 1 Batlai iaie S Gtp By aeenneee tenant mee ere cher ete ean elie wero E ee ey en eer ene eee eee er eee ee 2 2 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX1000 DX2000 and Checking the DX1000 DX2000 Hardware Information cccccccccseccccsseceeceeceeceeceeseuceseeusesseusesseaeessaeeesseeeeees 2 2 Gola a sle ale tothe DA ssis nee ene weer eee eterna ee reer en eee eee eee eee 2 2 2 2 Displaying Setup Data case vaca oaseeetetasec nous emscitencin
226. ic characters can be used Operation Status Display Set the label and display colors when displaying operation status DIO Labels CX Style Number S3 or Later DI Label Module D001 o Control Group o DIG Monitor E DO Label Dioo4 a Logic math DIODA o Control Input Set the DIO labels Logic Computation CX Style Number S3 or Later Display i Message File J Group Trip Line View Group O00 JUser Key J Daylight Saving J Control Group J DIO Monitor DIO Label P Logic math Control Input Type Select the output destination for the computed results Equation Input an equation Click the Operator button to display the operators that can be entered Constants You can specify the constants used in equations Constants are common with PV SP computation and analog retransmission constants IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 29 000ZX3 000LX32 24 Bun uos o 5 4 Control Function General Settings Control Input Channel CX Style Number S3 or Later 5 30 When the PV SP computation function is ON you can set the input range and ten segment linearizer output for each channel Input Range tab Control Input SCALEM S Temp Scale 1 5 Mode a DIG Monitor DIG Label Logic math Span Range Type E Control Input Scale Lal Sort F Bias a Fitter SCALE 1 5V Select a channel measurement mode from Temp Scale
227. ienasiencee 3 41 4 31 AECE ce ers n a EE E dient neat 5 55 device information nonnnnnennnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrrnnnnrnnnnrennnnne 2 2 E E AIE A A A AT ATT 3 57 3 58 4 41 4 42 Index 1 Index difference computation cccceeeceeeeeeees 3 8 4 7 5 54 6 5 differential input cece eeeccceeeeeeeeeeceeeeseseeseeeeeeeneees 3 8 4 7 DIO operation monitoring vciscnccusccseesrnuesensecedidadnnseratecasramdedebas 5 28 directory NAME seissisncceasctceiaaniasenpuededestsnanaveceebecdoassadedcerees 3 34 4 27 EED E n A E EPE A E EPE E AEE E AEE T 5 62 display COI OM asosaiteseacesrasiacee conicgennnssecncqeneas 3 12 4 11 5 56 6 7 display direction MESSAGES ccccceseeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeees 3 23 4 20 display direction trend ccccccccecssssssseeeeseeeseeeeess 3 23 4 20 displayed ANGQUAGS is inessarcensaxaiienancaseinasncasciinannnaeesssmanstinentesia 5 51 displaying Setup Cale visits scsi ta oncinsaceoradtccntdeaicacsmeansdniaigbentsacent 2 1 display SSUINGS ca civinactasarcennniesinersavrceesaasisndorsnndisiesidenanvecncsesen 5 62 display SPAN ccccceeeeee ees 3 16 4 15 5 54 5 59 6 5 6 10 Display update interval s2 i secseescccsastacsncacsectatesieccastec nigeceatbates 6 12 display update interval ccccccccseseeceeseeceeeesseeeecseeeeseeeess 5 62 display ZO cane shccteeanresnanorecencieesetaruceeesee 3 11 4 10 5 55 6 6 AVISION eee a ea a e ea r E 5 56 6 7 DNS
228. ient Environment Alarm 1 Scan Interval Measure Function i Report i Remote ail Key Lock I Login Ethernet 1 TCP IP i FIP Modbus client E Mail S SNTP client I Server functions I Connect limits I Serial e Use Select Use to use the SNTP client function Otherwise select Not If you select Use the SNTP client settings are displayed e Server Name Set the SNTP server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Port No Enter the port number of the file transfer destination SNTP server in the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 123 e Access Interval Set the time interval for synchronizing the time with the server to OFF 1 8 12 or 24h If you select OFF you can synchronize the time manually by operating soft keys The time is not synchronized if the difference in the time between the DX and the server is greater than or equal to 10 minutes e Ref Time Set the reference time for making queries e Access timeout Set the time to wait for the response from the SNTP server when querying the time to 10 30 90s e Time adjust start Select On to synchronize the time using SNTP when memory start is executed Otherwise select OFF 3 68 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Server Function Enviro
229. ient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select ON to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Active alarms Sends an e mail when an alarm occurs You can select ON Send e mail or OFF not send e mail for alarms 1 to 4 e Include INST Select ON to attach instantaneous value data to e mail The data that is attached to an e mail is the instantaneous value that is measured at the time the e mail is transmitted e Include source URL Select ON to attach the source URL Attach the URL when the Web server is enabled e Subject Enter the subject of the e mail using up to 32 alphanumeric characters The default setting is Alarm_Ssummary e Header1 Header2 Enter header 1 and header 2 using up to 64 characters e Send alarm action Release number 3 or later To send an e mail when an alarm occurs and when it is cleared select ON OFF To only send an e mail when an alarm occurs select ON e Include tag ch in Subject Release number 3 or later Select ON to include a tag number in the subject If the tag number is not set the corresponding channel number is included 3 64 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN Scheduled Periodic data Specify the settings for sending e mail at scheduled times e Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select ON to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Interval Select the inter
230. in operating loop designation can be entered With style 2 or earlier settings for loops turned ON in Program Control under Internal Loops in the Setup tab can be entered Only the loops that are set as follows are displayed Setup tab gt Internal Loop gt Program control to On During cascade control even numbered loops within the same terminal block are not displayed IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 35 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations 5 36 Start code Select the operation start condition from the following Note that only the possible loop conditions are displayed Starting target setpoint start PV1 to PV 6 ramp prioritized PV start time prioritized ramp start not displayed for segment time ramp setting method Wait action setting Set the wait zones for 6 number of loops x 5 number of zones CX1000 2 number of loops x 5 number of zones in the range of EUS 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span For style 3 or later the wait action setting for loops turned ON in operating loop designation can be entered With style 2 or earlier settings for loops turned ON in Program Control under Internal Loops in the Setup tab can be entered Wait time Set the wait time in hh mm ss format selectable range 00 00 00 to 99 59 59 for all the available zones The setting applies to the same zones in each loop Wait time cannot be set if the wait zone for all loops is set to OFF
231. ind ae MIX Timer J Manual Sample IE ALL DIGITAL J Event Action J File Custom menu DIGITAL S BSS BARGRAPH BARGRAPH Copy Details Copy Enter the view group name Select the type of views to be displayed or drag and drop the view icons Paste iew group 1 xj Group Name UE mr miar m a View 1 View 3 ar ia DIGITAL i View Kind SL veo BARGRAPH OVERVIEW View Group m View Group ETET AA TT MESSAGE MODBUS CLIENT J JF it Jii Ht RELAY REPORT DATA OLUMN BAR Select the group to be displayed Selectable view types Group Name Up to 16 characters can be entered for the group name View Kind The view group is made up of four screens Select the type of screen to display in each screen View Group Up to four view groups can be registered IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 Entering General Settings Message General setting 1 Daylight Saving Time I Group Fore ean Message Characters I Timer 1 Manual Sample I Event Action 1 File I Menu Customize Enter a message to be written to the group of up to 32 alphanumeric characters O gt n Q c y gt eQ or gt lt lt NO IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 23 4 5 Entering General Settings Timer 4 24 e cert seting _ _ Daylight Saving Time Group J Display C View group Message Timer J Manual Samp
232. ined embedded inserted or used in the medium hereinafter called the Yokogawa Software Program By opening this package or plastic wrapping hereinafter called Package enclosing the Yokogawa Software Program you acknowledge that you understand and agree to the Terms and Conditions of the Software License hereinafter called Terms and Conditions which is written in the documentation and separately attached Accordingly the Terms and Conditions bind you The Yokogawa Software Program and its related documentation including ownership of copyright shall remain the exclusive property of Yokogawa or those third parties from whom sublicensed software in the Yokogawa Software Program is licensed Yokogawa hereby grants you permission to use the Yokogawa Software Program on the conditions that you agree to the Terms and Conditions before you open the Package and or install it in or onto a computer IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU CANNOT OPEN THE PACKAGE AND MUST IMMEDIATELY RETURN IT TO YOKOGAWA OR ITS DESIGNATED PARTY Terms and Conditions of the Software License Yokogawa Electric Corporation a Japanese corporation hereinafter called Yokogawa grants permission to use this Yokogawa Software Program hereinafter called the Licensed Software to the Licensee on the conditions that the Licensee agrees to the terms and conditions stipulated in Article 1 hereof You as the Licensee hereinafter
233. ing procedure please make sure that the communication method and parameters are correct For details see section 2 3 Setting the Communication Method 1 Click the Receive Data button or select Comm Receive Setting from the menu bar i Hardware Configurator Nes Bi Hardware Configurator NewFile File Comm Setting syst File Comm Setting System View He E DSHS Send Setting Action F Measure channel The Network dialog box appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button gt Ethernet Address User Mame User ID Password RS 422 4655 Cancel The Receive Data dialog box appears 2 Click the OK button IN Receive Setting from Connecting Hardware i Cancel The software receives the setup data from the DX and displays it i S P Receive Data 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 1 Starting the Harware Configurator Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New System 1 Click the New button or choose File New from the menu bar Hardware Configurator Newh E Hardware Contigur E Ctr The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the DXAdvanced tab 0 Point NOME WUE SIET 2 Enter all settings on the DXAdvanced tab then click the OK button The DX1000 DX2000 setting screen in displayed Loading Existing Setup Data 1 Click the Open button or choose File Open from the menu bar
234. ings for PV PV1 PV2 or SP Enter PV if the control mode is single loop control or cascade control or PV1 PV2 for 2 input switching control SP can be entered when the Setup tab s Internal Loop gt Remote Setting is set to Remote Mode Select ON or OFF ON Activates the equation OFF Assigns the following control input channels to the equation Single loop Cascade 2 input switching 2 input switching a control control control 4 loops control 6 loops mode Pv sP_ PV 1 sP __ Pv1 PV2 SP__ Pv1 PV2 SP Equation Enter the PV SP equation If the mode is OFF the equation cannot be entered PV range PV or PV1 Set the maximum value minimum value decimal place 0 4 and units using 6 alphanumeric characters or less Set the max and min values between 30000 and 30000 such that max gt min and max min lt 30000 PV1 can be set even if the mode is OFF Input Switching PV1 Set within the PV range Set the decimal place 0 4 upper limit U and lower limit L When setting Method to Range in Control Action under the Setup tab s Internal Loop item and when setting the upper limit U lower limit L and Method to PV High only the upper limit value is set If you set Method to Signal the PV Input Switching setting is not available This can be set even if the Mode is OFF IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Settings Ratio Remote Turns ON when a g
235. is displayed as a mark or a bar graph Trend Line Set the line width of the trend in dots 1 to 3 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 Entering General Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN Grid Select the number of grids to be displayed in the waveform display area of the trend display Settings Description 4 to 12 Displays a grid that divides the display width into 4 to 12 sections Auto Displays the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group Bar Graph Derection Select Bar graph derection Brightness Select a value from 1 to 6 2 by default Larger the value brighter the display becomes Backlite Save Mode Settings Description OFF Disables the backlight saver Dimmer Dims the display if there is no operation for a given time Timeoff Turns the backlight OFF if there is no operation for a given time Backlight Saver Time Select a value from 1 min to 1h If the specified time elapses without any key operation or alarm occurrence the LCD backlight switches to the specified mode Backlight Restore Settings Description Key The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed Key amp Alarm The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed or when an alarm occurs Trend Background Set the background color of the operation screen to White default setting or Black Historical Trend Background Select the background color of the historical trend
236. is specified 30000 to 30000 the decimal place is the same setting as the scale value e Other channels Value in the measurable range of the selected range Example 2 0000 to 2 0000 for 2 V range 4 8 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Alarm Detect IM 04L41B01 64EN Four alarms Alarm 1 to 4 can be specified on each channel Type Select H L h I R r Tort The selectable alarms vary depending on the input mode and computation type For details see chapter 3 in the MV1000 MV2000 User s Manual IM MV1000 01E Alarm value Alarm is generated using the specified value as the boundary The selectable range of alarm values vary depending on the input mode and range Alarm delay Set the alarm delay time to an integer between 1 and 3600 seconds Alarm is generated when the measured value stays above or below the specified alarm value for the specified time delay period Note MV1000 MV2000 specifications e The alarm delay time takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval For example if the alarm delay time is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s the actual delay time is 6 s e The delay alarm has the following special operations e If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting when a delay alarm is set on a computation channel the alarm is turned On after the specified period delay period el
237. iven ratio is applied to SP When turned ON set the ratio in the range from 0 0001 30000 Set the decimal place in the range from 0 to 4 Remote Bias You can select ON or OFF to determine whether bias is applied to SP When turned ON set the bias value in the PV range of EUS 100 to 100 Math Error If a computation error occurs specify whether to process it as a PV SP overrange or underrange Constants Set the constants to be used for PV SP computation analog retransmission and logic computation Constants are common for analog retransmission and logic computation Analog Retransmission IM 04L41B01 64EN beta i r E Retransmission Output Span Point L aE O E 2 PDAlarm O Operation Related o Control Function Retransmission iode OFF ON LOOPOM1 pr Loop Math Error ie Over e Under LOOPOs LoOoPo4 LOOPOS LOOPOE 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Sets the equation and output span on loops whose control mode is analog retransmission Mode Select ON or OFF ON Activates the equation OFF Analog retransmission does not function Equation Enter the analog retransmission equation Output Span Set the maximum value minimum value decimal place 0 4 and units using 6 alphanumeric characters or less Set the max and min values between 30000 and 30000 such that max gt min and max min lt 30000 Math Error Select whether to set to an overrange or u
238. k here to open a dialog box selection dialog box for specifying a comment text Click the desired channel block numbers to select them Enter values in the Comment txt block no boxes check the character strings that appear and click OK Temperature 10 Location Number The position of the annunciator window Model Displayed Windows DX1000 24 or less DX2000 80 or less Use Set the annunciator position that you want to use to ON Starting with 1 consecutively set all annunciator positions that you want to use to ON After a position has been set to OFF all of the positions after it will also be turned off even if they are set to ON CH No and Level You can assign alarms to annunciator windows by specifying channel numbers and alarm levels You can set Level to 1 2 3 4 or All If you select All all of the alarms in the specified channel are assigned to the specified window Comment txt block No You can select a text string label to display in the annunciator window by selecting a comment text block number IM 04L41B01 64EN Timer IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings Daylight Saving Time Group Display View group Message Comment Annunciator Timer Event Action File Menu Customize Web Report Changes the upper lower display area Timer used by event action Used also in the TLOG computation of th
239. larm Relay Remote Control Action Pi Scan IntervaliMemory PID Number N a a an Control Interval Q 250ms 500m Key LockLogin sa A Sar Zone PID a OFF on i Temperature PI Aue Restart Mode Time zone Fixed point Gi Continue Manual Auto _ Network Program Gi Continue Manual Reset Control Action Initial PID i Temp Press Flow d Internal Loop at o iD D S Y WT A Ft E E i zt Bi I 4 L a a P 5 l 6 ct 5 e 4 Control input channel Auto tuning al OFF on af CEE KELE PSP math function oFF Gi oN External Loop CLOG Error g Skip Error PID Number Set between 1 and 8 If the number is changed the program pattern for the program control option will be initialized Control Interval Set to 250ms 500ms or 1s However when A D Integrate under Scan Interval Memory is set to 100ms you can only select 1s Zone PID Turn ON or OFF Restart Mode Set to Continue Manual or Auto With the program control option the choices are Continue Manual or Reset Initial PID Set to Temp or Press Flow 6 4LOOP Select only for CX2000 Set to 6 or 4 loops This selection is only available when the LOOP setting in the System Configuration dialog box is set to 6LOOP Auto Tuning Turn ON or OFF PV SP Computation Function CX Style Number S3 or Later Turn the PV SP computation function ON or OFF When ON you can set the PV SP equation IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 7 00
240. lating Can t store settings Stop calculations computation E6008 Now Controlling Can t store settings Stop controlling IM 04L41B01 64EN 7 1 Buljooyussajqnoiy 7 1 Troubleshooting Message Code Message M6061 Data can t be processed after the year 2038 M6062 Any destroyed A D converter exists Any settings may be failed to store M6063 Sending finished M6064 Receiving finished IM 04L41B01 64EN Index Index Numeric 4 panel GIS DIA sa cxisicsexoaeteeti genceaagnndiemet nanaii 3 25 A A D WME QV ANG cocst so ceacccncies clnsasdotiannbadead tuassacshonaadendna eeeunacenraes 6 17 A D integration time we sscitincss sacieesctis cw dnciseexcexsunsdecorcuteuntceon s 3 50 4 35 absolute tiMer ooneoeenenenennnrrrenernenenrrernnrerrrnerrrrrrererrenene 3 29 ACCESS TIMEOUL 0 00 eee eececceeeeceeceeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeesaneeens 3 68 4 50 2 6 16 eR eee en ee eee ees 3 33 active alarmS caciricscaiactocdeathindacsacidnvindeienachevadetievaneiwedin 3 64 4 48 OIC SS vcsicersidencivesicoccuinereciovindandoraveanalemiens 3 63 3 74 4 47 4 54 address setup data cecececcceecceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeanees 3 76 4 55 adjust the Setup data ccccccsscecesseeceeeeseeseesseeeeees 5 71 6 26 EAC ANS DUN gectceccnssgoasgiesaceaan cen wane asic snieeceiceuseaasiceteeanetgcucaedyes 2 2 advanced security option AS1 DX1000 DX2000 2 1 alarm 3 10 4 9 5 22 5 44 5 55 5 59 6 6 6 16 AlALM PE
241. le J Event Action File Menu Customize Copy Details Changes the upper lower display area Timer Timer used by event action Used also in the TLOG computation of the computation function Up to four timers 1 to 4 can be set e When Using an Absolute Timer e Mode Select Absolute e Time interval Select the interval from the available settings between 1min to 24h e Ref time Set the time in the range of hour 0 to hour 23 e When Using a Relative Timer e Mode Select Relative e Time interval Set in the range from 00 01 1 min to 24 00 24 hours Hour Set in the range from 0 to 24 Min Set in the range from 0 to 59 e Reset at Math Start ON Resets the timer when computation is started The resetting of the timer is not considered to be a timeout Even if the timer is used as an event the action is not executed IM 04L41B01 64EN Manual Sample IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 Entering General Settings Match Time Timer Set the time match condition used in event action These timers are also used in TLOG computation of the computation function You can set four match time timers 1 to 4 e Kind Daily Set the time match condition of a day Weekly Set the time match condition of a week Monthly Set the time match condition of a month Year Sets the time match condition for a year Set the items with check marks in the following table depending on the Kind setting Setup tem foy Weekly Monthly
242. le settings You cannot specify a sampling rate that is faster than the scan interval Mode Settings Description Free Records data continuously Single Records data when the trigger condition is met Repeat Records data each time the trigger condition is met Data length Select the size of a record data file The recorded data is divided by the file size specified here The available data lengths vary depending on the number of memory sampling channels and the Sample rate setting Sample rate Sample rate Selectable range asmi min to 25 ms ___ min to 250 ms_ min to 500 ms _ min to EE min to of data length 4 1 2 re 3 7 m Sample rate Sample rate Selectable range 2s min to Bs min to fos min to sos hour to fmin hour to of data length 14 31 31 31 m 31 Sample rate Sample rate Selectable range 2min hour to Smin hour to 40 min __ hour to of data length 31 days 31 days 31 days Selectable on the MV1004 MV1008 and MV2008 Pre Trigger Specify the range when recording data before the trigger condition is met Select the range as a percentage of the data length from 0 5 25 50 75 95 and 100 If you do not want to record the data existing before the trigger condition is met select 0 Trigger Signal Key Select ON if you want to activate the trigger using key operation IM 04L41B01 64EN Custom Menu IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 Entering General Settings
243. ll indemnify the Licensee only by paying back the price amount of the Licensed Software which Yokogawa has received from the Licensee THE FOREGOING PARAGRAPHS STATE THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF YOKOGAWA AND ANY THIRD PARTY LICENSING THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE TO YOKOGAWA WITH RESPECT TO INFRINGEMENT OF THE INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PATENT AND COPYRIGHT Article 6 Liabilities 6 1 If and when the Licensee should incur any damage relating to or arising out of the Licensed Software or service that Yokogawa has provided to the Licensee under the conditions herein due to a reason attributable to Yokogawa Yokogawa shall take actions in accordance with this Agreement However in no event shall Yokogawa be liable or responsible for any special incidental consequential and or indirect damage whether in contract warranty tort negligence strict liability or otherwise including without limitation loss of operational profit or revenue loss of use of the Licensed Software or any associated products or equipment cost of capital loss or cost of interruption of the Licensee s business substitute equipment facilities or services downtime costs delays and loss of business information or claims of customers of Licensee or other third parties for such or other damages Even if Yokogawa is liable or responsible for the damages attributable to Yokogawa and to the extent of this Article 6 Yokogawa s liability for the Licensee s dama
244. ls MC1 option DX2000 Note e The trend digital and bar graph displays are shown in the specified order e Achannel can be assigned to multiple groups e The same channel cannot be assigned multiple times in a group IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN Trip line Set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display Use Turn ON the trip lines you want to display Position Set the position in the range of 0 to 100 of the display width Color The default colors are red green blue and yellow If you want to change the color select from the 24 available colors Trend Line Set the line width of the trip line in dots 1 to 3 3 21 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 5 Entering General Settings Display i Daylight Saving Time i Group Display i VWiew oro ae ME ath alates Circular mme Penrevolutiaoniirew Message ee ae cial Save Inte al _ Comment ria Hicmar Geb time A Annunciator 1 Timer f Event Action E File Horizon Vertical G Wide Spit Menu Customize aera G oF on I Web Report _ WW epo Di ti g H 3 a Vi i Scale Digit ij Normal Fine Value Indicator Gy Mark Bargraph Full Gincie chon Cai New Cy Update Off G Dimmer amp Time off th EI Key G Key amp Alarm G White Black White G Black Cream Light Gray 10s E Logging e Trend interval div Select t
245. lue displays Burnout For 1 5V input the MV assumes that the sensor has burned out when the measured value falls below the scale lower limit by 5 of the scale width Example When the measured value is less than 5 when the scale is from 0 to 100 RJC Mode Sets the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple input Select Internal or External Settings Description Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of the MV External Uses an external reference junction compensation function When set to External Volt is displayed RJC voltage uV The compensation voltage to be added to the input Set the value in the range of 20000 uV to 20000 pV 4 36 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Report Click to display the channel selection screen Channel selection screen Click the channel you wish to set up J Environment Alarm 3 Scan Interval d Measure Function Weekday uiis Report p Time J Key Lock Login Ethernet Serial Report kind Select the type of report to be created Settings Description OFF Do not create a report Hour Creates hourly reports Day Creates daily reports Hour Day Creates hourly and daily reports Day Week Creates daily and weekly reports Day Month Creates daily and monthly reports Day Week day and Time hour Set the date or day of the week and the time when the report is to be created The specified date
246. m New file 5 1 Click the New button or pEr P Save ae select New on the File menu Save As Print Otrl P Preview f Print Setting aro 2 The System Configuration dialog box opens Click the CX tab System Configuration cx2000 cx1000 3 Select the appropriate items and click the OK button to IM 04L41B01 64EN OLOOP 2L00P id Yer 3 02 or later NONE ON Serial G NONE RS 232 RS 422 485 Media FOD ATA Q ZIP Alarm Relay E kemate I Batch return to the Hardware Configurator window Option ox sa For details about the settings in the System Configuration dialog box see section 5 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data Note In the procedure for the System Configuration dialog box make sure that the CX tab is selected before entering settings If the tab other than CX is selected the settings you enter will apply only to those instruments 5 3 000ZX3 000LX32 24 Bun uos o 5 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator the Hardware Configurator Window and System Configuration Settings Loading Existing Setup Data Open file 1 Click the Open button or select Open on the File menu Oper Save Cres Save As Print Gtrl P Preview Print Setting 2 The Open dialog box opens Open P x Look in SQCK2000PNL tsi ics al ce FCS 2000 pel Select a file with pcl
247. me axis Circular A trend display with a circular time axis Partial Turn Partial ON partially expand or OFF do not partially expand Trend Rate Switching ON Enables the function that switches the trend interval while the memory sampling is in progress The Second interval div item is displayed in the setting mode e When Trend Rate Switching is set to ON you cannot set Data Kind under Environment Basic Environment in the Basic setting tab to E D e This setting is fixed at OFF if you set Batch operation qty to 2 or higher on models with the multi batch function BT2 option release number 3 or later Write Group Settings Description Common Write the message to all groups Separate Write the message to the displayed group Power Fail Message ON A message is written when the DX recovers from a power failure while memory sampling is in progress Change Message ON Writes the time the interval is switched and the new trend interval as a message when the trend interval is switched On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option a message is written even when the setting mode setup items are changed during memory sampling IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Scale over Settings Description Free The value is set to over range if the value is less than 30000 and over range if the value is greater than 30000 excluding the decimal point The value is displa
248. mory stop i OFF ON Data Kind Settings Description Display Records display data ED Records display data and event data E D cannot be selected when Trend Rate Switching is turned ON under Environment Basic Environment in the Basic Setting tab Event Records event data Temperature Unit Select C or F Time zone Set the time zone of the region in which the MV will be used in terms of the time difference from GMT A negative value indicates that the local time is behind the GMT Time deviation limit Current time pp eee time a Time deviation limit When the time deviation between the time on the MV and the specified time is within the value specified here the time on the MV is gradually corrected Otherwise the clock is corrected immediately Select from 10 s to 5 min Select OFF to disables the function Example If Time deviation limit is set to 10s and the time on the MV is 10 hours 21 minutes 15 seconds the time on the MV is gradually corrected if the specified time is between 10 hours 21 minutes 5 seconds and 10 hours 21 minutes 25 seconds Date format Settings Display Example Y M D 2005 11 30 M D Y 11 30 2005 D M Y 30 11 2005 D M Y 30 11 2005 Applied Range The format is applied to the date displayed on the screen It does not change the date format on the setup screen of the date time the date in the output data via communications the date saved along with the data and the date
249. mputation function in the control basic settings is turned ON or OFF When PV SP computation function is OFF The control input settings vary depending on the Control Mode setting selected under Internal Loop in the Setup tab You can make settings for the inputs PV1 PV2 Remote and PVrange They appear in the following situations it Remote Prange ouam OO even oops a aoe Odd foops OL Of Evenloops O l PVSwitching odd foops O O oO oO Even loops Analog Re transmission Odd loops O Oo 7 Style 3 or later Even loops O _ O With 6 loops disabled when 6 4LOOP Select set to 6 loops Remote appears if the Setup tab s Internal Loop gt Remote setting is set to Remote The settings displayed depend on the input type PV 1 PV2 Remote and PVrange but the settings are the same Select the loop number Control Loop Pv m Control Input Control Input SCALEM SV Qtemp scae 1 5v J PIDJAlarm Mode Operation Related Range Type Linearizer Span Control Function LOOPO2 Scale LOOPO3 LOOPO4 P Sart LOOPOB E Bias P Fitter SCALE 1 5V PV1 PV2 Remote Select the channel measurement mode from Temp Scale or 1 5V Mode PV1 PV2 Remote Select a channel input mode of VOLT TC or RTD When SCALE 1 5V is set to 1 5V the mode is fixed VOLT IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Se
250. n be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Can be specified when the MV is configured to record display data Can be specified when the MV is configured to record event data Set the message number and the destination Set the message destination to all groups All or a group number Display Update Interval Change Can be specified when the function for switching between the trend update interval and the secondary update interval is enabled IM 04L41B01 64EN File IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 Entering General Settings Settings Description Manual Sample Timer Reset Cannot be specified when the event is set to Timer Display Group Specify the number of the group to be displayed Change Flag Can be specified on M1 and PM1 options Time ADJUST Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote Panel Load Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote General setting Daylight Saving Time File I Group Directory Mame I Display Header LA View group Structure BatchName G Date G Serial d Timer File format i Binary Qe Text I Manual Sample I Event Action j Event Data I Menu Customize 1 2 3 4 roo a Copy Baete Copy Details Directory name Set the name of the directory on the storage medium for saving the data on the external storage medium Up to 20 characters Symbols that ca
251. n be used and _ Strings that cannot be used AUX CON PRN NUL CLOCK COM1 to COM9 and LPT 1 to LPT9 Header Set the header comment to be written to the data file Up to 50 characters Structure Sets the structure of the file name when saving data Settings Description Date Serial number user assigned character string date Serial Serial number user assigned character string Batch Serial number batch name when using the batch function File name Set the user assigned section of the file name Up to 16 characters Symbols that can be used and File Format Settings Description Text Display data files and event data files are in text format Binary Display data files and event data files are in binary format Field Title Field Characters Set the string Title of field Up to 20 characters Characters Up to 30 characters 4 27 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bun yuo Ka 4 5 Entering General Settings Event Date 4 28 General setting Event Data Scan Interval Mode Data Length Pre Trigger 1 Timer Trigger Signal Key OFF G ON 1 Manual Sample 1 Event Action File File S Evert Data 1 Menu Customize Event related settings are enabled when Data Kind is set to E D or Event in Basic Environment under Environment in the Basic Setting tab Sample rate Select the data recording interval from the availab
252. n in which the waveform of each channel is to be displayed Specify positions on the display scale for the upper and lower limits The conditions for setting the zones are as follows e Range 0 to 100 The lower limit L must be less than the upper limit e The difference between the lower and upper limits is at least 5 For details see section 5 7 in the MV1000 MV2000 User s Manual IM MV1000 01E Scale display position Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 10 for the MV2000 or from 1 to 6 for the MV1000 Select OFF if you do not wish to display the scale Scale divide position Select the number of main scale marks on the trend display from 4 to 12 and C10 C10 The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks and scale values are indicated at 0 30 50 70 and 100 positions on the trend display Bar display position Select Normal Center Lower or Upper Bar divide number Select number of divisions of the scale on the bar graph display IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Partial Partial Expanded Display Bound position Set the boundary for the partial expanded display The range is from 1 to 99 Boundary Set the value that is to be the boundary between the reduced section and the expanded section in the range of minimum span value 1 digit to maximum span value 1 digit For channels that are set to scaling th
253. n the Basic setting tab Message direction Set the display direction of messages to Horizontal or Vertical When the trend is set to Vertical the message direction is fixed to Horizontal Scale Digit Select the Normal or Fine Fine If the scale value is two digit display it can be changed to three digits For example if the scale range is 49 0 to 51 0 the scale values are displayed using 3 digits as shown below 09 0 a Mba an BBG assole pad a Bhab BES Value Indicator The current value is displayed as a mark or a bar graph Full Circle Action Settings Description Allclear Clears the entire waveform when one revolution of waveform is recorded and continues the recording of the next revolution Divclear Clears one division of the old waveform when the remaining amount of waveform to be recorded falls to one division and continues the recording Trend Line Set the line width of the trend in dots 1 to 3 Grid Select the number of grids to be displayed in the waveform display area of the trend display Settings Description 4 to 12 Displays a grid that divides the display width into 4 to 12 sections Auto Displays the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first assigned channel of the group 3 23 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 5 Entering General Settings 3 24 Display Bar Graph Derection Select Bar graph derection Brightness Select a value from 1 t
254. n the range from 20000 uV to 20000 uV When PV SP computation is ON it is set according to Control Input Channels on page 5 12 Tuning Setting Tuning item ON OFF Select On for the parameters that you want to display in the tuning window and Off for other parameters ID Select the ID of the item from the following SP target set point A1 alarm 1 setting A2 alarm 2 setting A3 alarm 3 setting A4 P proportional range integration time D differentiation time OH upper output limit OL lower output limit MR manual reset H hysteresis DR control action direction PO preset output BS1 measured value 1 input bias FL1 measured value 1 input filter BS2 measured value 2 input bias FL2 measured value 2 input filter RT ratio setting RBS remote input bias RFL remote input filter or W01 W36 control computation constant BS1 FL1 BS2 FL2 and RFL cannot be selected when PV SP computation is ON BS1 FL1 BS2 FL2 RT RBS RFL and W01 W36 apply to style number S3 or later Name Specify the name of the item using up to 6 alphanumeric characters IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings DI DO SW Regist Contact Input o Mho OO controttoap O Comod contrat Setting Setup r Alarm Felay Remote DEOS Regist o scan IntervaliMemary Module Setting Measure channel SP No selection source a Timer ee POE ee OE J Report o Temperature
255. n using serial communications between the CX and other devices set the parameters required for serial communications If MODBUS MASTER is selected in the Protocol settings you must click the Modbus master tab and enter Modbus master settings Click this tab e o GGT ree TP Serial Madbusmaster Web o scan IntervaliMemary rene Baud Rate i20o a soon s00 19200 35400 Key Lock Login Data Length a7 we Timer Parity oE oD GEVEN oe R5232 Handshaking Gi OFF OFF QP xOnm xON xOnMRS csrs Temperature 5 RS4224 486 Address P 5 Tne ane FS4224485 Protocol Gi NORMAL GF MODBUS QIMODBUS MASTER LADDER n Network d Control Action o Internal Loop T DDOS A Regist Control Relay 3 External Loop Memory Data Out G Ethernet i Serial 5 67 000ZX3 000LX32 24 Bun uos o 5 11 Network Settings Modbus Master Settings When using the CX as a Modbus master enter the Modbus master basic and command settings For details about the settings refer to the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM 04L31A01 17E Click this tab J Scan IntervalMemory Measure channel Basic Key Lock Lagin Read cycle Timer Timeout an E Report Hipy Retrials OFF E Temperature Aux Command setting Time zone y Network H Commu Data Slave IConrol Action First Last Address Type Internal Loop 1 _JOFF cor Bco B 30001 nTie B DIDO SW Regist 2 ace 30001 INT16 El
256. nction Basic Settings External Loop 5 14 For each loop there are Basic Setting External Loop Setting Parameter Address Setting and Tuning Setting items For details on external loops see the CX1000 CX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L31A01 17E Basic Setting Tab SlarmRelay Remote Scan Interval Memory Channel Key Lock Login Timer Control Action iReport Comm On Off N Modbus address Time zone Connecting Model Network Control Action Internal Loop Temperature Contact Input Control Relay External Loop e Control Action Comm On Off Select to turn the external loop function the Green Series Comm function ON or OFF If you select OFF all settings below will be disabled Modbus address Enter the Modbus address of the controller used in external loop control from 1 to 247 Connecting Model Select the type of connected UT series controller Select Other when connecting to a controller other than a UT series instrument The following settings vary depending on the selected instrument External Loop Setting Tab AlarmRelay Remote Scan IntervalMemory Channel Key Lock Login External Loop Setting Timer External Loop Setting Report Temperature Aux PY ISP OUT Time zone Network Control Action Tag TagComment J Internal Loop Control Span Contact Input Control Relay Control Mode External Loop Control Output Alarm e Control Action Loop Select
257. nderrange when computed results in an error Constants Set the constants to be used for PV SP computation analog retransmission and logic computation 5 21 000ZX3 000LX32 24 Bun uos o 5 4 Control Function General Settings 5 22 PID Alarm Control Loop Control Input PID Alarm Operation Related J Linearizer J Control Function PID Parameters jective Tage cetport setpoint sel Miata 200 0 1370 0 p a 200 0 1370 0 1370 0 TODLS E ms E N E a a E Alarm Specify an alarm for each loop Type Select the type of alarm from the following PV High PV Low Deviation High Deviation Low Deviation H amp L Dev within H amp L SP High SP Low Output High and Output Low Standby Turn standby ON or OFF For details about the alarms that can be turned on or off refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Relay Select the type of relay DO001 to DOO06 Loop2 DO101 to DO106 Loop4 CX2000 only DO201 to DO206 Loop6 with 4 6 loop selection selection is only possible for a CX2000 set to 6 loops RO001 RO012 Control extension DIO only a CX2000 with the control extension DIO SW001 SW036 internal switches SW001 SW018 for the CX1000 Style 3 or later Hysteresis Specify the alarm hysteresis in EUS 0 0 to 10 0 PID Parameters Specify the PID parameters for each loop Target setpoint Specify the target setpoint in EU 0 0 to
258. ned ON in operating loop designation can be entered With style 2 or earlier settings for loops turned ON in Program Control under Internal Loops in the Setup tab can be entered Only the loops that are set as follows are available Setup tab gt Internal Loop gt Control mode to a mode other than Off and Program control to On During cascade control even numbered loops within the same terminal block are not displayed e Segment time Set the segment time in the range of 0 00 01 to 99 59 59 0 hour 0 min 1 s to 99 hour 59 min 59 s This item is available at all times during segment time setting method and only when soak is selected during segment time ramp setting method e Ramp rate time unit Set the ramp rate time unit for ramps to Hour or Minute This item is available only during segment time setting method e Ramp Set the ramp per unit time in the range of 1 digit to EUS 100 of the measurement span The measurement span and decimal point position of the selectable range vary depending on the smallest numbered loop to be specified This item is available only during ramp in the segment time ramp setting method e Segment PID group No Select the segment PID group number 1 to 8 This item is not displayed when zone PID is selected Only the PID group numbers that can be specified through Setup tab gt Control action gt PID number are displayed IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 6 Program Co
259. nfigurator can be used to transmit and receive the setup data change the setup data and create new setup data for a CX1000 CX2000 of style number S1 S3 The setting screen may differ from your actual screen Starting the Hardware Configurator See section 1 3 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 1 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbutinbiyyuog a 5 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator the Hardware Configurator Window and System Configuration Settings Loading Setup Data from the CX Before performing the following procedure make sure that the communication method and parameters are correct For details see section 2 3 Setting the Communication Method Receive Data icon Ent Hardware Configurator HewF ile File Comm Meas Er H are Configurator New File File Comm Setting System View Help 1 Click the Receive Data icon or select Comm gt Receive Setting Send Setting Action 3 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Receive Data dialog box appears N Receive Setting from Connecting Hardware 4 Click OK to start receiving data Note Do not load setup data when entering program control function settings on the CX or when a medium is being accessed A communications error can result 5 2 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 1 Starting the Hardware Configurator the Hardware Configurator Window and System Configuration Settings Creating Setup Data by Configuring a New Syste
260. ng point type from the slave Write Write the measurement channel 16 bit signed integer type to the slave W Math Write the measurement channel 32 bit signed integer type to the slave Read can be selected on MV2000s with the external input channel MC1 option installed R Math and W Mat can be selected on models with the computation function M1 option installed e Start channel End channel master channel numbers Enter the first and last channel numbers of input output The range of channels that you can enter varies depending on the command type as follows Read 201 to 440 R Math C01 to C60 Write 1 to 48 W Math 101 to 160 IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 53 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bun yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings e Address Enter the address of the slave device in the range of 1 to 247 e Register Set the register number of the server For an input register select in the range of 30001 to 39999 and 300001 to 365536 For a hold register select in the range of 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465536 The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 in the MV1000 MV2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM MV1000 17E Type Select INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT L The type you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 in the MV1000 MV2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM MV1000 17E 4 54 IM 04L41B01 64E
261. ng the remote control terminal select OFF e Decimal Point Type Release number 3 or later You can set the decimal point type for the display and files saved in text format You can select Point or Comma e Menu display Release number 3 or later To display Basic setting mode menu item for switching to basic setting mode in the setting mode menu select ON IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 41 3 6 Entering Basic Settings 3 42 Batch Batch when the multi batch function is not installed Select ON to use the batch function Batch operation qty when the BT2 multi batch function is installed release number 3 or later Specify the number of batches to use Settings Description OFF Disables the multi batch function and the batch function 1 Enables the single batch function 2 or higher Enables the multi batch function The table below shows the number of batches supported by the DX1000 and DX2000 Model Number of Batches Supported DX1000 2 to6 DX2000 release number 3 2 to 6 standard memory model 2 to 12 large memory model DX2000 release number 4 2 to 12 Digit of lot number Select the number of digits of the lot number from 4 6 or 8 Select OFF to disable the lot number Auto increment ON Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to the lot number of the current measurement 1 Trend Type Function for the DX2000 only Settings Description T Y A trend display with a linear ti
262. nge of internal switches from the first internal switch to take the AND logic All subsequent switches will be set to OR logic 3 47 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Relay AND Select the relays that are to operate using AND logic Set the range of relays from the first alarm relay to take the AND logic All subsequent relays will be set to OR logic Available settings are None 101 101 only 101 102 101 and 102 101 103 101 to 103 etc Only alarm output relays that are installed are valid Note When reflash is turned ON the operation of the first three output relays is fixed to OR logic Specifying AND produces no effect Relay action Select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de energized when an alarm occurs The setting applies to all alarm output relays Relay hold You can choose to make the alarm output relays behave in the following ways This setting applies to all relays When you use the alarm annunciator function release number 3 or later the setting follows the annunciator sequence Settings Description Unhold Turns the output relay OFF when the alarm condition is released returns to normal condition Hold Holds the output relay at ON until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed Relay Action on ACK You can use this setting on DX firmware version 2 0x or later When you use the alarm annunciator function release number 3 or later the setting follo
263. ngs of the Meas Math and Control Loop tabs are void Batch Batch Option Style3 or later Set the information to be added to data written to the CX internal memory Temperature Unit Set the temperature unit from C Celsius or F Fahrenheit 1 Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Comm amp larm Relay Remote Scan IntervalWemory Channel Key Lock Login Timer Report Temperature Ale Time zone Network iControl Action Internal Loop Contact Input Control Relay i External Loop Time Zone Temperature Temperature Unit E ie r Time zone GMT of 00 Aus Tag Channel Qi channel Tag Memory Alarm th Language i English all Japanese Partial Gi Not Use Set the difference in time from the GMT For example with Japanese time this is normally 9 00 Slam Relay Remote o Scan Interval Memory Channel J Key Lock Lagin o Timer J Report i Temperature J AUX Time zone J Network iControl Action d Internal Loop Contact Input Control Relay _ External Loop 9 52 Temperature Temperature Unit wc Gi a Time zone GMT of o0 Aux Taq Channel G chanel Tag Memory Alarm 1h Language m English Japanese Partial Gd Not Use IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings To enter measurement channel settings click the Meas tab Or you can selec
264. nit Enter the unit using up to six characters Low cut Can be set when the mode is 1 5V and when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT selected Select ON to use the low cut function Low cut value Can be set when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT selected Set the low cut value in the range of 0 0 to 5 0 of the input span Measured value Result of square root computation Low cut value F Input value 3 8 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Calibration Correction Set the input and output values for the calibration correction The number of set points including the start and end points can be specified in the range 2 to 16 x Correct Click to delete the selected row Click to add set points rows to the number of calibration set points Condition X1 lt X2 lt X3 lt X4 lt X5 Calibration set points Number of set points Selectable Range of Input and Output Values e Channels on which linear scaling is specified 30000 to 30000 the decimal place is the same setting as the scale value e Other channels Value in the measurable range of the selected range Example 2 0000 to 2 0000 for 2 V range IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 9 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 Bulinbyu0g e 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Alarm Detect 3 10 Four alarms Alarm 1 to 4 can be specified on each channel Type Select H L h I R r Tor
265. nment i Alarm 1 Scan Interval Measure Function Not Q Use Report oF ON J Remote I Key Lock ahd E 1 Login Ga Not Use Ethernet OFF amp ON i TCPIP OFF i FIP Modbus client 2 E Mail eee SNTP client i S Server functions amp Not Use I Connect limits ij Not Use e Use Select Use or Not don t use e Web server Use For the Web item under Server select Use or Not don t use When Use is selected the Web page item is added to the basic setting mode menu Operator To set the operator page select ON Operator Access Control To use access control select ON You must enter a user name and password to display the operator page You must select Login as Key Security or Comm Security under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting tab and register users under the User Registration On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option perform the Login settings on the DX Command To write messages select ON Otherwise select OFF This setting is fixed at Not on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Monitor To display the monitor page on a browser select ON otherwise select OFF Monitor Access Control Same as the Operator Access Control e SNTP Server Use select Use or Not don t use e Modbus Server Use select Use or Not don t use e EtherNet IP Release number 3 or later Select whether
266. ns vi Contents Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Terms and Conditions of the Software LICENSE c ccecececcecececececececeecececececeeucceueaeaeaeeensnenseeeananes il How to Use This IV A sees crsese ssc set caceteacacueneet caved congtecte sn yeeceetecuanes deenueidenzesnaaecegenceiaat heat ecraventeanee IV Before using DAQSTANDARD 1 1 Overview of DAQSTANDARD eisscicecccsicesscacsonecescdhsnse isandticesenientvexencadseieesedetentesduhcbeeetaeunecs 1 1 DAQSTANDARD Software Package cccccccssssececeeeseeceseeceeseesesecsenseeeseuseeesaseaeees 1 1 About Hardware Configurator ope ceece rt pecs secre ssscetarsaseeceeeeneebasecaeceeticaeceteneise cece ceies 1 1 1 2 PC System Requirements oa cetc cies cop cc see cee ca cepecetsenacteusateecuescnst ORE ARREA Ekar ENa NRE RTS 1 2 Operaung System DG Jaren aE A EET E E 1 2 1 3 Staring Exiting the SOT ANG s onc cy ss coaiciresentiesxenncacaxseasausaiisteasananiecneasenedadtemensacactudseasieeSeetansuessee 1 3 1A Menu 2nd WOO EAS oiseatseatcesan csanencactenen sate ntacannmesatiuasesndn EES EEEE 1 4 POUT EG alerts ce T EAE EAA fo Saute A E AEA E T E E A 1 4 TOIGAN serierne EEA E E EERE EEE AEE O NA OER EN 1 5 1 5 Prning S600 Dila eiere eE ENEE aaae a aAA enter ene nen eee 1 6 Print Format Settings Only on the DX1000 DX2000 and MV1000 MV2000 1 6 Print Example Table csc secs ects ete innnan aaae alaaa aaa apaina 1 7 Print Example TN acres caseceasateenss
267. ntrol Related Setup Operations e Segment shift action Set the segment shifting action to Continue Hold hold after end of segment Local local mode after completing the last segment or Reset reset mode after completing the last segment Note When creating the program pattern data is created so that the segment set to Local or Reset is the last segment of program control e Wait action Set the wait action type to Shift or Within To disable the wait action select Off e Wait zone number Select the wait zone number from 1 to 5 This item is available only when Wait action is set to Shift or Within PV Event Set the PV Event Click this tab Set point PV Event TimeEve coer e Loop Set the target loop number 1 to 6 of the PV event only selectable loop numbers Up to 16 events can be assigned Select Off initial setting for the number of the loops to which the event is not to be assigned e Type Select the type of PV event from the following PV high limit PV low limit deviation high limit deviation low limit deviation high amp low limit deviation within high amp low limits SP high limit SP low limit output high limit and output low limit e Value Set the value in the following range according to the type of PV event PV SP event EU 0 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span Deviation high limit event low limit event EUS 100 0 to 100 0 of the measurement span
268. o 6 2 by default Larger the value brighter the display becomes Backlite Save Mode Settings Description OFF Disables the backlight saver Dimmer Dims the display if there is no operation for a given time Timeoff Turns the backlight OFF if there is no operation for a given time Backlight Saver Time Select a value from 1 min to 1h If the specified time elapses without any key operation or alarm occurrence the LCD backlight switches to the specified mode Backlight Restore Settings Description Key The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed Key amp Alarm The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed or when an alarm occurs Trend Background Set the background color of the operation screen to White default setting or Black Historical Trend Background Select the background color of the historical trend display from the following Settings White Black default setting Cream and Lightgray Scroll Time Set the switching interval from the available settings between 5s and 1 min The groups switch in ascending order Jump Default Display Returns to a preset display if there is no key operation for a specific time Settings Description 1min to 1h Time until switching the display OFF Disables the function FAVORITE Key action Release number 3 or later Action Settings Description History The historical trend of the currently displayed data appears when you pre
269. o ROG RO7 to R12 R13 to R18 R19 to R24 Report Groups DX2000 R01 to R10 R11 to R20 R21 to R30 R31 to R40 R41 to R50 R51 to R60 Sum Scale Set the sum scale to s to day to match the unit of the measured value Example If the unit of the measured value is m min select min OFF Sums as is the measured data per scan interval IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Remote Release number 3 or later I Environment i Alarm Scan Interval I Measure Function 1I Report S Remote I Key Lock Login Ethernet Number Remote control terminal numbers The number of settings that appears corresponds to the number of remote control terminals Remote Input Specify an operation for each remote control terminal Settings Description N O The remote signal rises when the contact input switches from open to closed and it falls when the contact input switches from closed to open N C The remote signal rises when the contact input switches from closed to open and it falls when the contact input switches from open to closed IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 53 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByuo0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Key Lock 3 54 I Environment i Alarm 1 Scan Interval Measure Function 2 Report Remote al Key Lock 2 Login Ethernet Enabled when Key Security is set to Keylock under Environment Detail Setting in the Basic Setting
270. o use Group name Set the group name up to 16 characters Channel Configuration Set up to 10 channels MV2000 or 6 channels MV1000 from measurement channels computation channels M1 and PM1 options and external input channels MC1 option MV2000 Note e The trend digital and bar graph displays are shown in the specified order e Achannel can be assigned to multiple groups e The same channel cannot be assigned multiple times in a group Trip line Set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display e Use Turn ON the trip lines you want to display e Position Set the position in the range of 0 to 100 of the display width e Color The default colors are red green blue and yellow If you want to change the color select from the 24 available colors e Trend Line Set the line width of the trip line in dots 1 to 3 General setting 3 Daylight Saving Time Logging SOLE Trend Interval div min B Save Interval 1h B Trend Display Update 2nd Interval ene ore Direction Horizon Vertical Gi Vide Gp Split Event Action Trend Clear i OFF ON File Message Direction Cy Horizon Vertical Menu Customize Scale Digit fa Normal Fine Value Indicator i Mark Bargraph I Timer Trend Line Bar Graph Direction Horizon G vertical Brightness Backlight Saver hlode Q off Dimmer amp Time off Backlight Saver Time Backlig
271. odel and options of the instrument For example for the DX1000 or for the DX2000 with eight channels or fewer the external function item cannot be selected If Pulse is selected blue the Math and Remote items are disabled 3 After changing the configuration and clicking the OK button the message System configuration has been changed The input configuration and data will be initialized Continue appears System configuration xj System configuration has been changed The input configuration and data will be initialized Continue za 4 Click the OK button to initialize the data IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 3 000ZXa 000 Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Settup Data Initializing the Setup Data 1 Choose Setting Initialize from the menu bar File Comm Setting System view Ee Lal Meas Channels Math Channels Ext thannels General Setting P Basic Setting F The Initialize dialog box opens lnitialize A Initialize current settings mea _ 2 Click the OK button to initialize the current settings The changed settings are restored to the condition when they were newly created 3 4 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Setting Operation You can select a range of channels and set each item at once Click and select from the list Click the text box to enter a number
272. ommand EV2 command USER key or remote control function Setting the FTP connection destination Consult your network administrator when setting parameters such as the primary secondary FTP servers port number login name password account and availability of the PASV mode e Primary Secondary You can specify two destination FTP servers Primary and Secondary If the primary FTP server is down the file is transferred to the secondary FTP server e Server Name Enter the name of the file transfer destination FTP server using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required Port No Enter the port number of the file transfer destination FTP server in the range of 1 to 65535 The default value is 21 e Login Name Enter the login name for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e Password Enter the password for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e Account Enter the account ID for accessing the FTP server using up to 32 alphanumeric characters e PASV Select ON when using the MV behind a firewall that requires the passive mode The default setting is OFF 4 43 000ZAWN 000 LAIN 24 Bun yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings e Initial Path Enter the directory of the file transfer destination using up to 64 alphanumeric characters The d
273. on 6 2 Setting the Measurement Channel IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 11 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 4 Configuring the Settings Screen Display Select this tab Trend Display Setting Display Update Interval Auto Save Interval Uzer Key Display Setting o Daylight Saving Batch Trend Graph Direction Bar Graph Direction Background Color Trend Line Width Trip Line Width Grid Division Auto Scroll Time Scale digit LED Setting LCD Brightness Backlight Saver Saver Time Restore Select the time per 1 division Select the display format of the trend and bar graph 1 minidiw H C Le Horizontal pan Vertical Horizontal 2 gt Horizontal ay Vertical Co White Black a 2 E a 2 E a Fine imn Demin Smin imn E mn Gein KEY KEY 4L4EM The screen saver function is activated when there is no key operation or alarm occurrence for the specified time period Recover by a key operation or alarm occurrence Recover by a key operation m E If you selected MV100 in the System Configuration dialog box User key on the Setting page will not be displayed Display update interval You can select the display update interval from 15 sec div 30 sec div 1 min div 2 min div 5 min div 10 min div 20 min div 30 min div 1 h div 2 h div 4 h div and 10 h div 1 Can be specified on the DX102 DX104 DX204 DX208 DX204C DX208C MV102 MV104 MV204 and
274. one oF 0 00 None oF D Set the value to the maximum value possible Set the value to the minimum value possible Enter the alarm delay time Enter the sampling count C Enter the tag C Enter the tag number Alarm 4 Alarm Dela Moving Average Type a Aes a Time unt Times 2 ei 0000 None 10 Sec B OFF 2 0 0000 Mone 10 Sec OFF Jo 10 Sec OFF oa eg 10 Sec B OFF 2 3 a oO 2 2 2 All ON or OFF Enter ine MSpray zong Turn ON OFF the partial d Select the graph setting expanded display Zone Partial On 1001 10 ce Center ON 0 0000 FON 100 2 Ho H center i 11 K 50 0 0000 OoN 100 3 E H center 412 Bron 50 0 01 BLIH 1004 gt H Normal 10 Ea rion 50 0 01 a a 4 3 3 a z 98 3 Select the channel display color Click here to set the calibratin correction Set the green band m g Select the mark type see page 3 9 Green Band Alarm Mark Color Calibration Correction LS eS TEER Inside 0 0000 0 0100 Fixed Off _ Outside Bo 0 0000 0 0100 Fixed Off inside 0 00 1 00 Fixed ON Off Outside M 0 00 1 00 Alarm 3 6 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Input Type Mode and Range Type Correspondence between difference computation scaling and square root computation DELTA SCALE and SQRT is as follows Mode OFF SKIP Yes VOLT voltage Yes TC thermocouple Yes RTD resistance temperatur
275. onstants in the list to your expression simply by clicking it For details related to the expression see the DX1000 DX2000 User s Manual Expression ABS Absolute value Click the tab to display a list of that item Memory tab has been added in release number 3 Subtraction SOR Square root Multiplication LOG Common logarithm i Division EXP Exponent a LNG Natural logarithm gt Measure channel OK Cancel Span Display Span and Point Sets the upper and lower limits of the display The range is from 9999999 to 99999999 Set the number of digits to the right the decimal to four digits or less 0 to 4 Unit Enter the unit using up to six characters TLOG TLOG Computation Timer type Select Timer or MatchTimeTimer Timer Select the number of the timer or match time timer release number 3 or later that you want to use Sum Scale Set the sum scale to s min h to match the unit of the measured value Example If the unit of the measured value is m min select min OFF Sums as is the measured data per scan interval Reset To reset the TLOG computed value at each interval select ON Alarm and Tag The settings are the same as the measurement channels For details see section 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channel Ext Channel 3 16 IM 04L41B01 64EN Rolling Average 3 4 Setting the Computation Channels ON OFF To take the rolling averag
276. onverted to a value within the span of 10 to 5 0 the value is converted to a value within a span of 100 if the scale setting is 5 0 In this case the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a span of 100 To prevent the display from becoming rough it is recommended that the scale be set so that this value is greater than 100 e You cannot set the same value to Scale L and Scale U e When the Mode is 1 5V or Sart Scale L must be less than Scale U IM 04L41B01 64EN 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Difference Computation DELTA Displays the difference between the input and the reference channel If difference computation is performed between channels that have different range and type settings the decimal position of the computed result is set to that of the channel computing the difference If the number of digits to the right of the decimal of the reference channel is greater than that of the channel computing the difference the reference value below the least significant digit of the channel computing difference is rounded beforehand Ref CH The reference channel for difference computation Square Root Computes and displays the square root of the input This setting can be used only when the input mode is set to VOLT voltage As necessary set the span scale and unit U
277. opped Reverse Direct Select reverse direct switching from Direct or Reverse Note Relay Hysteresis Value and Relay Hysteresis Point appear in PID Parameters when Control Output is set to On Off control under Setup gt Internal Loop gt Output process In that case PID Output Limit Shutdown and Manual Reset are not shown 5 23 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hulinbiyyu0og o 5 4 Control Function General Settings Operation Related 5 24 Control Loop Operation Related Supperssing Func OFF Overshoot Ramp rate Time Unit Q Hour Minute Second J Control Input m SP Ramp down rate PID Alarm E em e 570 0 Operation Related yiii _ Linearizer Tag Control Function TagComment LOOPO2 LOOPOS LOOPD4 Switching Histeresis P Reference Deviatio Operation Related Enter internal loop control operation related settings Suppressing Function Select OFF or Overshoot Ramp rate Time Unit Set the ramp rate time units SP Ramp down rate Set between 1 digit and EUS 100 of the measurement span SP Ramp up rate Set between 1 digit and EUS 100 of the measurement span Tag Specify a tag Use a maximum of 8 characters Tag Comment Specify a comment for the tag Use a maximum of 8 characters Zone PID Specify the internal loop control zone PID The zone PID setting appears when Zone PID is ON in Setup Control Action Reference Point displayed when
278. or control functions Starting and Stopping Measurement For the operating procedure see section 3 10 Displaying CX Hardware Information For the operating procedure see section 3 10 Hardware Information l Recorder type Firmware version Type Style Hardware Number of measurement channels MeasCh Number of computation channels sthch Ext ch Memory LOOP Option Memory capacity Number of control loops Cx1000 R3 02 128422652 Serial Media Alarm Relay Program Option RS 422 485 FDD 0 0 0 0 4 Math Func Ethernet Ladder Comm Status ox Serial number Number of channels assigned to external loops Optional 9 75 000ZX9 0001 XD 94 Buun uos o 5 17 Usable Characters The characters in the following table can be used when entering group names view group names messages comments to file headers save destination directory names the password for the key lock function and login parameters such as user names user ID and passwords Note and cannot be used for folder names where files are saved 5 76 IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter6 Configuring the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 6 1 Starting the Configurator The Configurator can transmit and receive the setup data change the setup data and create new setup data It can configure the following style numbers of DX and MV The setting screen may di
279. or the operating procedure see section 3 8 The setup file name extension is pnl 6 29 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 10 Printing the Setup Data For the operating procedure see section 1 5 You cannot select Print Format Settings 6 30 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 11 Starting and Stopping Measurement on the DX IM 04L41B01 64EN MV Checking the DX MV Hardware Information From this software you can start and stop the DX MV and display DX MV hardware information Starting and Stopping Measurement For the operating procedure see section 3 10 Display DX MV hardware information For the operating procedure see section 3 10 x Type M200 os E Recorder type Style R410 Firmware version Hardware 12735880 Serial number MeasCh a Number of measurement channels MathCh B Number of computation channels Memory 1200K Memory capacity Kg Optional Serial RS 232 Media ATA Alarm Relay 40 0 0 6 31 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn uoo 2 6 12 Characters that can be Used The characters in the following table can be used when entering a group name a view group name a message a comment to the file header a save destination directory name the password for the key lock function and login parameters such as the user name user ID and password Note and cannot be used for the name of the directory where files are to be saved 6 32 IM 04L41B01 64EN Chapter 7 Troubleshootin
280. orrected in the following cases e When the values of the items of the Meas Math tab are outside the range e When an invalid character string is used Click here to display the correction list Data adjustment dialog box If View Data Adjustment Dialog Box is checked the Data Adjustment dialog box will open when the data are not consistent at the time of the data check or at the time of data transmission Note Perform the data check before sending the new setup data to the DX100 DX200 MV 100 Mv200 6 26 IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 7 IM 04L41B01 64EN Sending the Setup Data to the DX MV E Hardware Configurator DX200 1_pnl File Comm Setting System View Help i Receive Setting 1 Click the Send Data icon or select Comm gt Send Setting 2 The Network dialog box appears re RS 232 Bonada Bava ete Parity Baud kates Patty Address 3 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Store dialog box appears gt IN Send Setting to Connecting Hardware Click OK to start sending the data A message appears to indicate when data transfer has stopped Click OK to close the message You cannot send data to the DX100 DX200 DX200C MV100 MV200 during memory sampling Note Of the network settings in the Setup tab the following items are not transmitted e IP Address under the TCP IP tab e All settings under the Serial tab 6 27
281. orresponding to the item IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 17 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bulinbiyuog ka 4 5 Entering General Settings Summer Time Group 4 18 General setting Daylight Saving Time Daylight Saving Time s1 Group Wot G Use 1 Timer I Manual Sample I Event Action File I Menu Customize On Off To switch between summer time and standard time select On Start Time Specify the date time to switch from standard time to summer time Set the month the nth week the day of the week and the time End Time Specify the date time to switdh from summer time to standard time Set the month the nth week the day of the week and the time Click to display the channel configuration trip line settings dialog box Summer time Group a eal 1 D View group ON GROUP 4 001 002 00 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009010 50 P Tener ON GROUP 2 CT ee Manual Sample ON GROUP 3 021 022 023 024 025 026 027 028 029 030 Event Action Message J File J Custom menu Group 1 x Channel Configuration O Tie O Use OFF G ON Group Name GROUP 1 Channel Configuration 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Meach manch xcn201_ ext cn261_ ext cnsa1_ eecnse Select channels to register to the group or set the trip line Cancel IM 04L41B01 64EN Display IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 5 Entering General Settings Use Turn On the groups you want t
282. ost name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters You do not have to set this parameter e Domain Name Set the network domain name that the MV1000 MV2000 belongs to using up to 64 characters You do not have to set this parameter e Server Primary Server Secondary Register up to two IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS servers e Domain Primary Domain Secondary Set up to two domain suffixes primary and secondary 4 41 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bun yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings 4 42 When obtaining the IP address from DHCP e DHCP Set DHCP to ON e DNS accession To automatically obtain the DNS server address select ON Otherwise select OFF If you select OFF you must set the IP address of the DNS server e Host Name Register To automatically register the host name select ON e Host Name Set the MV1000 MV2000 s host name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Domain Name Set the network domain name that the MV belongs to using up to 64 characters e Server Primary Server Secondary not necessary when DNS accession is enabled Register up to two IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS servers e Domain Primary Domain Secondary Set up to two domain suffixes primary and secondary Keep Alive To disconnect when there is no response to the test packets that are periodically sent select ON Otherwise select OFF Time out To use the application timeout function select ON Other
283. out encryption set POP3 Login to PLAIN To send the password with encryption set POP3 Login to APOP Alarm Specify the settings for sending e mail when alarms occur e Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select ON to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Active alarms Sends an e mail when an alarm occurs You can select ON Send e mail or OFF not send e mail for alarms 1 to 4 e Include INST Select ON to attach instantaneous value data when the alarm occurred e Include source URL Select ON to attach the source URL Attach the URL when the Web server is enabled e Subject Enter the subject of the e mail using up to 32 alphanumeric characters The default setting is Alarm_summary e Header1 Header2 Enter header 1 and header 2 using up to 64 characters Scheduled scheduled Recipient i OFF Gi ON Interval Ref Time oe a Recipient i OFF Gi ON Interval Ref Time a ol Include INST oF On Include source URL i OFF i ON Subject Periodic data Header j l Header2 Specify the settings for sending e mail at scheduled times e Recipient1 and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select ON to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Interval Select the interval for sending e mail to Recipient1 and Recipient2 from 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 and 24 hours e Ref time Enter the time used as a reference for sendin
284. ox appears Click the DXAdvanced tab System Configuration Version 4 00 VOTES LTT 2 Configure all the settings on the DXAdvanced tab and then click the OK button The DX1000 DX2000 setting screen in displayed IM 04L41B01 64EN 2 2 Displaying Setup Data Loading Existing Setup Data Load and display existing setup data 1 Click the Open button or select File Open from the menu bar File Zomm Setting Syster Ee Hardware Configur New Ctrl h File Comm Setting Pear Save Ctrl 5 a SAVE OS NewFile PEL NOAS1 1000 PEL Files of type RNa IRE Tgret tn tere gee E od Cancel Zi 2 Select a setup data file PEL extension or measured data file DSD or DSE extension and click Open The setup data is loaded and displayed Note If you specify a measured data file the setup file contained within it is loaded IM 04L41B01 64EN 2 5 uondo Ayindag paoueApy LSV 94 YUM SI PON 000ZXG O00LXG UO e eq dnjas gt Chapter 3 3 1 Configuring the DX1000 DX2000 Starting the Harware Configurator The Hardware Configurator can transmit and receive the setup data change the setup data and create new setup data For information about the settings on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option see section 2 2 The setting screen may differ from your actual screen To Load Setup Data from the DX1000 DX2000 IM 04L41B01 64EN Before performing the follow
285. p AlarinvRelay Remote Modbus master 2 scan IntervaliMemary J Channel Web server Key Lock Login eb Server on Gal OFF d Timer Operator _ 2 Report i Temperature Greate page Cc GH J AUX orien Calon Cd OFF o Time zone Z ACCESS contiol Caan G OEE Network Uber rare on Paaeyyono Unspecified IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Setting the E mail style number 4 Time of transmission Transmit e mail message when a system error occurs Alarm information Transmit e mail message when creating a report o Alarm Relay Remote m alel 2 Scan IntervaliMemary o Channel o Key Lock Lagin a Timer Report o Temperature d AUX 2 Time zone E Network P Recipient 1 WW Recipient 2 P Alarmi P Alarm2 E Alarm 3 K Alarm 4 P Include INST a Include source URL Subject DO Alarm_summary Memory Data Out G Ethernet i Serial e SMTP server name Set the SMTP server name up to 64 alphanumeric characters or the IP address of the SMTP server e Port number Set the port number to use The default value is 25 e Recipient Set the transmission destination of the e mail message using up to 150 alphanumeric characters You can specify multiple addresses To specify multiple addresses delimit the addresses using spaces e Sender Set the e mail address using up to 64 alphanumeric characters If the address is not set the first address set in the r
286. pending on the command type as follows Read 201 to 440 R Math C01 to C60 Write 1 to 48 W Math 101 to 160 Connected to server number Select the server number from 1 to 16 Register Set the register number of the server For an input register select in the range of 30001 to 39999 and 300001 to 365536 For a hold register select in the range of 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465536 The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 of the MV1000 MV2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM MV1000 17E Type Select INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT L The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 of the MV1000 MV2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM MV1000 17E IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings E mail J Environment Basic Setting _ SEE Alarm SMTP server name 7 Scan Interval Port Mo af i Sosa Pune Security OFF Gj POPbeforeSMTP 1 Report I Key Lock J Login S Ethernet sender I TCPAP _POP3 settings O setings po A ss __ w FF POPS Server name I Modbus client E Mail 1 SNTP client J Server functions Port number Login name Pasevvord Send delay second POPS Login PLAIN AAPOR 1 Serial sm Shai saa a Alarm Recipient i OFF ON Recipient i OFF O
287. ps Group 1 to 10 When selecting control screen for the view kind select the group from the control groups Group 1 to 8 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 65 000ZX3 000LX3 94 Bun uo o 5 10 Display Settings User Key Daylight Saving Batch 5 66 o Daylight Saving n Batch Control Group DIG Monitor DIG Label a Logic math Click one Or choose the Setting menu SET Regular Setting Select the function to be assigned to the User Key Set the time at the daylight saving time adjustment is to be enabled disabled J Display Daylight Saving Message File ma Trio Li P Summer 1980 Ei Hi E La St External Trigger View Group IB Winter 1980 fi i o Alarm Ack User Key Daylight Saving Math Start Stop Control Group Math Reset Manual Sample Message 1 Message 2 Message 3 Message 4 Message 5 Message 6 Message 7 Message 8 Snapshot For details about the User Key settings refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Enter the header if the option batch headers are active Click here Or choose the Setting menu gt SET Regular Setting User Key Daylight Saving NOME P Summer External Trigger C winter Alarm Ack i Math Start Stop Batch Math Reset Application Mame Manual Sample Supervisor Mame rene Manager Name p Enter up to 16 Message 2 H Ne einer alphanumeric WS Message 3 characters Ce Messag
288. ption OFF Not register Key Log into the MV1000 MV2000 using keys Comm Log into the MV1000 MV2000 via communications Web Log into the operator page and monitor page of the MV1000 MV2000 using a Web browser Key Comm Log into the MV1000 MV2000 using keys and via communications e User Name Set the user name Up to 20 characters e You cannot register user names that are already registered e You cannot register quit or a user name containing all spaces e Password Set the password Up to 8 characters An entered password is displayed as e You cannot register quit or a password containing all spaces 4 39 OOOZAW O0OLAIW 24 Bun yuo ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings 4 40 User Up to 30 names can be registered Basic setting Environment Alarm Scan Interval Measure Function Report Key Lock Login Supervisor User Ethernet Serial Free 1 Free 1 Free Free 1 Free Free Free 1 Free 1 Free Free a 1 Free Free Free 4 Free Free 4 Free Free Q Copy Paste Copy Details Changes the upper lower display area Mode The available settings vary depending on the Security setting Settings Description OFF Not register Key Log into the MV using keys Comm Log into the MV via communications Web Log into the monitor page of the MV using a Web browser Key Comm Log into the MV using keys and via communications
289. put relay select ON The reflash function is set on the first three output relays Settings Description Off Reflash is not used On Reflash is used The relays are deactivated for approximately 500 ms 500ms Reflash is used The relays are deactivated for approximately 500 ms is Reflash is used The relays are deactivated for approximately 1 s ae Reflash is used The relays are deactivated for approximately 2 s 1 Release numbers 3 and earlier 2 Release numbers 4 and later Rate of Change Decrease Set the interval for the rate of change calculation of the low limit on rate of change alarm in terms of the number of sampled data points 1 to 32 The actual interval is obtained by multiplying the value specified here by the scan interval Rate of Change Increase Set the interval for the rate of change calculation of the high limit on rate of change alarm in the same manner as the interval for the low limit on rate of change alarm Hold You can choose to make the alarm displays behave in the following ways When you use the alarm annunciator function release number 3 or later the setting follows the annunciator sequence Settings Description Unhold Clears the alarm indication when the alarm condition is released returns to normal condition Hold Holds the alarm indication until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed Internal Switch AND Select the internal switches that are to operate using AND logic Set the ra
290. r Valid Span e e Io 3 After setting the items click here Set the maximum value Set the minimum value Copy the first setting Select Operator dialog box Select the operator type and click the operator button Select Operator xj Basic Logical Relation Channel Addtion ABSO Absolute value SORQ Square roct Multiplication LOGQ Common logarithm PeO Bore Operator button The items of the Math tab can be set for each channel The items set here are the same as the ones in the Math tab of the Hardware Configurator For details see the page corresponding to the item 5 60 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 9 Computation Channel Settings Copying and Pasting Setup Data You can copy the setup data of one channel or more to other channels Use the following procedure to copy and paste IM 04L41B01 64EN 1 4 Click the source channel number that you want to copy To select many channels click the first source channel then drag over all the channels that you want to copy Click the Copy button at the bottom left of the window Click the destination channel number To select many channels click the first destination channel then drag over all the channels where you want to paste Click the Paste button You can also copy and paste specific channel items After selecting the copy source in step 1 click the Copy Details button to display the Math Channel Copy Details dialog box Check whether the i
291. r CX2000 4 6LOOP 1 4 Only the loop numbers for the loops specified in the system configuration settings appear in the list Control Setting Tab Contains the control settings for internal loops e Control Action Control Mode Select the control mode from Basic Cascade PVSwitching or Retrans Style 3 or later For a loop with no control select OFF When selecting Cascade because of a common setting between two loops of a control output terminal block when you set loop 1 to cascade for example loop 2 can also automatically be set to cascade If you make a change such that the smallest loop number changes other than selecting OFF all program patterns are initialized Method Select the switching conditions of two measurement inputs from Range PVHigh or Signal You can only make this selection when Control Mode is set to PVSwitching IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 3 Control Function Basic Settings Program Control with the Program Control Option Turn program control ON or OFF for each loop On style 2 and earlier there is a common setting for both loops of a single control output terminal block If you make a change such that the smallest loop number changes other than selecting OFF all program patterns are initialized PID Control Mode Select the PID control mode from Follow Up or Fixed point This setting is disabled on loops for which Control mode is OFF AUX Remote Setting Enabled When Program
292. range of 0 to 255 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 61 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings 3 62 Command setting Client command No Select from 1 to 16 for the transmitted command numbers to be configured Command Set the command type Settings Description Read Read to the external input channel 16 bit signed integer type from the server R Math Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server Write Write the measurement channel 16 bit signed integer type to the server W Math Write the measurement channel 32 bit signed integer type to the server Exchange M Read to the communication input data 32 bit floating point type from the server write the custom display value to the server release numbers 4 and later Read can be selected on DX2000s with the external input channel MC1 option installed R Math W Mat and Exchange M can be selected on models with the computation function M1 option installed Start channel End channel client channels Enter the first and last channel numbers of input output The range of channels that you can enter varies depending on the command type as follows Read 201 to 440 R Math C01 to C60 Write 1 to 48 W Math 101 to 160 Exchange M release numbers 4 and later C01 to C60 Connected to server number Select the server number from 1 to 16 Register Set the register number of the server For an input register selec
293. red resides in the internal memory of the DX if the data is overwritten the data that could not be transferred is lost 3 60 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings MODBUS Client I Environment i Alarm 1 Scan Interval I Measure Function I Report i Remote I Key Lock Login S Ethernet 2 TCPAP FTP Modbus client 2 E Mail 1 SNTF client I Server functions Connect limits Click to display the channel selection screen Changes the upper lower display area Basic Setting e Communication interval Set the read cycle to 125ms 250ms 500ms 1s 2s 5s or 10s e Auto recovery Set the interval for retrying the connection when the connection is interrupted for some reason Select OFF 10s 20s 30s 1min 2min 5min 10min 20min 30min or 1h Modbus Server setting e Server No Select from 1 to 16 for the server registration numbers to be configured e Port No Enter the port number in the range of 0 to 65535 for the selected server The default value is 502 e Host Name Set the destination Modbus server name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Ifthe DNS is used you can set the host name as a server name e You can also set the IP address In this case the DNS is not required e Unit Select Auto if the unit number of the destination server is not required Otherwise select Fixed If you select Fixed the Unit No item is displayed e Unit No Enter a fixed unit number in the
294. rol action direction DB dead band PO preset output or ETC others Note When Connecting Model in the Basic Setting tab of External Loop is set to Other you can only select ETC Name Specify the name of the item using up to 6 alphanumeric characters Register Set the register address in the following ranges 30001 to 339999 300001 to 365535 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465535 Span Point Set the parameter decimal point position Span L Set the lower control span value between 30000 to 30000 Span U Set the upper control span value between 30000 to 30000 5 17 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbutinbiyyuog a 5 4 Control Function General Settings Control Input 5 18 This section describes settings for the internal loop control functions Enter settings for the internal loop control functions using the Control Loop tab and Control Group on the Setting tab You can also enter these settings by choosing Control Setting SETUP Regular Setting Control Loop or Control Settings SETUP Regular Setting Control Group On the Control Loop tab click the button LOOP01 LOOPO2 of each loop number that you want to set and then enter the settings for that loop The label of the selected loop number button is red Select each item Control Input PID Alarm Operation Related Linearizer and Control Function with the option buttons A different menu is displayed when PV SP co
295. rough key operations one through an Ethernet connection connection to the setting function and one through serial communication Off The multi login function is not used Users cannot log in simultaneously through key operations Ethernet connection to the setting function or serial communication LL command Password Management Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option To perform password management using a KDC server on the Ethernet select On You will have to set the Ethernet communication Password management item Auto Save Settings Description ON Automatically saves the measured data to the CF card OFF Does not automatically save the data Save the measured data manually to the CF card or USB flash memory USB1 option Media FIFO You can select this with DX main unit firmware version 2 0x or later This is valid only when Auto Save is ON Settings Description ON If there is no more free space on the CF card the oldest file is deleted and the newest file is saved OFF If there is no more free space on the CF card the measured data is not saved to the CF card 3 43 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinBiyu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Option Environment Math J Basic Environment Value on Error T Detail Setting Overflow Sum Ave Option Overflow Min Max P P j Alarm J Scan Interval J Measure Function Report J Remote Ethernet Basic setting
296. rt to create Clear OFF the reports you do not want to produce RefCh Selects the report reference channel For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Sum Scale Select whether to convert the results of the TLOG SUM computation channels to a specified time unitary value Select Off Sec Min Hour Day This function is available only if the Computation function is installed For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E 5 50 IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings Copying and Pasting Setup Data You can copy the setup data of one channel or more to other channels Use the following procedure to copy and paste 1 Click the source channel number that you want to copy To select many channels click the first source channel then drag over all the channels that you want to copy 2 Click the Copy button at the left of the window 3 Click the destination channel number To select many channels click the first destination channel then drag over all the channels where you want to paste 4 Click the Paste button You can also copy and paste specific channel items After selecting the copy source in step 1 click the Copy Details button to display the Report Copy Details dialog box Check whether the items you want to copy paste are selected Tag Memory Alarm Time Displayed Language and Partial Expanded Display Set
297. s Group 3 20 Click to display the channel configuration trip line settings dialog box J Daylight Saving Time Group Display View group Message Comment Annunciator Timer Event Action File J Menu Customize j Web Report Group 1 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 003 009 010 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 003 009 010 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 003 009 010 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 003 009 010 Channel Configuration Use Group Name OFF ON GROUP 1 Channel Configuration 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 010 Measch manch Extch2o1_ Extch2s1_ eacnszi excuse i Select channels to register to the group or set the trip line Oo e Se n amp oa E ao w los js loas doa Joas Batch 1 Batch 2 and Other Similar Tabs Release number 3 or later When the multi batch function BT2 option is enabled select the appropriate batch tab Channel Configuration Use Select ON for the display groups that you want to display The number of groups is as follows Model Multi Batch Function BT2 option Disabled or not installed Enabled DX1000 10 6 batch DX2000 36 12 batch Group name Set the group name up to 16 characters Channel Configuration Set up to 10 channels DX2000 or 6 channels DX1000 from measurement channels computation channels M1 and PM1 options and external input channe
298. s The maximum number of channels that can be assigned to a group is 10 and 6 for DX200 DX200C MV200 and DX100 MV100 respectively The assigned channels are listed under Channel Configuration If no channels are specified CHO1 is automatically assigned Trip line Up to four trip lines can be set to one group With regard to the trip lines set here the first and second settings No 1 and No 2 refer to the trip lines in the Data Monitor and Data Viewer If you change them here they will also change in the Data Monitor and Data Viewer IM 04L41B01 64EN 6 4 Configuring the Settings Setting the View Group DX200 DX200C MV200 Only Click here also selectable from Setting SET Regular Setting Enter the view Select the type of screen to be displayed group name or drag amp drop View Group 1 Group Mame a ey View 1 View 3 o Daylight Saving adiz dim view Kind J Batch DIGITAL OVERY IEVY Group View 2 View 4 View Kind View Kind Select the group Type of screens to be displayed available View group Up to four view groups can be registered Group Name Up to 16 characters can be entered for the group name The specified group name appears as a sub menu of the 4 Panel display of the DX200 MV200 Screen type The view group is made up of four screens Select the type of screen to display in each screen USER Key DX100 DX200 DX200C and MV200 Only Dayliht Saving Batch Option BT1 Style
299. s aeoemauaedentlaneodeaneeaans 5 35 ig ee emer a ene eer en ier oer Renee ee een ene ee erent ee Tee ee 5 22 POR etn eer en ee ene eee eee eer ee 3 63 4 47 ROP IOON aE stenatsnecanamentessdeaatsedeanennedunadaet 3 64 DO NUMO sinsa EE E iE TiS 3 40 3 60 3 61 3 63 3 71 4 31 4 43 4 45 4 47 DOSO ae e E oat aie coss ewtorverueaene 5 56 6 7 power fail message ceecccceeeeeeceeeeececeaeeeessaeeeeees 3 42 4 32 pre trigger length ascicnnssaccncsscenticciaensasteontiadtan 5 46 5 47 6 17 preset display a ieixccennscancetaecnescenssentnssatandeeigesdacerateresenie 3 24 4 21 printer Se We creari E ER 1 10 print example CLADIE scsi ccsord cessaindscnnisiesd axecinare araionbeniend ovewudarcnetanss 1 7 print example TEX inc cicacies ccnoritias banaacunidied acensied bas bkawdhcdariebatedncnbiderias 1 9 print format Settings cissreenncnsannhonccncudedennsenemesacentanetoansunetetegsacis 1 6 printing Setup data omessi innia 1 10 5 74 IIE OU VION occa ce dcedacatcsanenenatoetecanesaneenessnnoeetocsaeeseanasesanaceces 1 10 priority to the display Of AlAPMS cccccseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeenneees 3 49 8 C016 og VPE eee ann ete eee eee eee ete tel nee ame Orem 3 45 products covered in this MANUal ssccccsseeceeeeeceeeeceeseeseaes iv PROFIBUS DP aa cece cetesasuece pescneenaehassevenesroneseaaetesaueasaeresesebase 3 75 program COMM Gls ctcciasncuns extvendatentenaceniunensnicraitaticnasasiienurnnntscead 5 34 progran
300. s cacti toon cesta anseec Peaeas aod esata 5 25 DOH sstanterith wnat pea E S E maiesdinnkeuls 5 48 DANN UIAG 2 ssieccytsrceeadecdinaminnstuoecasenteneioncecetestearouiene 3 41 4 31 6 22 line width of the GONG scccucwcccalsscxtacsenceore nance ve coacasmovmatas 3 23 4 20 Load Changed Sein S sxcctcscccscstccectarsestencranesesasctacnatsdencesdeckes 1 5 loading existing setup data ceeees 2 5 3 2 4 2 5 4 loading setup data rciceiccasscarceicetriantcaveersienicaeas 2 3 3 1 4 1 5 2 NM Mists EA EE E PE E E E EEE 6 19 On TAIN e r E E 3 60 COATTA oU i aceatadtacaczaansacdeacabencunaabavanndcecnpentensamabeacscesasanes 3 8 4 8 M PIA cp reenencessnecuntececeocurausanoetase devncenodsseseeneeememnceneeeusgeceadeaecace 1 5 manual Sample lt csctcacassndcacevantversssataacianeeaanaseicstanieewanans 3 31 4 25 manual SAVE cc ccc eececceceeceeeeeceseeceeeueeeseeeeeeesaeeeeeneaeeess 5 63 6 13 master command NUMDEL ccccceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeess 3 73 4 53 Match time tiMer cc ee ecceececeececceeeeeeeceeseseeeeeenseeeess 3 30 4 25 PM AS Ce erate ces sectecasteta nce nanoeseetveca vemonesachecuceeasuetaameses 3 32 4 26 measurement channels settingS c cccccssssseeesseseeeenees 5 53 measurement function basic settings cccccssseeeeeeeeeeees 5 44 measurement Start StOp ccceccceceeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeseaes 3 80 media FO acs ccraseccaccntectasantaneaosaccnaeeacaeanteaaecsaente
301. s function is available only if the Computation function is installed For details about the types of timers and various settings refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E 5 49 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Bun uos o 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings Report Creating Hourly Daily Weekly Monthly Reports Setting Available When the Computation Function Option is Active Click here Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting oo M QorrF hHor Day Hour Day Day eek Day Month Alarm Relay Remote Scan IntervalMemory Channel Set the date and time at which to create the report J Key Lock Login Timer Report Temperature J Aux J Time zone Network Control Action J Internal Loop Contact Input Control Relay External Loop Select the reference channel for the report Enable ON or disable OFF the report channel settings Note Measurement channels cannot be set for reference channels on 0 measurement channel models Type Specify the report creation time For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Time Specify the report creation time For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Report Channel There are 12 report channels for the CX1000 and 30 report channels for the CX2000 The check boxes on the right of the report channels are used to select what repo
302. s that deal with communication hereinafter referred to as address settings such as IP addresses are changed the data for those settings is sent separately from other setup data A DX that receives address setup data restarts automatically and begins operating with the data that has been sent The following items are address settings e The TCP IP and Server functions settings under Ethernet e The Serial and PROFIBUS DP settings under Serial Setup Data Other Than the Address Setup Data Other setup data is sent together Sending Address Setup Data 3 76 1 Select Comm Partial Transfer Address Settings from the menu bar The Network dialog box appears 2 Enter the parameters and click the OK button The Store dialog box appears If the password has expired on a DX with the AS1 advanced security option follow the directions in the dialog box that appears 3 Click OK Store IN Send Setting to Connecting Hardware Data transfer starts A message appears to indicate when data transfer has stopped Click OK to close the message The data that you send is enabled after the DX restarts Note After you change the address the address that is sent is recorded as the retry destination The next time you open the Network dialog box the address appears as the initial value IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 7 Sending the Setup Data to the DX1000 DX2000 Sending Setup Data Other Than
303. ser Name Password Same as the supervisor settings e Key Lock No Settings Description OFF No limitations on the operation 1 to 10 Registration number of the operation limitation e Key lock Select whether or not to disable each item Load Settings is available in release numbers 3 and later Settings Description Free Key lock not applied Lock Disables the operation 3 56 IM 04L41B01 64EN Ethernet IM 04L41B01 64EN TCP IP Environment i Alarm Scan Interval Measure Function i Report i Remote j Key Lock 2 Login S Ethernet S TCP IP FTP I Modbus client 2 E Mail SNTP client I Server functions Connect limits Timeout time min HostName Regier OFF ON OFF g ON Ca GEE Gal GN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Set the IP address to a fixed IP address or obtain it automatically DHCP Consult with your network administrator for the network parameters such as the IP address subnet mask default gateway and DNS When using a fixed IP address e DHCP Set DHCP to OFF e IP Address Set the IP address to assign to the DX1000 DX2000 e Subnet Mask Set the subnet mask according to the system or network to which the DX1000 DX2000 belongs e Default Gateway Set the IP address of the gateway e Host Name Set the DX s host name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters You do not have to set this parameter e Domain Name Set
304. setting function as an administrator or user who has been registered on the DX The connection is automatically closed after you execute the operations Operation Connected Function User Receive setup data Monitoring function Administrators and users Send setup data Setting function Administrators Send address settings see Setting function Administrators section 3 3 Acquire hardware information Monitoring function Administrators and users Start or stop recording Setting function Administrators User s who have permission to log in through communication For information about the monitoring function setting function administrators users and simultaneous login limitations see section 1 3 in the Advanced Security Function AS1 User s Manual IM 04L41B01 05EN Invalid User When a user is prompted for a password if he or she tries to log in with the wrong password consecutively for the number of times specified by the password retry frequency setting that user is made invalid and will be unable to perform operations The invalid user status is released when an administrator sets the password of an invalid user to the default value Serial Communication You can only use serial communication to output data from the DX Receive setup data You can perform this operation without logging in Send setup data You cannot perform this operation Send address settings You cannot perform this operation Acquire hardware inform
305. ss the favorite key Favorite The displays that have been registered to the favorite key appear when you press the favorite key Select Favorite when you want to register displays to the favorite key and use the key to switch between the displays Group display This setting is valid when Action is set to Favorite Settings Description Current Of the displays that have been registered to the favorite key those that display groups the trend digital bar graph and historical trend displays are displayed using the currently displayed group Saved Registered displays are displayed using the display groups that were selected when they were registered Time axis zoom This setting is valid when Action is set to Favorite Settings Description Current Historical trend displays that have been registered to the favorite key are displayed using the current time axis zoom Saved Historical trends are displayed using the time axis zooms that they were registered with IM 04L41B01 64EN View Group IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 5 Entering General Settings Set the screens that will be displayed in the 4 panel display This function is for the DX2000 only With revision R7 21 or later you can open a settings dialog box for any view group by double clicking its number View group number Daylight Saving Time J Group 1 Display View group Message Comment Annunciator Timer J Event Action
306. ssatacdernesuends 5 46 6 17 number of Channels c ceccesceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeenees 5 64 6 14 number of sampleS oxi scisciianalecdeicansauriiseuiilenesastenwinneddcawaites 5 59 6 10 O one channel setting cccccsssccecssseccecsesecesseseeeessseeessensees 5 57 one computation channel Setting cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 60 operating system sansctconsasacunssscndsinsedeuaninnt onkanathcarmaniaainensormpeeni 1 2 operation for each remote control terminal c c 000e 3 53 operation related csscesossaiceidantortarcd tetndiGnicentmncterememiaetentenderente 5 24 Operator gee eee ee eee ele eee eee een earner oer 4 17 5 60 6 11 operator pag caer na een ene ener or meee ne Seer eee 3 69 4 51 output directory TOMA L avicsaesencccccnertenrannnhaneddeaneaswisssmesnnnsdnedaad 3 59 NO A 3 44 4 33 overflow data icccesicssitecinirsenntdrarvdsecteavitasinahiestiectnderecuncs 3 44 4 33 P PARI AE PEIEE PEE TE ATAN AA T 3 72 4 52 oE E E N E 3 42 4 32 5 33 5 56 5 59 partial expanded display 3 12 4 11 5 51 6 7 6 22 ASS WO aeaa 3 60 3 71 5 48 6 19 password login function eeeeeneeseeeennneeeenn eenen 3 55 4 39 password management ccccseeeeceeeeeeeeeesseeeesaeeees 3 43 3 71 pasle enre E 3 13 4 12 6 7 PASV MOOS ecrire e Ti 3 60 4 43 palem NaNe tssscrrssea raanei ne oe eo eee 5 35 pattern TID SE siciict sate cradtendnastorisiacisieetesea eid ae odiar
307. t Serial e Value on Error Specify whether to set the display for a computation error to Over or Over e Overflow Sum Ave Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the SUM or AVE computation of TLOG or CLOG This setting is also applied to report generation Settings Description Error Sets the computed result to computation error Skip Discards the overflow data and continues the computation Limit Uses a limit value in place of the overflow data and continues the computation e Overflow Min Max P P Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the MAX MIN or P P computation of TLOG or CLOG This setting is also applied to report generation Settings Description Over Uses the overflow data as is Skip Discards the overflow data and continues the computation e Report 1 to 4 Select the type of data to output as reports Settings Description OFF Does not output reports You cannot set the first term to OFF Ave Outputs the average value Max Outputs the maximum value Min Outputs the minimum value Sum Outputs the sum value Instant Outputs the instantaneous value 4 33 OOOZAW OOOLAW 24 Bulunbiyuog ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Alarm 4 34 e File kind Set this item when creating two types of reports such as daily report and monthly report Settings Description Split Saves each type of report to a separate file Combined Saves the report data of two types
308. t The selectable alarms vary depending on the input mode and computation type For details see chapter 3 in the User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E or IM04L42B01 01E Alarm value Alarm is generated using the specified value as the boundary The selectable range of alarm values vary depending on the input mode and range Alarm delay e Time Set the alarm delay time to an integer value from 1 to 3600 s On DXs with the AS1 advanced security option you can set the delay time to a value from 1 to 3600 seconds or 1 to 24 hours If the measured value remains above or below the set alarm value for the set period of time the delay time an alarm is activated e Unit Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Set the unit of the alarm delay time You can select seconds or hours Note DX1000 DX2000 specifications e The alarm delay time takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval For example if the alarm delay time is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s the actual delay time is 6 s e The delay alarm has the following special operations e If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the alarm setting when a delay alarm is set on a computation channel the alarm is turned On after the specified period delay period elapses e The alarm detection operation is reset if a power failure occurs The operation restarts after the power recovers e Ifthe alarm setting o
309. t fieldS nn00nnnnaannnaeannnnnnnnnnennennnnnnnennrennnnene 3 27 computation channel setting one channel at a time 3 18 4 17 computation channel settings c ccccccesssseeesseseeeesnesees 5 58 computation erfor accccscsinsssnsaprcaiongiaseersanvateeiageneristeoans 3 44 4 33 compulaton ON OFF siesiiraniiserren sireni sine iais 5 58 CONNECING tothe DX ois tcsiccntaripciniammecnranvanminarenieacventanetataauen 2 2 connection URNS sow ton tc seciaeiscinectlass ses teaudoshasiendieseeensanneone 3 70 constants wioxdncsactscousars xt omsntienbanaunaraexneaeteens 3 17 4 16 5 59 6 10 OAC AOU aaie a es aeeneeeued teneeseuerssene 5 11 CORIO ACHOM soia 5 7 control channel Settings vic tscincicnaceniercavectintdanccesieanieatduneienised 5 32 control function basic settings scoiccetiseivertcnsediaestinetsnixennlevwee 5 7 control function general SettingS ccccceceeesseeeeeeeeeaeeeees 5 18 control function SUING S cde cascec sorcerers ovhacencieswcbonratinwnddeacnteteset 5 26 OME OUDS sendien isir RENREN RAA OEE EEES 5 26 CORONI U esana aE 5 18 ea alo ee EE EES 5 13 CONVENTIONS siriciniriinieri ani an i raea a EAEE EEES iv convert reference unit tiIME cc ceccc cc eeeececeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeees 5 50 convert the reference Unit tiMe ce ccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeees 6 21 CODY PTE EENT ATIT ENEE A T E A 3 13 4 12 6 7 CODY and pasle sricsinsineisshnn i ni niii E riiai 5 57 creating hardware setup data
310. t in the range of 30001 to 39999 and 300001 to 365536 For a hold register select in the range of 40001 to 49999 and 400001 to 465536 The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 of the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 17E Type Select INT16 UINT16 INT32_B INT32_L UINT32_B UINT32_L FLOAT_B or FLOAT L The register numbers you can specify vary depending on the command type See section 6 3 of the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Communication Interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 17E In release number 3 FLOAT has been added as a data type for measurement channel data and computation channel data IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings E mail Environment Alarm Scan Interval J Measure Function J Key Lock Ethernet TCP IP FIP Modbus client E Mail SNTP client Server functions Connect limits Auth setings UserName Password Set the SMTP server and mail address Basic Setting SMTP server name Enter the host name or IP address of the SMTP server Port No Unless specified otherwise set the number to the default value The default value is 25 Security Release number 3 or later Select POP before SMTP if you need to enable POP before SMTP To enable authenticated e mail transmission Authentication SMTP select Auth release numbers 4 and later Address 1
311. t the items by choosing Setting SET Regular Setting Meas Channels Measurement channel settings cannot be entered on 0 channel models The Meas Channels tab and measurement channels on and the setting menu are not shown Click this tab Double click to set the channel Select the input mode Difference computation Select the range type Scale Select the reference for the difference a el i aia root _ computation dim a a m ea Pe SCALE SGRT 2 Eo E J pe oe SCALE SORT 2v 3 cHos PN EAE g5 chos RR EACE 2 B DELTA SCALE S RT 2y ToS 8 af co ree ao eer v a cis eee ib Select all at once Initialize Turn OFF all at once Copy the settings of the first channel in the selected range to all other channels Specify a scale Specify the unit of the scale Select the alarm type Specify the alarm value Select the relay number Alarm 1 en Type 0 000 HOME 0 000 MONE Fj Tik OFF 0 000 NONE B Fi OW oFF 200 UL E 0 00 MONE 2UU UU L 0 00 MOME om a Set the value to the maximum value possible Set the value to the minimum value possible Alarm display ON OFF Specify a delay period Specify a tag name i i Select sampling count of the moving average Specify a display zone Select the graph settings Turn ON OFF the partial Select the channel expanded display pa display color Zone Graph Partial Color Initialize Set the value to
312. t value between 1 and 120 minutes Checking the communication status The Ethernet communication status can be confirmed with the LED lamp that is provided on the Ethernet connector on the DX1000 DX2000 rear panel or the Ethernet link that is shown at the upper right of the basic setting screen IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings FTP Basic setting Environment FTP Transfer File Alarm Display amp Event data Gj OFF ON Scan Interval Snapshot OFF ON Measure Function Report data GQ OFF ON Report ie Setting Q OFF oN _ Remote S Ethernet Output Directory Format Q MS DOS UNIX TCPAP Transfer wait time S FTP Display amp Event data Minute U Modbus client Report data Minute SNTP client ee Connect to J Server functions Connect limits Server Name J Password management Port No Serial Login Name Password Account PASY OFF ON FTP Transfer File Data files that are set to ON are automatically transferred to the FTP destination File Type Description Display data file Data files are automatically transferred at each file save interval Event data file Files are automatically transferred when the data length of data is recorded Report file Data files are automatically transferred every time a report is created Snapshot data file The files are automatically transferred when a snapshot is executed They are transferred regardl
313. ta Viewer If you change them here they also change in Data Monitor and Data Viewer For details about trip line settings refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 10 Display Settings View Group CX2000 Only Click here Or choose the Setting menu SET Regular Setting Specify a view group name Select or drag from the right the type of screen to be displayed Setting Display View Group 1 Messaqe File Meas TREND Group Trip Line ise A View Group MIx User Key View 1 Daylight Saving View Kind Control Group View 3 DIG View Kind TTE TT overview BI aici aog Lwi ae OVERVIEW ao 20m Group Group View 2 View 4 View Kind View Kind Group Group z Group 1 Type of screens available Select the group to be displayed View Groups Up to four view groups can be registered Group Name Use up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be entered for the group name The group name appears as a submenu of the 4 PANEL display View Kind The view group consists of four views Select the type of screen to display in each view Overview cannot be selected on 0 measurement channel models without the calculation option installed Group The group displayed varies depending on the type of view selected When selecting measurement screen for the view kind select the group from the measurement grou
314. table from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting Set the date and time at which to create the report SlarnmivRelay Remote I Scan IntervalMemory OFF Hor E Day Hour Day e Day teek m Day hionth Channel Key Lock Login ume E o suv o Report REPORT OI Lali yp Gof M sec Min Hour Davy Temperature REPORT 02 Ld fH 2 Ofi Sec it Hour Aux REPORT OS MaE off Sec Fi Pi Hour i Time zone REPORT 04 Fj ee I Off Fi Sec i Mlin a Hour d Network FEPORT OS Manie e a Ser ihi i Hoyrt E Select the channel to be reported Enable ON Disable OFF the report channel settings Report channel There are 30 channels and 12 channels on the DX200 DX200C MV200 and DX100 MV100 respectively Converting the reference unit time Select whether or not to convert the computed results of the TLOG SUM computation channels to a specified time unit value Select Off no conversion Sec seconds Min minutes or Hour hours Copy For details related to the copy paste function see page 6 7 6 21 OOZAW 00LAW 900Z2XG 00ZXG 00LXG 94 Bunn yuog 2 6 5 Configuring the Setup Mode Setting the Temperature Unit Tag Channel Display Memory Alarm Time Displayed Language Partial Expanded Display Batch Option BT1 Style Number S2 or Later and Time Zone 6 22 Click either one also selectable from Setting SETUP Basic Setting Setting
315. tems you want to copy paste are selected 5 61 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbutinbiyyuog a 5 10 Display Settings To enter display settings click the Setting tab Or you can select the items by choosing Setting SET Regular Setting Display Setting Display Select the display format for trend and bar graphs Select the time per division Click this tab Display Trend Display Setting a J Message File Display Update Interval Te an gt Group Trip Line Auto Save interval View Group User Key Display Setting J Daylight Saving Trend Graph Direction gt Horizontal 4 Vertical B Horizontal 2 J Control Group Bar Graph Direction B Horizontal gt Vertical Background Color Meas View White Black Ctrl View White Black Trend Line Width 2 3 Trip Line Width 1 Q2 3 Grid Division Auto Scroll Time 5s z Scale dicit Q Normal Fine LCD Setting LCD Brightness Backlight Saver Qorr on Saver Time imn D2min 5min BD 10min 30min Restore KEY ALARM The screen saver function is activated when there is no key operation or alarm occurrence for the specified interval Key operation or alarm exits screen saver Key operation exits screen saver Display Update Interval You can select the display update interval of the trend display from 1 min div 2 min div 5 min div 10 min div 20 min div 30 min div 1 h div 2 h div 4 h div or 10 h div of the time axis
316. ternal Login Up Down internal 1 Ethernet Up Down Internal Up Down Internal Up Down Internal Up Down Internal internal Internal Burnout Settings Description OFF Sensor disconnections are not detected UP When the sensor burns out the measured result is set to tover range The measured value displays Burnout For 1 5V input the DX assumes that the sensor has burned out when the measured value exceeds the scale upper limit by 10 of the scale width Example When the measured value is greater than 110 when the scale is from 0 to 100 DOWN When the sensor burns out the measured result is set to over range The measured value displays Burnout For 1 5V input the DX assumes that the sensor has burned out when the measured value falls below the scale lower limit by 5 of the scale width Example When the measured value is less than 5 when the scale is from 0 to 100 RJC Mode Sets the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple input Select Internal or External Settings Description Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of the DX External Uses an external reference junction compensation function When set to External Volt is displayed RJC voltage uV The compensation voltage to be added to the input Set the value in the range of 20000 uV to 20000 yV 3 51 IM 04L41B01 64EN 000ZXa 000 Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic S
317. terval cece ecccececeeceseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 5 62 6 12 Be PAE haces attra E E E A A S E E E 5 47 Dackground COlON rsssoeri rannen En nne Er An kN iR ENNE UP IEEE UNIRTE 3 24 backlight SAV Sl on cncanactasaneanmeensncenesncensantienesenapsancioxesstinense 3 24 4 21 backlite save MOE ceececcecc esc eeeeceeesueeseeeeeeuseuseeeeueeueeaess 3 24 ARCO ce cetera E E EEA REEE i 3 72 AMI Cl AI EE E P E TT 5 56 6 7 bar graph derection ccesicsesercieentosecaceciiasensaesteoseonsaneds exes 3 24 4 21 basic environment cccecceceeceececeeeeeceeeeeeceeeeeaueneness 3 39 4 30 basic setting INGO Gs i cuecsar dincrorgniacbnstsundncentovieeinededesdeastiaesiad 3 41 EVA cage incase nasties eas onsen soa estes gotta aed i 3 42 4 32 Batch PUI GUO Weert cceureacsacs cs tactne iu cantcrancan teaeneuesiacciacwunapoanenacs 6 22 batch function saiciteta secret crsass anc dae onefucee rotentectadteeitteiareint eek 3 42 4 32 batch al 0 5 66 batch ELE eae nenn ere ones er mer eevee ae te eee eT ome N Te Te meee 3 20 3 25 baud rate vrcnccncchesdisessantenssnewhandsnstanudteveswessdesdeetaaudas oxcens 3 72 4 52 DOUG ANY AEP TEA AT ET E 3 12 4 11 5 56 6 7 ORIN aoee E 3 51 4 36 6 18 O checking the system configuration ccceceeesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 5 ere 6 5 116 p sessen ee ote oe Boe Oa ee eT 3 45 certification KEY ccso cscdascctacndaiacaneatCoudademnbeiinenbicarinlar aeannestbkene 3 71 changed vales th
318. than Span U Linear Scaling SCALE Converts the unit to obtain the measured value e Scale L Scale U Input range after converting the unit The selectable range is from 30000 to 30000 e Point Set the number of digits to the right the decimal to four digits or less 0 to 4 Note e The MV converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point from the value span specified by Scale L and Scale U For example if the scale setting is 5 to 5 the value is converted to a value within the span of 10 if the scale setting is 5 0 to 5 0 the value is converted to a value within a span of 100 In this case the resolution of the value converted to a span of 10 is lower than the value converted to a span of 100 To prevent the display from becoming rough it is recommended that the scale be set so that this value is greater than 100 e You cannot set the same value to Scale L and Scale U e When the Mode is 1 5V or Sart Scale L must be less than Scale U Difference Computation DELTA Ref CH Square Root Unit IM 04L41B01 64EN Displays the difference between the input and the reference channel If difference computation is performed between channels that have different range and type settings the decimal position of the computed result is set to that of the channel computing the difference If the number of digits to the right of the decimal of
319. the maximum value possible Set the value to the minimum value possible Turn ON OFF all at once IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 53 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Bun uos a 5 8 Measurement Channels Settings Input Type Mode and Range Type Select one of the following from the pull down list Mode Relevant Settings VOLT voltage Range span L and span U TC thermocouple Type span L and span U RTD resistance temperature detector Type span L and span U DI voltage level contact input Range span L and span U SKIP measurement display OFF None Note e When a value outside the range is entered or when the span L and span U are set to the same value they are corrected when the data is checked e If SKIP is selected settings such as Delta Scale Sqrt and Range Type are disabled Difference Computation and Reference Displays the difference between the input and the reference channel If difference computation is performed between channels that have different range and type settings the decimal place of the result is set to that of the channel computing the difference If the number of decimals of the reference channel is greater than that of the channel computing the difference the reference value below the least significant digit of the channel the difference is rounded down beforehand Square Root Computes and displays the square root of the input This setting can be used only when the input mode is set to VOLT As necessary set the span scal
320. the reference channel is greater than that of the channel computing the difference the reference value below the least significant digit of the channel computing difference is rounded beforehand The reference channel for difference computation Computes and displays the square root of the input This setting can be used only when the input mode is set to VOLT voltage As necessary set the span scale and unit Enter the unit using up to six characters 4 7 000ZAWN 000 LAIN 24 Bunsyuog ka 4 3 Setting the Measurement Channels Ext Channels Low cut Can be set when the mode is 1 5V and when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT selected Select ON to use the low cut function Low cut value Can be set when the mode is VOLT with square root SQRT selected Set the low cut value in the range of 0 0 to 5 0 of the input span Measured value Result of square root computation Low cut value p Input value Calibration Correction Set the input and output values for the calibration correction The number of set points including the start and end points can be specified in the range 2 to 16 X Correct Click to delete the selected row Click to add set points rows to the number of calibration set points Condition X1 lt X2 lt X3 lt X4 lt X5 gt Calibration set points Number of set points Selectable Range of Input and Output Values e Channels on which linear scaling
321. the Licensee shall observe such terms and conditions of which Yokogawa notifies the Licensee in writing separately 2 8 In no event shall the Licensee modify remove or delete a copyright notice of Yokogawa and its licenser contained in the Licensed Software including any copy thereof Article 3 Restriction of Specific Use 3 1 The Licensed Software shall not be intended specifically to be designed developed constructed manufactured distributed or maintained for the purpose of the following events a Operation of any aviation vessel or support of those operations from the ground b Operation of nuclear products and or facilities c Operation of nuclear weapons and or chemical weapons and or biological weapons or d Operation of medical instrumentation directly utilized for humankind or the human body 3 2 Even if the Licensee uses the Licensed Software for the purposes in the preceding Paragraph 3 1 Yokogawa has no liability to or responsibility for any demand or damage arising out of the use or operations of the Licensed Software and the Licensee agrees on its own responsibility to solve and settle the claims and damages and to defend indemnify or hold Yokogawa totally harmless from or against any liabilities losses damages and expenses including fees for recalling the Products and reasonable attorney s fees and court costs or claims arising out of and related to the above said claims and damages Article 4 Warranty 4 1
322. the PID number is 3 or higher Specify the reference point with the measurement input span EU 0 0 to 100 0 The number of points depends on the number of PID PID Number 2 Therefore it is not displayed when the PID number is 2 or less The value of each point is such that 1 lt 2 lt lt 6 is set Switching Hysteresis Specify the switching hysteresis value with the measurement input span EU 0 0 to 10 0 It is not displayed when the PID number is 1 or less or 2 or less with style number S1 IM 04L41B01 64EN Linearize When PV SP Computation Is OFF IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 4 Control Function General Settings Reference Deviation Turn the reference deviation ON or OFF and specify the value from 1 digit of the measurement span to EUS 100 0 With style number S1 system setting it is not displayed if the PID number is 1 With style 2 or later it is not displayed when the PID number is 2 or less Control Loop contr Loop a Linearize LooPo o Control Input Mode or E PID arm Output o Operation Related 1 200 0 0 0 E Linearizer 2 200 0 o0 2 Control Function 3 200 0 0 0 4 200 0 o 0 5 200 0 0 0 Beian 6 200 0 0 0 LOOPOS gt ar ae LOOPO4 6 NG T LOOPOS q 7200 0 0 0 LoOFDG 10 200 0 0 0 11 200 0 0 0 Mode Select the linearize mode from OFF Biasing or Approximation Input Enter the linearize input value The value depends on the linearize mode Biasing Set with EU
323. the maximum number of connections and the port number for each function Function Maximum Number of Simultaneous Uses Port No Number of Administrator User Connections FTP server 2 2 2 21 tcp 3 Web server HTTP 1 80 tcp SNTP server 123 udp Modbus server 2 502 tcp Instrument 34264 udp information server 1 There are user limitations For details see the DX1000 DX1000N DX2000 Communication interface User s Manual IM04L41B01 01E 2 The port number is fixed 3 The default port number You can set the value in the range of 1 to 65535 Use the default port number unless there is a special reason not to do so e Status Relay In the System Configuration screen if FAIL is set to FAIL Alarm relay F2 option or FAIL Status relay F1 option the Status Relay setting items are displayed Fail Relay Status Relay Release numbers 4 and later For this function there are relays labeled FAIL and Status on the rear panel You can assign operations to these two relays On a relay that has been set to Status relay you must also set the DX status that will be relayed On DXs without the AS1 advanced security AS1 option The relays can be set to Fail or Status relay On DXs with the AS1 advanced security AS1 option The relays can be set to Fail Status relay Mem sample Invalid user or Login Memory Media Information Measurement Error Communication Error
324. the network domain name that the DX1000 DX2000 belongs to using up to 64 characters You do not have to set this parameter e Server Primary Server Secondary Register up to two IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS servers e Domain Primary Domain Secondary Set up to two domain suffixes primary and secondary 3 57 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings 3 58 When obtaining the IP address from DHCP e DHCP Set DHCP to ON e DNS accession To automatically obtain the DNS server address select ON Otherwise select OFF If you select OFF you must set the IP address of the DNS server e Host Name Register To automatically register the host name select ON e Host Name Set the DX1000 DX2000 s host name using up to 64 alphanumeric characters e Domain Name Set the network domain name that the DX belongs to using up to 64 characters e Server Primary Server Secondary not necessary when DNS accession is enabled Register up to two IP addresses for the primary and secondary DNS servers e Domain Primary Domain Secondary Set up to two domain suffixes primary and secondary Keep Alive To disconnect when there is no response to the test packets that are periodically sent select ON Otherwise select OFF Time out To use the application timeout function select ON Otherwise select OFF If you select ON a Timeout time is displayed e Timeout time min Set the timeou
325. time is when the report file is divided Set the values in the range indicated below Items with a dash are invalid Report Type Day Week day Time Hour 0 to 23 Day 1 to 28 0 to 23 Hour Day 0 to 23 Day Week SUN to SAT 0 to 23 Day Month 1 to 28 0 to 23 You cannot specify 29 30 or 31 Report Channel No The report is output in order by this number Use Select ON for the report channels to be used CH No Set the channel to assign to the report channel All channels can be assigned but reports are not created for channels set to Skip or OFF even if they are assigned Sum Scale Set the sum scale to s to day to match the unit of the measured value Example If the unit of the measured value is m min select min OFF Sums as is the measured data per scan interval IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 37 000ZAW 000 LAIN 24 Bun yuo Ka 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Key Lock si Environment Password gil Password D scan Interval Key Measure Function Q Free Lock I Report a i Free Lock Key Lock Fh loch MEMU Qi Free Lock Ethernet USER Qi Free Lock s1 Serial DISPENTER i Free i Lock a Free Lock Alarm Ack Gi Free Lock Message Batch i Free Lock hath Gi Free Lock Data Save Qi Free Lock E Mail F TP i Free Lock Time operation i Free Lock Display operation i Free Lock Media USE Media Gi Free Lock Load settings i Free QP
326. tings Click either one Or choose the Setting menu SETUP Basic Setting Setting Control oop Controliint Contro Ex a Se ting Setup Prog am pattern l Temperature Temperature Unit wc Fr et Time zone o Timer Report SMT i 00 m Ue perature T J AUX e TagiChannel G Channel Tag I Network Memory Alarm n d Control Action Language Gi English Japanese Germany French Chinese Goapele Partial Go Mot Use Batch Mot i Use External Loop Tag Channel Select whether to use the tag name or channel number as the measurement computation channel label If you select tag name you can select the label display from tag and channel see page 5 55 Memory Alarm Free internal memory is monitored and the memory end output can be programmed to activate some period of time before the memory is completely full This time period is called the memory alarm time Language Select the language English Japanese Germany French or Chinese to be used on the CX s display Note Beware that if you configure the system after receiving setup data from the CX the received setup data will be initialized For information on system configuration refer to section 3 2 Setting and Checking the System Configuration and Initializing Setup Data IM 04L41B01 64EN 5 51 000ZX9 0001 XD 24 Hbulinbiyu0g o 5 7 Measurement Function Basic Settings Partial If set to Not the partial expanded display setti
327. tinue gt Wait action Off E i Drag the bar f 00 30 00 00 50 00 01 30 00 00 00 01 to change the display area Time event display i Start value for selected segment Duration of segment Minimum value for target setpoints 5 37 000ZX9 0001LXD 24 Buln uos o 5 6 Program Control Related Setup Operations 5 38 Select the Segment Click the Segment No arrow or click the desired segment in the program pattern display screen Select Setpoints Enter a program pattern for each segment Click this tab ST aCe Repeat a eae Ramp Soak P Ramp Soak Select Ram p Soak Target setpoint Loop number 2agEa Loop 2 85 0 Start setpoint Esaa specified under Ease Loop 5 160 0 Default setting Enter target setpoints Starting fromthe ER IEZ Enter the segment duration second segment Pa Ramp Rate Time Units this is the target Slope setpoint of the Segment PID group No Segment PID group number ME I Segment shift action Wait action C Wait time Fe num Wait zone number previous segment Note The program pattern waveform displayed on screen is not strictly accurate e Ramp Soak select Select the type of segment to be specified Ramp or Soak Target setpoint ramp segment only Set the final SP of the ramp segment in the range of EU 0 0 to 100 0 initial value is 0 of the measurement span For style 3 or later the target setpoint setting for loops tur
328. tion until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed Internal Switch AND Select the internal switches that are to operate using AND logic Set the range of internal switches from the first internal switch to take the AND logic All subsequent switches will be set to OR logic Relay AND Select the relays that are to operate using AND logic Set the range of relays from the first alarm relay to take the AND logic All subsequent relays will be set to OR logic Available settings are None l01 101 only 101 102 101 and 102 101 103 101 to 103 etc Only alarm output relays that are installed are valid Note When reflash is turned ON the operation of the first three output relays is fixed to OR logic Specifying AND produces no effect Relay action Select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de energized when an alarm occurs The setting applies to all alarm output relays IM 04L41B01 64EN Scan Interval IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings Relay hold Select the alarm output relay behavior from below The setting applies to all relays Settings Description Unhold Turns the output relay OFF when the alarm condition is released returns to normal condition Hold Holds the output relay at ON until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed Relay Action on ACK Settings Description Normal The relay output is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed If the condition for
329. ttings Range Type PV1 PV2 Remote Select the voltage range thermocouple and resistive temperature detector type VOLT 20mV 60mV 200mV 2V 6V 20V or 50V TC Typek TypeJ TypeT TypeB TypeS TypeR TypeN TypeE TypeL TypeU TypeW PLATINEL PR40 20 or WRe3 25 RTD JPt100 or Pt100 When SCALE 1 5V is set to 1 5V Range Type is fixed to 6V Span PV1 PV2 Remote Specify the measurement span such that the upper limit is greater than the lower limit Scale PV1 PV2 Remote Specify the scale for each loop between 30000 and 30000 such that upper limit gt lower limit and upper limit lower limit lt 30000 Set the decimal place in the range from 0 to 4 Only available when Scale is selected under Scale 1 5V For details refer to the CX User s Manual IM 04L31A01 01E or IM 04L31A01 03E Unit PV1 PV2 Remote Specify the units for each loop Use a maximum of 6 alphanumeric characters Sart PV1 PV2 Remote Select or clear the check box to turn the square root function ON or OFF When it is ON set Low Cut between 0 0 and 5 0 Bias PV1 PV2 Remote Select the check box to turn the bias ON OFF When it is ON enter the setting for EUS 100 to 100 of the measurement span Filter PV1 PV2 Remote Select the check box to turn the filter ON OFF When it is ON set between 1 and 120 Ratio setting Remote Turn ON when applying the designated ratio to remote measurement input When turned O
330. urky Paswoord Managemen amure danme Data Fig h Low Arma relator mode Sever Secondary Time zone ist weekday SNIP Language Menu dEptay Trend Rate Switching Change Message Comm Securky Auto Save Rate of Change nyess i 1 5 Printing Setup Data File name System configuration on the recorder Setup items Page number WW D Oo D c a eQ w gt O s gt Z w gt A g 1 5 Printing Setup Data Print Setup 1 Select File Print Setting Print Setup Adobe POF Properties Status Ready Type Adobe POF Converter Wher bly Documents Comment Creates Adobe PDF Paper Orientation Size Letter h f Portrait Ls S Ounce Automatically Select Landscape Network Cancel 2 Set the printer paper and orientation Note Set the printer according to the environment of the system that you are using Print Preview You can preview the print layout before actually printing the data Selecting File Print Preview displays the print preview screen Printing 1 Click the Print button or choose File Print from the menu bar Ee Hardware Configurator NewFile Fie Comm Setting System View Mew Ctrl M Open Chrl a Save Ctrl 5 File Comm Setting System View aE iol een i Print Ctrl F D ekl gt 2 Preview Measure chann print General settin Print Setting The Print dialog box appears
331. used in the data file names IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings e Service port The following table indicates the number of simultaneous uses number of users that can use the function simultaneously the maximum number of connections and the port number for each function Function Maximum Number of Simultaneous Uses Port No Number of Administrator User Connections FTP server 2 2 a7 21 tcp Web server HTTP 1 80 tcp SNTP server 123 udp Modbus server 2 502 tcp ee Instrument 34264 udp information server There are user limitations For details see the MV1000 MV2000 Communication interface User s Manual IM MV1000 17E 2 The port number is fixed 3 The default port number You can set the value in the range of 0 to 65535 Use the default port number unless there is a special reason not to do so e Status Relay If an abnormality occurs with items turned ON relay contact output is performed In the System Configuration screen if FAIL is set to FAIL Alarm relay or FAIL Status relay the Status Relay setting items are displayed Detail Setting Basic setting S Environment I Basic Environment i Tag Channel Detail Setting Language i Engish Japanese Chinese German French Korean L Option jesse Point Type i Point GQ Comma Alarm Scan Interval i Measure Function ee orf GON Report Digit of lot number
332. val for sending e mail to Recipient1 and Recipient2 from 1 2 3 4 6 8 12 and 24 hours e Ref time Enter the time used as a reference for sending the e mail at the specified interval to Recipient1 and Recipientz2 e Include INST Include source URL Subject and Header See the explanation of alarm mail The default subject is Periodic_data 3 65 000ZXG 0001Xq 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings System System_wamning Specify the settings for sending e mail when the DX recovers from a power failure at memory end when an error occurs and when there is an invalid user only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option e Recipient and Recipient2 Set the e mail recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select ON to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is System_warning 3 66 IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings Specify the settings for sending e mail when reports are created e Recipient and Recipient2 Set the recipients For Recipient1 and Recipient2 select On to send e mail or OFF to not send e mail e Include source URL Subject and Header These items are the same as the e mail that is sent when an alarm occurs The default subject is Report_data 3 67 000ZXG 0001Xd 24 BulinByu0g e 3 6 Entering Basic Settings SNTP Cl
333. wise select OFF If you select ON a Timeout time is displayed e Timeout time min Set the timeout value between 1 and 120 minutes Checking the communication status The Ethernet communication status can be confirmed with the LED lamp that is provided on the Ethernet connector on the MV1000 MV2000 rear panel or the Ethernet link that is shown at the upper right of the basic setting screen IM 04L41B01 64EN IM 04L41B01 64EN 4 6 Entering Basic Settings FTP Environment FTP Transfer File si Alarm Display amp Event data i OFF oN J Scan Interval Snapshot G OFF oN Measure Function Report data J oF on I Report Key Lock primar o Secondary Login Connect to S Ethernet Server Mame TEPAF Port Mo elle Login Mame _ Modbus client z Password d E Mail SNTP client ar 2 Server functions PASY G OFF oN The data files are automatically transferred to the FTP destination File Type Description Display data file Data files are automatically transferred at each file save interval Event data file Files are automatically transferred when the data length of data is recorded Report file Data files are automatically transferred every time a report is created Snapshot data file The files are automatically transferred when a snapshot is executed They are transferred regardless of the media storage setting Indicates snapshot using the FUNC key communication c
334. ws the annunciator sequence Settings Description Normal The relay output is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed If the condition for activating the alarm output relay is met in the next scan interval the relay output is activated This operation is valid only when the alarm output relay is set to Hold Reset The relay output is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed If a new condition for activating the alarm output relay the relay is activated Note When reflash is turned ON the operation of the first three output relays is set to nonhold Specifying Hold produces no effect Measure channel High Low Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence release of the high low limit alarm specified on measurement channels Selectable range 0 0 to 5 0 of the span or scaling width Measure channel Delta High Low Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence release of the difference high low limit alarm specified on measurement channels Selectable range 0 0 to 5 0 of the span Math channel High Low Ext channel High Low Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence release of the high low limit alarm specified on computation and external input channels Selectable range 0 0 to 5 0 of the measurement span 3 48 IM 04L41B01 64EN 3 6 Entering Basic Settings IM 04L41B01 64EN Alarm action e No Logging Select ON to hide alarm indication The Detect setting is enabled in th
335. yed as Over and Over respectively Over The value is set to over range if the value is less than 5 of the scale and over range if the value is greater than 105 The value is displayed as Over and Over respectively Example If the scale is 0 0 to 200 0 the value is set to over range if the value is less than 10 0 of the scale and over range if the value is greater than 210 0 Note For computations such as TLOG CLOG and report the handling of the scale over range value can be set in advance Key Security Settings Description Login Enables only registered users to operate the DX using keys The User registration is displayed in the Basic Setting tab The Key Security setting is fixed at Login on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Keylock Enables the key lock function Set the key lock function in the Basic Setting tab This option cannot be selected on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option OFF Disables the security functions This option cannot be selected on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Comm Security Settings Description Login Enables only registered users to operate the DX via communications The User registration is displayed in the basic setting mode menu OFF Disables the security functions Multi Login Only on DXs with the AS1 advanced security option Setting Description On The multi login function is used At the same time one user can log in th

DXA120 DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents